LEA Reviewer

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION
CRIMINOLOGY REVIEW CENTER

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
REVIEW NOTES IN LAW ENFORECEMENT ADMINISTRATION
POLICE MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION
The setting below shows that management is related with administration in an
organizational environment. Management pertains to the utilization of available resources in an
organization while administration refers to the processes used.
The organization with management and administration is directed towards the
achievement of goals and objectives. Goals are broad statements of general and long-term
organizational purposes often used to define the role of the police, for instance, to prevent crime,
maintain order or help solve community problems. Objectives are specific short term statements
consistent with an organizations goal.
Both goals and objectives are important because they help to identify the expectations of
what the police are doing and how productively (efficient and effective) they perform.
Police Productivity and Managerial Performance
An effective police manager must be concerned with the productivity of police work teams and
their members.
Productivity means the summary of measures of the quantity and quality of police work
performance achieved, with resource utilization considered.
Good police managers establish and support the conditions needed to ensure high productivity
for themselves, for individual contributors, for their work units, and for the organization as a
whole.
This involves a commitment to the accomplishment of two different, but complimentary, police
performance outcomes:
Police Effectiveness, which measures whether or not important task goals are being
attained
Police Efficiency, which measures how well resources are being utilized.
Performance Effectiveness + Performance Efficiency = High Productivity

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
The formula illustrates that one outcome is not enough, achieving high productivity requires
both performance effectiveness and efficiency.
Police Management Processes
The management process involves Planning Organizing Leading Controlling the
use of organizational resources to achieve high performance results.
Planning is the process of setting performance objectives and identifying the actions
needed to accomplish them.
Organizing is the process of dividing the work to be done and coordinating results to
achieve a desired purpose.
Leading is the process of directing and coordinating the work efforts of other people to help
them accomplish important task.
Controlling is the process of monitoring performance, comparing results to objectives and
taking corrective action as necessary.
Police Managerial Activities and Roles
Interpersonal Roles working directly with other people
Figurehead hosting and attending official ceremonies

Leadership creating enthusiasm and serving peoples needs
Liaison maintaining contacts with important people and groups
Informational Roles exchange information with other people

Monitor seeking out relevant information
Disseminator sharing information with insiders
Spokesperson sharing information with outsiders
Decisional Roles make decisions that affects other people
Entrepreneur seeking problems to solve and opportunities to

explore
Disturbance handler helping to resolve conflicts
Resource Allocator allocating resources to various uses
Negotiator negotiating with other parties

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
The Traditional & Contemporary
Foundations of Police Organization and Management
The Classical Approach
The three primary areas in the development of the classical approach are:
1. Scientific Management
(Frederick Taylor, 1856-1915)
Scientific Management sought to discover the best method of performing specific task.
Based on his studies, Taylor believed that if workers were taught the best procedures, with
pay tied to output, they would produce the maximum amount of work.
With respect to this philosophy, the role of management changed abruptly from the earlier
use of the rule of the thumb to a more scientific approach, including scientifically selecting,
training, and developing workers, and ensuring that all the work would be done in accordance
with scientific principles, thus scientific management strongly adhered to the formal
organization structure and its rules.
2. Bureaucratic Management
(Max Weber, 1864-1920)
The concept of Bureaucracy is generally associated with the work of Max Weber, who
was the major contributor to modern sociology.
He studied the effect of social change in Europe at the end of the 19 th Century and coined
the term BUREAUCRACY to identify the complex organizations that operated on a rational
basis.
Weber believed that such an approach was a means of lessening the cruelty, nepotism,
and subjective managerial practices common in the early stages of the Industrial Revolution.
(for example, it was a standard practice to hire relatives regardless of their competence and
to allow only individuals of aristocratic birth to attain high-level positions within government
and industry)

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Characteristics of Bureaucratic Organization
Division of labor based on a specified sphere of competence

Hierarchy of authority where its lower office is under the
control and supervision of a higher one.
Specified set of rules applied uniformly throughout the
organization
Maintenance of interpersonal relationships, because rational
decisions can only be made objectively and without emotions
Selection and promotion based on competence, not on
irrelevant considerations
3. Administrative Management
It emphasizes broad administrative principles applicable to higher levels with in the
organization.
Henri Fayol (1841-1945) in his most influential work Industrial and General
Management, 14 principles of efficient management was identified.
Division of Work - work specialization can increase efficiency with the same amount of effort.
Authority and Responsibility authority includes the right to command and the power to require
obedience; one can not have authority without responsibility.
Discipline Discipline is necessary for an organization to function effectively, however, the state
of the disciplinary process depends upon the quality of its leaders.
Unity of Command - employee should receive orders from one superior only.
Unity of Direction there should be one manager and one plan for a group of activities that have
the same objective.
Subordination of individual interest to general interest the interest of one employee or group
of employees should not take precedence over those of the organization as a whole.
Remuneration of Personnel compensation should be fair to both the employee and the
employer.
Centralization the proper amount of centralization depends on the situation. The objective is to
pursue the optimum utilization of the capabilities of personnel

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Scalar Chain the hierarchy of authority is the order of ranks from the highest to the lowest
levels of the organization. Besides this vertical communication should also be encourage as long
as the managers is in the chain are kept informed.
Order materials and human resources should be in the right place at the right time; individuals
should be in jobs or position that suits them.
Equity employees should be treated with kindness and justice
Stability of personnel tenure - an employee needs time to adjust to a new job and reach a point
of satisfactory performance; high turnover should be avoided.
Initiative the ability to conceive and execute a plan (through initiative and freedom) should be
encouraged and developed throughout all levels of the organization.
Espirit de Corps union Unity is strength; Harmony and teamwork are essential to effective
organizations.
Gulick and Urwick (1920-1937)

Pioneers of The Science of a Administration (1937)
In this book, they have described the major functions of administration using the
acronym POSDCRB.
Planning working out in broad outline the things that need to be done and the
methods for doing them to accomplish the purpose set for the enterprise.
Organizing establishment of the formal structure of authority through which
work subdivisions are arranged, defined, and coordinated for the define objective.
Staffing personnel function of bringing in and out training the staff and
maintaining the staff the favorable conditions of work. Filling the organization with the
right people and right position.
Directing task of making decisions and embodying them in specific and
general orders and instructions and serving as the leader of the enterprise
Coordinating - the all-important duty of interrelating the various parts of the
work.
Reporting is keeping those to whom the executive is responsible informed as
to what is going on, which thus includes keeping himself and his subordinates
informed through records research and inspection.
Budgeting with all that goes of budgeting in the form of fiscal planning,
accounting, and control
Human Relations Approach

1.
Elton Mayo (the Hawthorne study)

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
The results of Hawthorne experiment contradicted the traditional views of management
emphasized by the classical theorists and led to the behavioral approach emphasizing
concern for the workers. The study suggests that when special attention is paid to employees
by management, productivity is likely to increase regardless of changes in working conditions.
This phenomenon was labeled the Hawthorne effect.
Behavioral Science Approach
In order to be classified as behavioral science, a field must:
Deal with human behavior
Study its subject matter in a scientific manner
The behavioral science approach utilizes scientific method as the foundation for testing and
developing theories about human behavior in organizations that can be used to guide and
develop managerial policies and practices.
Contributors to this approach
1. Abraham Maslow (Maslows hierarchy of needs theory)
1940s see discussion on Motivation Theories
2. D. McGregor (McGregors Theory X and Y)
Theory X assumes that people have little ambition, dislike work, and must be coerced in
order to perform satisfactorily. Theory Y assumes that people do not inherently dislike
work and if properly rewarded, especially satisfying esteem and self actualization needs,
will perform well on the job.
Theory X Assumptions
The average person inherently dislikes work and will try to avoid it
Most people must be coerced, controlled, directed, and threatened with punishment
to get them to work towards organizational goals
The average person prefers to be directed, wants to avoid responsibility, has
relatively little ambition, and seeks security above all.
Theory Y Assumptions
Work, whether physical or mental, is as natural as play or rest, and most people do
not inherently dislike it
External control and threat of punishment are not the only means of bringing about
effort toward organizational goals, people will exercise self-direction and selfcontrol when they are committed
Commitment to goals is a function of the rewards made available
An average person learns, under proper conditions, not only to accept but to seek
responsibility

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Importance to the Police Manager

Police managers who believe in theory X will set up strict controls and attempt to
motivate workers strictly through economic incentives. Employees are most likely to respond in
an immature manner that reinforces the managers assumption.
By contrast, police managers who believe in theory Y will treat employees in a mature
way by minimizing controls, encouraging creativity and innovation and attempt to make work
more satisfying high order needs.
Extensive researches (like those of Likert, 1967) has concluded that managerial system
should shift to Theory Y assumptions to make better of human resources and enhance both the
effectiveness and efficiency of organizations. This approach help managers to develop a broader
perspective on workers and the work environment, especially regarding alternative ways of
interacting with police officers and of recognizing the potential impact of higher level needs in job
performance.
Contemporary Approaches
This is the movement towards quality management. Theorists have incorporated the
influences of the behavioral science and other earlier school of thoughts.
1. The System Theory - It simply means that all parts of a system are interrelated and
interdependent to form the whole. A system is composed of elements or subsystems that
are related and dependent upon one another. When these subsystems are in interaction
with one another, they form a unitary whole.
2. The Contingency Theory This approach recognizes that many internal and external
environmental variables affect organizational behavior. In this case, there is no best way
for structuring and managing diverse types of organizations. So the underlying theme of
this theory is that it all depends on a particular situation. The task of managers then is to
determine in which situations and at what times certain methods or techniques are the
most effective. In this way, the approach is more pragmatic although it encompasses
relevant concepts of both classical and behavioral theories.

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
3. Theory Z and Quality Management - Important emerging perspectives include Theory Z
and Quality Management, focused on the Japanese management practices. The
emergence of Total Quality Management (TQM) practices a customer oriented
approach and emphasizes on both human resources and quantitative methods in an
attempt to strive towards continuous improvement.
Motivation and the Police Force
Police organizations are replete with stories of organizational restructuring and reengineering. As a common trend in these stories are retrenchments or rightsizing (in police
parlance are called attrition) as sometimes called. The direct outcome is that employees are
expected to do more with less and the creation of an atmosphere of uncertainty, insecurity, and
fear of future retrenchment. For this, it is difficult to sustain high levels of employee commitment
and loyalty. Thus, the challenge is to rebuild high loyalty and commitment for high level of
performance.
The individuals willingness to perform is directly related to the needs, expectations and
values held by the individual, and their link to the incentives or aspirations presented by the
organizational reward system.
If the outcome is positively reinforced through goal attainment then the individual
experiences a reduction in pressure or tension and the expended effort to achieve the outcome is
positively reinforced through goal attainment. On the other hand, if outcome is frustrated, the
individual experiences goal frustration and has the option to exit, renew, or adopt a negative
response.
The complexity of the work motivational processes emphasizes the importance of
individual needs, expectations, and values as key elements in the process. If the negative
consequences of goal frustration are to be avoided, the manager has the challenge to create an
organization in which the impediments to performance are kept to a minimum.
What are the Motivation theories?
1. Maslows Hierarchy of Needs theory
Bernstein, et al (1991) offered that at any time, many motives might guide a persons
behavior. What determines which ones will? Abraham Maslow has given a perspective that
addresses this question. He suggested basic classes of needs, or motives, influencing human
behavior. These motives are organized in a hierarchy.

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Abraham Maslow has suggested that human needs form a hierarchy from the most basic
biological requirements to the needs for self-actualization the highest of all needs.
The pyramidal structures of human needs from the bottom to the top of the hierarchy, the
levels of needs or motive according to Maslow, are:
Biological or Physiological Needs these motives include the need for food, water,
oxygen, activity, and sleep.
Safety Needs these pertain to the motives of being cared for and being secured such
as in income and place to live.
Love/Belongingness Belongingness is integration into various kinds of social groups or
social organizations. Love needs means need for affection.
Cognitive Needs our motivation for learning and exploration
Esteem Needs our motivation for an honest, fundamental respect for a person as a
useful and honorable human being.
Aesthetic Needs - our motivation for beauty and order
Self- actualization pertains to human total satisfaction, when people are motivated not
so much by unmet needs, as by the desire to become all they are capable of (selfrealization).
According to the Maslows formulation, the level that commands the individuals attention
and effort is ordinarily the lowest one on which there is an unmet need. For example, unless needs
for food and safety are reasonably well-met behavior will be dominated by these needs and higher
motives are of little significant. With their gratification, however, the individual is free to devote time
and effort to meet higher level. In other words, one level must at least be partially satisfied before
those at the next level become determiners of action.
2. Aldefers ERG Theory
Clayton Aldefer has develop the ERG theory which is a modification of the Maslows
theory. ERG theory categorizes needs into Existence, Relatedness and Growth needs.
According to Aldefer:
Existence Needs are desires for physiological and material well-being
Relatedness Needs are desires for satisfying interpersonal relationships
Growth Needs are desires for continued personal growth and development.
3. McClellands Acquired Needs Theory

www.rkmfiles.net
10
*********************************************************************
David McClelland identified three types of acquired needs. These are:
Need for Achievement the desire to do something better or more efficiently, to
solve problems, or to master complex task.
Need for Affiliation the desire to establish and maintain friendly and warm
relations with others
Need for Power the desire to control others, to influence their behavior, or to be
responsible for others.
McClellands view is that these three needs are acquired over time, as a result of life
experiences. People are motivated by these needs, each of which can be associated with
individual work preferences.
POLICE PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT
Police Personnel Management Defined
Police Personnel Management (Human Resources Management) may be defined as
that area of management concerned with human relations in the police organization. As an
overview, Police Personnel Management uses planning, organizing, directing and controlling of
day-to-day activities involved in procuring, developing and motivating them and in coordinating
their activities to achieve the aims of the police.
Efficient management of human resources in any organization can spell the difference
between its success and failure to attain its objectives or goals.
The need for a more efficient management of human resources is very demanding today. The
success of every organization is for the organization to overcome the demands in human
response brought about by several factors.
Purpose of Police Personnel Administration
The prime objective of an effective police personnel administration is the establishment
and maintenance for the public service of a competent and well-trained police force, under such
conditions of work that this force may be completely loyal to the interests of the government of all
times.

www.rkmfiles.net
11
*********************************************************************
Objectives of Personnel Management
The management of human resources is delegated to the unit of organization, known as
Human Resource Department (HRD). This is to provide services and assistance needed by the
organizations human resource in their employment relationship with the organization. An
important task of the Human Resource Department is winning employees acceptance of
organizations objectives.
The objectives are:
1. To assist top and line management achieves the organizations objective of fostering
harmonious relationship with its human resource.
2. To acquire capable people and provide them with opportunities for advancement in
self-development.
3. To assist top management in formulating policies and programs that will serve the
requirements of the police organization and administer the same fairly to all members.
4. To provide technical services and assistance to the operating management in relation to
their personnel functions in promoting satisfactory work environment.
5. To assist management in training and developing the human resources of the
organization if it does not have a separate training department to perform its functions.
6. To see that all police members are treated equally and in the application of policies, rules
and regulations and in rendering services to them.
7. To help effect organization development and institution building effort.
Operative Functions of Police Personnel
The primary function of Personnel Department is commonly Personnel Operative
Functions. These are the following:
1. Police Personnel Planning is a study of the labor supply of jobs, which are composed
with the demands for employees in an organization to determine future personnel
requirements, which either increase or decrease. If there is an expected shortage of
personnel the organization may decide to train and develop present employees and/or
recruit from outside sources.
2. Police Recruitment - is the process of encouraging police applicant from outside an
organization to seek employment in an organization. The process of recruitment consists
of developing a recruitment plan, recruitment strategy formulation job applicants search,
screening of qualified applicants, and maintaining a waiting list of qualified applicants.

www.rkmfiles.net
12
*********************************************************************
3. Police Selections (screening) - is the process of determining the most qualified police
applicant for a given position in the police organization.
4. Police Placement- is the process of making police officers adjusted and knowledgeable
in a new job and or working environment.
5. Police Training and Development refers to any method used to improve the attitude,
knowledge, and skill or behavior pattern of an employee for adequate performance of a
given job. It is a day-to-day, year round task. All police officers on a new position undergo
a learning process given a formal training or not. Learning is made easier for officers
when the organization provides formal training and development. It reduces unnecessary
waste of time, materials, man-hours and equipment.
6. Police Appraisal or Performance Rating - performance rating is the evaluation of the
traits, behavior and effectiveness of a police officer on the job as determined by work
standards. It is judgmental if it is made a tool in decision-making for promotion, transfer,
pay increase, termination or disciplinary actions against police officers. It is
developmental in purpose when the evaluation is used to facilitate officers improvement
in performance or used to improve recruitment, selection, training and development of
personnel.
7. Police Compensation - Financial compensation in the form of wages of salaries
constitutes the largest single expenditure for most organizations. In Metropolitan Manila
and other urban centers, wages of salaries represent the sole source to meet the basic
needs of food, clothing and shelter. It also provides the means to attain that standard of
living and economic security that vary in degrees upon a persons expectations.
POLICE PERSONNEL PROGRAMS
AND POLICIES
Nature of Personnel Programs
Personnel Programs refers to the activities programmed to implement the organization
philosophy or creed and the personnel philosophy of central managers in relation to people so as
to accomplish organizational objectives. It serves as a fundamental guide for personnel practices
and personnel policies used in an organization for maintaining harmony between management
and employees. A good personnel program covers all the operative functions of personnel.

www.rkmfiles.net
13
*********************************************************************
Factor to Considered in Personnel Program
The following factors should be taken into consideration in the preparation of a personnel
program.
objectives of the organization

organizational philosophy of central management in relation to personnel,
financial conditions and physical facilities of the organization
cultural background and tradition of the people
community and employees
governmental factors.
Police Personnel Policies

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Acquiring competent personnel - includes human resources

planning, job description and job specification, police recruitment, selection, placement,
transfer, layoffs, and separation.
Holding and retaining competent police personnel - gives depth and meaning to good
management philosophy, and involves the granting of fair wages, reasonable working
hours, and other employee benefits and services. These activities include the
determination of an equitable wage and maintenance of an incentive system. This area
also concerned with securing greater officer participation in activities and with
strengthening officer morals and effectiveness. All these help make the organization a
good place to work in.
Developing and motivating personnel - deals with the education of the police officers,
the appraisal of work performance, their promotion, and the suggestion system, which
enables them to develop so they can rise to the police organizations desired standards
of performance.
Labor and human relations - involves the development of harmonious relations
between management on one hand and individual police officer the on the other hand. It
also concerns the observance and application of laws and court decisions affecting
human relations, and relationships with other government law enforcement agencies.
Efficient administration of the program with adequate budget this is to achieve a
favorable climate for police officers. Good human relations should be the attitude in the
applications, implementation and interpretation of the organizations policies, rules and
regulations. The important tools in this area are records and reports, personnel research
and statistics, and evaluation of the effects of current policies, activities, and programs.

www.rkmfiles.net
14
*********************************************************************
POLICE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
Nature of Police Policies
Policies are tools of police management, which give life and direction to the police
program of activities and set limits within which action is to be pursued by the personnel
concerned. Policies define the authority and the responsibility of subordinates. They help the
personnel understand their mutual relationships. They are ahead to guide the men on the
operational level, authority, and responsibility and to enable them to arrive at sound decisions.
A POLICY refers to a general plan of action that serves as a guide in the operation of the
organization. It makes up the basic framework of management decisions that set the course what
the organization should follow. It defines the authority and responsibility of supervisors in their job
of directing group efforts and implementing personnel programs.
Policies form a code of procedure in that they broadly indicate the best method of
conducting any portion of the work at hand. They assist police officers in problem solving and
decision-making. While policies must be consistent, they must be flexible enough to permit
adjustments when the need for change arises.
Types of Police Policies
According to origin, policies are classified as:
1. Originated Policy - This type of policy comes from top management level and is intended
to set up guidelines in the operation of the police organization.
2. Appealed Policy - This type of policy is born when problems arise at the lower levels of
the organization and the man in charge does not know how to meet the problem. He then
appeals to his superiors for guidelines and for guidance.
3. Imposed Policy - This type of policy comes from the government in the forms of laws,
administrative orders, and rules and procedures or contract specifications.
According to their subject matter, policies may be classified into:
1. General Statement of Principles - policies stated in broad terms, such as statement of
objectives, philosophy and creed. Others stress in general terms management traits,
such as fairness in dealing with officers, understanding and humane treatment of the
work force.

www.rkmfiles.net
15
*********************************************************************
2. Specific Rules - cover specific situations. They are more direct and are less flexible. They
are more rigid in nature.
Dissemination of Policies
To be effective, personnel policies must be understood by all concerned including the
managers and supervisors who are to interpret and implement them to the employees who will be
affected by the policies. Various means are used by communicate personnel policies to
employees. The most common are police handbooks, manuals, publications, memoranda, and
circulars, bulletin boards, meetings and conferences.
Police Handbooks - These handbooks are distributed to all personnel, and contain
among other things, information about the benefits and services that the organization grants to its
officers, the organizations history, its organizational structure, its officers, and other information
useful to the officers in understanding their relationship with the organization.
Police Manual - A policy manual covering all police personnel policies and procedures, if
made available to managers and supervisors, will be a great help in their decision-making and
employees relationship.
Memoranda and Circulars - Memoranda and circulars are another common means of
communicating police policies to all officers. They can be issued fast and they provide the
greatest assurance of reaching every employee. They are built in means by which every member
of the organization is reached.
Bulletin Boards - Organizational policies, rules and regulations, and activities may be
typed out of mimeographed and the posted on bulletin boards. If strategically located and well
managed, bulletin boards are an effective medium for transmitting newly issued policies, rules
and regulations to police officers.
Meetings or Conferences - Meeting or conferences are often held to inform officers
about new policies, their objectives and implementation. One advantage of this type of policy
dissemination is that it gives the officers the opportunity to ask questions and request clarification
on vague and doubtful points. It is effective to smaller departments, as they accommodate small
groups and allow the scheduling of meeting at very convenient hours.
Police Publications - Communication has gained such importance to and attention by
management in recent years. To meet the needs of communicating with officers, police
organizations have been spending amount of money on publications, internal or external.
POLICE JOB DESCRIPTION
After a job is analyzed, the facts about it are gathered, summed up, and recorded in the
job description and job specifications.

www.rkmfiles.net
16
*********************************************************************
Job description may be defined as an abstract of information derived from the job
analysis report, describing the duties performed, the skills, the training, and experience required
the responsibilities involved, the condition under which the job is done, and relation of the job to
the other job in the organization.
POLICE RECRUITMENT, SELECTION, AND PLACEMENT
On Police Recruitment
The first step in the recruiting procedure, and the one that should receive greatest
emphasis, is that of attracting well-qualified applicants. The best selection devices available are
of little value if the recruiting effort has failed to attract candidates of high caliber. Widespread
publicity directed at the particular element of the population which it is hoped will be attracted to
the examination is the best method of seeking outstanding applicants.
Recruitment in the police service is dependent on the availability of national or regional
quota of the PNP, which is determined by the NAPOLCOM.
Standard Policy on Selection and Appointment
There shall be a standard policy for the selection of policy personnel throughout the
Philippines in order to strengthen the police service and lay the groundwork for police
professionalization.
The general qualification for initial appointment to the police service shall be based on the
provisions of Republic Act No. 8551, which states:
No person shall be appointed as uniformed member of the PNP unless he or
she possesses the following minimum qualifications:
a. A citizen of the Philippines;
b. A person of good moral conduct;
c. Must have passed the psychiatric or psychological, drug and physical tests to be
administered by the PNP or by any government hospital accredited by the
Commission for the purpose of determining physical and mental health;
d. Must possess a formal baccalaureate degree from a recognized institution of
learning;
e. Must be eligible in accordance with the standards set by the Commission;

www.rkmfiles.net
17
*********************************************************************
f.
Must not have been dishonorably discharged from military employment or

dismissed for cause from any civilian position in the Government;
g. Must not have been convicted by final judgment of an offense or crime involving
moral turpitude;
h. Must be at least one meter and sixty-two centimeters (1.62m) in height for male
and one meter and fifty-seven centimeters (1.57m) for female;
i.
Must weigh not more or less than five kilograms (5kgs) from the standard weight
corresponding to his or her height, age, and sex; and
j.
For a new applicant, must not be less than twenty-one (21) not more than thirty
(30) years of age. Except for the last qualification, the above-enumerated
qualifications shall be continuing in character and an absence of any of them at
any given time shall be a ground for separation or retirement from the service:
Provided, that PNP members who are already in the service upon the effectivity of
these Implementing Rules and Regulations shall be given five (5) years to obtain
the minimum educational qualification and one (1) year to satisfy the weight
requirement.
For the purpose of determining compliance with the requirements on physical and mental
health, as well as the non-use of prohibited or regulated drugs, the PNP by itself or through a
government hospital accredited by the Commission shall conduct regular psychiatric,
psychological, drug and physical tests randomly and without notice.
After the lapse of the reglamentary period for the satisfaction of a specific requirement,
current members of the PNP who shall fail to satisfy any of the requirements enumerated under
this Section shall be separated from the service if they are below fifty (50) years of age and have
served in Government for less than twenty (20) years or retired if they are from the age of fifty
(50) and above and have served the Government for at least twenty (20) years without prejudice
in either case to the payment of benefits they may be entitled to under existing laws. (Section 14,
RA 8551 IRR)
On Selection Procedures
The purpose of the selection process is to secure these candidates who have the highest
potential for developing into good policemen. The process involves two basic functions. The first
function is to measure each candidates qualifications against whose ideal qualification that are
established chiefly through job analysis. The second function, because of the comparative nature
of the merit system, is to rank the candidates relatively on the basis of their qualifications.

www.rkmfiles.net
18
*********************************************************************
The Screening Procedures
Preliminary Interview - the applicant shall be interviewed personally by the personnel officer.
If the applicant qualifies with respect to the requirements of citizenship, education and age,
he shall be required to present the following:
Letter of application if none has been submitted

An information sheet
A copy of his picture (passport size)
Birth Certificate
Transcript of scholastic records and/ or diploma
Fingerprint card, properly accomplished.
Clearance papers from the local police department PNP provincial headquarters,
city or municipal court and city or provincial prosecutors office and his hometown
police department, NBI, and others that may be required.
Physical and Medical Examination - in order to determine whether or not the applicant is in
good health, free from any contagious diseases and physically fit for police service, he shall
undergo a thorough physical and medical examination to be conducted by the police health
officer after he qualifies in the preliminary interview.
Physical Agility Test - the Screening Committee shall require the applicant to undergo a
physical agility test designed to determine whether or not he possess the required
coordination strength, and speed of movement necessary for police service. The applicant
shall pass the tests like Pull-ups-6 Push-ups-27, Two minutes sit-ups-45, Squat jumps-32,
and Squat thrusts-20
The Police Screening Committee may prescribe additional requirements if facilities are
available.
Medical Standards for Police Candidates
General Appearance the applicant must be free from any marked deformity, from
all parasite or systematic skin disease, and from evidence of intemperance in the use
of stimulants or drugs. The body must be well proportioned, of good muscular
development, and show careful attention to personal cleanliness: Obesity, muscular
weakness or poor physique must be rejected. Girth of abdomen should not be more
than the measurement of chest at rest.
Nose, Mouth and Teeth Obstruction to free breathing, chronic cataract, or very
offensive breath must be rejected. The mouth must be free from deformities in

www.rkmfiles.net
19
*********************************************************************
conditions that interfere with distinct speech or that pre-dispose to disease of the car,
nose or throat. There shall be no disease or hypertrophy of tonsil or thyroid
enlargement. Teeth must be clean, well cared for and free from multiple cavities.
Missing teeth may be supplied by crown or bridge work, where site of teeth makes
this impossible, rubber denture will be accepted. At least twenty natural teeth must be
present.
Genitals must be free from deformities and from varicole, hyrocole, and
enlargement of the testicles, stricture of urine. Retained testicles or strophy is
rejected. Any acute and all venereal diseases of these organs must be rejected.
Varicose Veins - a marked tendency to their formation must be rejected.
Arms, Legs, Hands and Feet must be free from infection of the joints, sprains,
stiffness or other conditions, such as flat foot, long nails or hammer toes which would
prevent the proper and easy performance of duty. First (index) second (middle), and
third (ring) fingers and thumb must be present in their entirely. The toe must be the
same.
Eyes the applicant must be free from color blindness, and be able to read with
each eye separately from standard test type at a distance of twenty feet. Loss of
either eye, chronic inflammation of the lids, or permanent abnormalities of either eye
must be rejected, 20/20 or 20/30 in one eye, with binocular vision of 20/30.
Respiration must be full, easy, regular, the respiratory murmur must be clear and
distinct over the lungs and no disease of the respiratory organ is present.
Circulation The action of the heart must be uniform, free and steady, its rhythm
and the heart from organ changes. Blood Pressure systolic maximum 135; diastolic
90; pulse pressure 15 to 50. Brain and nervous system must be free from defects.
Kidneys must be healthy and urine normal.
Character and Background Investigation - the Screening Committee shall cause a

confidential investigation of the character and from among various sources.
Psychological and/or Neuro-Psychiatric Test - in order to exclude applicants who are
emotionally or temperamentally unstable, psychotic, or suffering from any mental disorder,
the applicant shall take a psychological and/or neuro-psychiatric test to be administered by
the NBI, the PNP, or other duly recognized institution offering such test after he has qualified
and met all the requirements above.
The Oral Interview - the Screening Committee shall interview the qualified applicants for
suitability for police work. The interview shall aid in determining appearance, likeableness,
affability, attitude toward work, outside interest, forcefulness, conversational ability, and
disagreeable mannerism.

www.rkmfiles.net
20
*********************************************************************
POLICE APPOINTMENT
Any applicant who meets the general qualifications for appointment to police service and
who passes the tests required in the screening procedures, shall be recommended for initial
appointment and shall be classified as follows:
Temporary if the applicant passes through the waiver program as provided in under
R.A 8551.
Probationary if the applicant passes through the regular screening procedures.
Permanent if the applicant able to finish the required field training program for
permanency.
Appointment in the PNP shall be affected in the following manner:
A. PO1 to SPO4 appointed by the PNP Regional Director for regional personnel or by the
Chief of the PNP for National Head Quarters personnel and attested by the Civil Service
Commission (CSC)
B. Inspector to Superintendent appointed by the Chief PNP as recommended by their
immediate superiors and attested by the Civil Service Commission (CSC).
C. Sr. Supt to Dep. Dir. Gen. Appointed by the President upon the recommendation of the
Chief PNP with the endorsement of the Civil Service Commission (CSC) and with
confirmation by the Commission on Appointment (CA).
D. Director General appointed by the President from among the most senior officers
down to the rank of Chief Superintendent in the service subject to the confirmation of the
Commission on Appointment (CA). Provided, that the C/PNP shall serve a tour of duty not
exceeding four (4) years. Provided further, that in times of war or other national
emergency declared by congress, the President may extend such tour of duty.
Waiver for Appointment
Waivers for initial appointment to the police service shall be governed by Section 15
of Republic Act 8551, IRR.
Appointment by Lateral Entry
In general, all original appointments of Commissioned Officers (CO) in the PNP shall
commenced with the rank of inspector to include those with highly technical qualifications
applying for the PNP technical services, such as dentist, optometrist, nurses, engineers, and
graduates of forensic sciences. Doctors of Medicine, members of the Bar and Chaplains shall
be appointed to the rank of Senior Inspector in their particular technical services. Graduates

www.rkmfiles.net
21
*********************************************************************
of the PNPA shall be automatically appointed to the initial rank of Inspector. Licensed
Criminologist may be appointed to the rank of Inspector to fill up any vacancy.
POLICE TRAINING
The Need for Police Training
Organized training is the means by which officers are provided with the knowledge and
the skills required in the performance of their multiple, complex duties. In order that the recruit
officer may commence his career with a sound foundation of police knowledge and techniques, it
is most important that the entrance level training he soundly conceived, carefully organized and
well-presented.
Training and the Changes in Police Works
During the past decades tremendous changes in police work have occurred. Advances in
technology of communications and equipment, public relations and employee relations as well as
total evolution in the whole social structure have made a law enforcement work more complex
and difficult to pursue. The ordinary officer must be briefed and oriented on new changes and
developments that affect his job and the recruit must be given a new solid foundation
contemporary with the needs of the time. Policemen do not stay trained. If they do not forget what
they have learned, it is continually made absolute by improved technology and social changes,
and requires frequent renewal to keep it current and useful.
Standards for Police Training
All training programs operated by law enforcement agencies should limit their enrolment
to law enforcement officers. Training courses should be set-up, prescribed units of instruction,
and arranged a time schedule. Practical recruit training subsequent to employment should be
provided.
Pre-and-post employment university training.
Responsibility of Training
The training of police officers shall be the responsibility of the PNP in coordination with
the Philippine Public Safety College (PPSC) which shall be the premier educational institution for

www.rkmfiles.net
22
*********************************************************************
the training of human resources in the field of law enforcement (PNP, BFP, BJMP), subject to the
supervision of the NAPOLCOM.
Types of Police Training Programs

The following are the training programs in the police service:
Basic Recruit Training

Field Training
In-Service Training programs
Department In-service training programs
National and International Conventions on Policing
The Basic Recruit Training the most basic of all police training. It is a prerequisite for
permanency of appointment.
The Basic Recruit Training shall be in accordance with the programs of instructions
prescribed by the PPSC and the NAPOLCOM subject to modifications to suit local conditions.
This course is conducted within not less than six (6) months. A training week shall normally
consist of 40 hours of scheduled instructions.
Full time attendance in the Basic Recruit Training Attendance to this type of training
is full time basis. However, in cases of emergency, recruits maybe required to render service
upon certification of the Regional Director or the City or Municipal Chief of Police the necessity of
such service.
Completion and Certification of Training After the Basic Recruit Training, the
Regional Director shall certify that the police recruits have completed the training and has
satisfied all the requirements for police service.
The PNP Field Training is the process by which an individual police officer who is
recruited into the service receives formal instruction on the job for special and defined purposes
and performs actual job functions with periodic appraisal on his performance and progress.

www.rkmfiles.net
23
*********************************************************************
Under R.A 8551, all uniformed members of the PNP shall undergo a field training
program involving actual experience and assignment in patrol, traffic and investigation as a
requirement for permanency of their appointment. The program shall be for twelve (12) months
inclusive of the Basic Recruit Training Course for non-officers and the Officer Orientation Course
or Officer Basic Course for officers. (Section 20, RA 8551 IRR)
The In-Service Training Programs
Junior Leadership Training for PO1 to PO3

Senior Leadership Training for SPO1 to SPO4
Police Basic Course (PBC) preparatory for OBC for senior police officers
Officers Basic Course (OBC) for Inspectors to Chief Inspectors
Officers Advance Course (OAC) for Chief Inspectors to Sn Superintendent
Officer Senior Education Course (OSEC) Superintendent and above
Directorial Staff Course (DSC) for directors and above.
POLICE APPRAISAL
Appraisal refers to the process of measuring the performance of people in achieving
goals and objectives. It is also known as performance evaluation system.
Purposes of Police Appraisal
1.
It serves as guide for promotion, salary

increase, retirement, and disciplinary actions.
2.
It increases productivity and efficiency of

police works.
3.
4.
It assimilate supervision
It informs the officer of the quality of his
work for improvements
Uses of Police Appraisal

Police appraisal can be useful for personal decision-making in the following areas:

www.rkmfiles.net
24
*********************************************************************
Eligibility to be hired
Salary adjustments
Determining potential for promotion
Evaluation of probationary officers
Identification of training needs
Isolating supervisory weaknesses
Validating selection techniques
Reduction in ranks (demotion)
Dismissal from service and other disciplinary actions.
PNP Appraisal System

The Performance Evaluation in the police service is the responsibility of the NAPOLCOM,
which shall issue the necessary rules and regulation for the orderly administration of the appraisal
process. Such performance evaluation shall be administered in a manner as to foster the
improvement of every individual police efficiency and behavioral discipline as well as the
promotion of the organizations effectiveness.
The rating system shall be based on the standards set by the NAPOLCOM and shall
consider results of annual physical, psychological and neuro-psychiatric examinations.
POLICE PROMOTION
Promotion is a system of increasing the rank of a member of the police service. It has the
following objectives:
1.
To invest a member of the police force

with the degree of authority necessary for the effective execution of police duties.
2.
To place the police officer in a position of
increased responsibility where he can make full use of his capabilities.
3.
To provide and promote incentives, thus
motivating greater efforts of all members of the police force, which will gradually improve
efficiency in police works.
Under the law, the NAPOLCOM shall establish a system of promotion for uniformed and
non-uniformed members of the PNP, which shall be based on:
1.
Merit includes length of service in the present rank, and

qualification.
2.
Seniority

www.rkmfiles.net
25
*********************************************************************
3.
Availability of vacant position.
The promotion shall be gender fair which means women in the PNP shall enjoy equal
opportunity for promotion as that of men.
Preferences for Promotion
1.
Appropriate Eligibility - Whenever

two or more persons who are next in rank, preference shall be given to the person who is
the most competent and qualified and who has the appropriate eligibility.
2.
Competency and Vacancy - When
competency, qualification, and eligibility are equal, preference shall be given to the
qualified member in the organizational unit where the vacancy occurs.
3.
Seniority - When all the foregoing
conditions have been taken into account, and still the members in the next rank have the
same merit and qualification, preference shall be given to the most senior officer.
Factors in Selection for Promotion
1. Efficiency of Performance as an aid to fair appraisal of the candidates proficiency,
the performance-rating period shall be considered. Provided, that in no instance shall
a candidate be considered for promotion unless he had obtained a rating of at least
satisfactory.
2. Education and Training educational background which includes completion of inservice training courses, academic studies, training grants and the like.
3. Experience and Outstanding Accomplishment this includes occupational history,
work experience and other accomplishment worthy of commendation.
4. Physical Character and Personality the factors of physical fitness and capacity as
well as attitude and personality traits in so far as they bear on the nature of the rank
and/or position to be filled. This means that the candidate should have no derogatory
records which might affect integrity, morality and conduct.
5. Leadership Potential the capacity and ability to perform the duties required in the
new or higher position and good qualities for leadership.
Kinds of Police Promotion
1.
Regular Promotion - Regular promotion shall be based on the

following requirements:

www.rkmfiles.net
26
*********************************************************************
He or she has successfully passed the corresponding promotional examination given
by the NAPOLCOM;
Passed the Bar or corresponding Board examination for technical services and other
professions;
Satisfactory completion of the appropriate accredited course in the PPSC or
equivalent training institutions;
Passed the Psychiatric, Psychological, and Drug test; and
Cleared by the Peoples Law Enforcement Board (PLEB) and the Office of the
Ombudsman for any complaints against him/her.
2.
Promotion by Virtue of Exhibited Acts (Special Promotion)
Any uniformed member of the PNP who has exhibited acts of conspicuous courage
and gallantry at the risk of his or her life above and beyond the call of duty, shall be promoted
to the next higher rank. Provided, that such act shall be validated by the NAPOLCOM based
on established criteria.
3.
Promotion by Virtue of Position
Any PNP member designated to any key position whose rank is lower than that which
is required for such position shall, after six (6) months of occupying the same, be entitled to a
promotion, subject to the availability of vacant positions. Provided, that the member shall not
be reassigned to a position calling for a higher rank until after two (2) years from the date of
such promotion. Provided, further, that any member designated to the position who does not
possess the established minimum qualifications thereof shall occupy the same for not more
than six (6) months without extension. (Section 34, RA 8551 IRR)
POLICE ASSIGNMENT
Police assignment is the process of designating a police officer at a particular function,
duty or responsibility.
Purpose of Police Assignment
The purpose of police assignment is to ensure systematic and effective utilization of all
the members of the force.

www.rkmfiles.net
27
*********************************************************************
Power to make designation or assignment
The Chief of PNP (CPNP), Regional Director (RD), Provincial Director (PD), and the City
or Municipal Chief of Police (COP) can make designation or assignment of the police force with in
their respective levels. They shall have the power to make designations or assignments as to who
among the police officers shall head and constitute various offices and units of the police
organization.
The assignment of the members of the local police agency shall be in conformity with the
career development program especially during the probationary period. Thereafter, shall be
guided by the principle of placing the right man in the right job after proper classification has been
made.
Criteria in Police Assignment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Those
possessing
the
general
qualifications for police duties without technical skills may be assigned to positions where
any personnel can acquire proficiency within considerably short period of time.
Those possessing skills acquired by
previous related experiences should be assigned to the corresponding positions.
Those possessing highly technical skills
with adequate experience and duly supported by authoritative basis shall be given
preferential assignment to the corresponding positions, which call for highly technical
trained police officers. (Misassignment of personnel falling under this criteria constitute a
serious neglect of duty of the C/PNP, RD, or the COP, in the exercise of his administrative
function)
Those selected to undergo further
studies in specialized courses shall be chosen solely on the basis of ability, professional
preparation and aptitude.
Qualifications of the police officers shall
be examined annually to ascertain newly acquired skills, specialties, and proficiencies.
Those with physical limitation incurred
while in the performance of duties should be assigned where they can be best used in
accordance with the requirements of the force.
Assignments and reassignments of the
police officers from one unit to another shall be the prerogative of the authority.
To give well rounded training and
experience to police recruits, tour of duties in various assignments during the
probationary period shall be in accordance with Republic Act 8551.

www.rkmfiles.net
28
*********************************************************************
POLICE SALARIES, BENEFITS, AND PRIVILEGES
On Salary
The uniformed members of the PNP are considered employees of the National
Government and draw their salaries therefrom. They have the same salary grade that of a public
school teacher. Police Officers assigned in Metropolitan Manila, chartered cities, and first class
municipalities may be paid with financial incentives by the local government unit concerned
subject to the availability of funds.
On Benefits and Privileges
1.
Incentives and Awards
The NAPOLCOM shall promulgate standards on incentives and award system in the PNP
administered by the Board of Incentives and Awards. Awards may be in the forms of decorations,
service medals and citation badges or in monetary considerations. The following are examples of
authorized Decorations/medals/citation:
Police Medal of Valor

Police Medal of Merit
Wounded Police Medal
Police Efficiency Medal
Police Service Medal
Police Unit Citation Badge
Posthumous Award in case a police officer dies.

2.
Health and Welfare
The NAPOLCOM is mandated to provide assistance in developing health and welfare

programs for police personnel. All heads of the PNP in their respective levels are responsible to
initiate proper steps to create a good atmosphere to a superior-subordinate relationship and
improvement of personnel morale through appropriate welfare programs.
3.
Longevity Pay and Allowances
Under Republic Act 6975, PNP personnel are entitled to a longevity pay of 10% of their
basic monthly salaries for every five years of service. However, the totality of such longevity pay
does not exceed 50% of the basic pay.

www.rkmfiles.net
29
*********************************************************************
They shall also enjoy the following allowances:
Subsistence allowance, Quarters allowance, Clothing allowance, Cost of living
allowance, Hazard pay, Others
4.
Retirement Benefit
Monthly retirement pay shall be fifty percent (50%) of the base pay and longevity pay of
the retired grade in case of twenty (20) years of active service, increasing by two and one-half
percent (2.5%) for every year of active service rendered beyond twenty (20) yeas to a maximum
of ninety percent (90%) for thirty-six (36) years of service and over: Provided, that the uniformed
member shall have the option to receive in advance and in lump sum his or her retirement pay for
the first five (5) years. Provided, further, that payment of the retirement benefits in lump sum shall
be made within six (6) months from effectivity date of retirement and/or completion. Provided,
finally, that the retirement pay of PNP members shall be subject to adjustments based on the
prevailing scale of base pay of police personnel in the active service. (Section 36, RA 8551
IRR)
5.
Permanent Physical Disability Pay
A PNP member who is permanently and totally disabled as a result of injuries suffered or
sickness contracted in the performance of duty as certified by the NAPOLCOM, upon finding and
certification by the appropriate medical officer, that the extent of the disability or sickness renders
such member unfit or unable to further perform the duties of his or her position, shall be entitled to
a gratuity equivalent to one year salary and to a lifetime pension equivalent to eighty percent
(80%) of his or her last salary, in addition to other benefits as provided under existing laws.
Should such member who has been retired under permanent total disability under this
Section die within five (5) years from his retirement, his surviving legal spouse or, if there be
none, the surviving dependent legitimate children shall be entitled to the pension for the
remainder of the five (5) year guaranteed period. (Section 37, RA 8551 IRR)
6.
Early Retirement Benefit
A PNP member of his or her own request and with the approval of the NAPOLCOM, retire
from the service shall be paid separation benefits corresponding to a position two ranks higher
than his present rank provided that the officer or non-officer has accumulated at least 20 years of
service.

www.rkmfiles.net
30
*********************************************************************
POLICE INSPECTION
The purpose of police inspection is to ascertain the standard policies and procedures,
review and analyze the performance, activities and facilities affecting operations and to look into
the morale, needs and general efficiency of the police organization in maintaining law and order.
Types of Police Inspection
1.
Authoritative
Inspection
those
conducted by the head of subordinate units in a regular basis.
2.
Staff Inspection those conducted by
the staff for and in behalf of the Chief PNP or superior officers in command of various
units or departments.
Nature of Police Inspection
1.
Internal Affairs inspection on internal

affairs embraces administration, training, operation, intelligence, investigation, morale
and discipline as well as the financial condition of the police organization.
2.
External Affairs it embraces the
community relationship of the organization, the crime and vice situation of the locality,
and the prevailing public opinion concerning the integrity and reputation of the personnel.
Authority to Inspect
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the PNP, the following are the authority to conduct inspection:

NAPOLCOM or its representative
PNP Chief or his designated representative
PNP Director for Personnel or his representative
PNP Regional Director or his representative
City/Municipal Chief of Police or his representative
Internal Affairs Service (IAS under RA 8551)
The inspecting officer/s shall examine, audit, inspect police agencies in accordance with
existing standards and with the following objectives:
1.
To take note or discover defects and
irregularities
2.
To effect corrections on minor
defects being discovered

www.rkmfiles.net
31
*********************************************************************
3.
To bring to the attention of and

recommend to the concerned officers for appropriate actions on defects noted.
Where the irregularity noted during inspection is serious as to warrant administrative

charges against a police officer, the inspecting officer shall immediately file the necessary charge
or charges before the appropriate disciplinary action offices.
POLICE DISCIPLINARY MECHANISM
Aside from higher police management levels that can impose disciplinary actions against
subordinates, the following also serves as disciplinary mechanisms in the police service:
Administrative Disciplinary Powers of the Local Chief Executive (LCE) - The City
and Municipal Mayors shall have the power to impose, after due notice and summary hearings,
disciplinary penalties for minor offenses committed by members of the PNP assigned to their
respective jurisdictions as provided in Section 41 of Republic Act No. 6975, as amended by
Section 52 of Republic Act No. 8551.
PLEB - the PLEB (People's Law Enforcement Board) is the central receiving entity for
any citizen's complaint against PNP members. As such, every citizen's complaint, regardless of
the imposable penalty for the offense alleged, shall be filed with the PLEB of the city or
municipality where the offense was allegedly committed. Upon receipt and docketing of the
complaint, the PLEB shall immediately determine whether the offense alleged therein is grave,
less grave or minor.
Should the PLEB find that the offense alleged is grave or less grave, the Board shall
assume jurisdiction to hear and decide the complaint by serving summons upon the respondent
within three (3) days from receipt of the complaint. If the PLEB finds that the offense alleged is
minor, it shall refer the complaint to the Mayor or Chief of Police, as the case may be, of the city
or municipality where the PNP member is assigned within three (3) days upon the filing thereof.
If the city or municipality where the offense was committed has no PLEB, the citizen's
complaint shall be filed with the regional or provincial office of the Commission (NAPOLCOM)
nearest the residence of the complainant.
Administrative Offenses that may be imposed against a PNP Member
The following are the offense for which a member of the PNP may be charged
administratively:

www.rkmfiles.net
32
*********************************************************************
Neglect of duty or nonfeasance it is the omission or refusal, without sufficient excuse,
to perform an act or duty, which it was the peace officers legal obligation to perform; it
implies a duty as well as its breach and the fast can never be found in the absence of a
duty.
Irregularities in the performance of duty it is the improper performance of some act
which might lawfully be done.
Misconduct or Malfeasance it is the doing, either through ignorance, inattention or
malice, of that which the officer had no legal right to do at all, as where he acts without
any authority whatsoever, or exceeds, ignores or abuses his powers.
Incompetency it is the manifest lack of adequate ability and fitness for the satisfactory
performance of police duties. This has reference to any physical, moral or intellectual
quality the lack of which substantially incapacitates one to perform the duties of a peace
officer.
Oppression it imports an act of cruelty, severity, unlawful exaction, domination, or
excessive use of authority. The exercise of the unlawful powers or other means, in
depriving an individual of his liberty or property against his will, is generally an act of
oppression.
Dishonesty it is the concealment or distortion of truth in a matter of fact relevant to
ones office, or connected with the performance of his duties.
Disloyalty to the Government it consist of abandonment or renunciation of ones
loyalty to the Government of the Philippines, or advocating the overthrow of the
government.
Violation of Law this presupposes conviction in court of any crime or offense penalized
under the Revised Penal Code or any special law or ordinance.
THE POLICE ORGANIZATION

Organization defined
It is a form of human association for the attainment of a goal or objective. It is the process
of identifying and grouping the work to be performed, defining and delegating responsibility and
authority establishing relationships for the purpose of enabling people work effectively.

www.rkmfiles.net
33
*********************************************************************
Police Organization defined
Police organization is a group of trained personnel in the field of public safety
administration engaged in the achievement of goals and objectives that promotes the
maintenance of peace and order, protection of life and property, enforcement of the laws and the
prevention of crimes.
The organization of the police force commonly requires the following organizational units:
Functional Units
1. Bureau the largest organic functional unit within a large department. It comprises of
numbers of divisions.
2. Division a primary subdivision of a bureau.
3. Section functional unit within a division that is necessary for specialization.
4. Unit functional group within a section; or the smallest functional group with in an
organization.
Territorial Units
1. Post a fixed point or location to which an officer is assigned for duty, such as a
designated desk or office or an intersection or cross walk from traffic duty. It is a spot
location for general guard duty.
2. Route a length of streets designated for patrol purposes. It is also called LINE BEAT.
3. Beat An area assigned for patrol purposes, whether foot or motorized.
4. Sector An area containing two or more beats, routes, or posts.
5. District a geographical subdivision of a city for patrol purposes, usually with its own
station.
6. Area a section or territorial division of a large city each comprised of designated
districts.
Other Items and Terminologies

1. Sworn Officers all personnel of the police department who have oath and who posses
the power to arrest.
2. Superior Officer - one having supervisory responsibilities, either temporarily or
permanently, over officers of lower rank.
3. Commanding Officer - an officer who is in command of the department, a bureau, a
division, an area, or a district.

www.rkmfiles.net
34
*********************************************************************
4. Ranking Officer - the officer who has the more senior rank/higher rank in a team or
group.
5. Length of Service - the period of time that has elapsed since the oath of office was
administered. Previous active services may be included or added.
6. On Duty - the period when an officer is actively engaged in the performance of his duty.
7. Off Duty - the nature of which the police officer is free from specific routine duty.
8. Special Duty - the police service, its nature, which requires that the officer be excused
from the performance of his active regular duty.
9. Leave of Absence - period, which an officer is excused from active duty by any
valid/acceptable reason, approved by higher authority.
10. Sick Leave - period which an officer is excused from active duty by reason of illness or
injury.
11. Suspension - a consequence of an act which temporarily deprives an officer from the
privilege of performing his duties as result of violating directives or other department
regulations.
12. Department Rules - rules established by department directors/supervisors to control the
conduct of the members of the police force.
13. Duty Manual - describes the procedures and defines the duties of officers assigned to
specified post or position.
14. Order - an instruction given by a ranking officer to a subordinate, either a. General Order,
b. Special, or c. Personal
15. Report - usually a written communication unless otherwise specifies to be verbal reports;
verbal reports should be confirmed by written communication.
Types of Police Organizational Structures
Line Organization
The straight line organization, often called the individual, military or departmental type of
organization, is the simplest and perhaps the oldest type; but it is seldom encountered in its
channels of authority and responsibility extends in a direct line from top to bottom within the
structures, authority is definite and absolute.
While the line type of organization has many advantages, it also has some inherent
weaknesses which, for many organizations, make its use impractical. Perhaps its greatest
advantage is that, it is utterly simple. It involves a division of the work into units of eighth person
with a person in charge who has complete control and who can be hold directly responsible or
accountable for results, or lack of them.
Functional Organization

www.rkmfiles.net
35
*********************************************************************
The functional organization in its pure form is rarely found in present day organizations,
except at or near the top of the very large organizations. Unlike the line type of structure, those
establishments organized on a functional basis violate the prime rule that men perform best when
they have but one superior. The functional responsibility of each functional manager is limited to
the particular activity over which he has control, regardless of who performs the function.
Line and Staff Organization
The Line and Staff organization is a combination of the line and functional types. It
combines staff specialist such as the criminalists, the training officers, the research and
development specialists, etc. Channels of responsibility is to think and provide expertise for the
line units. The line supervisor must remember that he obtains advice from the staff specialists.
In normal operations, the staff supervisor has line commands but with recognized
limitations such as coordination between line and staff personnel can be achieved without undue
friction. Failure to recognize these line and staff relationship is the greatest and most frequent
source of friction and a barrier to effective coordination. The advantage of this kind would be - it
combines staff specialist or units with line organization so that service of knowledge can be
provided line personnel by specialist.
Classification of Line, Staff,
and Auxiliary Function
Whatever their method of grouping internal activities, all bureaucratic agencies segregate
the function of line, staff, and auxiliary personnel. The reasons for this tripartite classification are
best explained by examining each of the functions.
Line Functions: Line functions are the backbone of the police department; they include
such operations as patrol, criminal investigation, and traffic control, as well as supervision of the
personnel performing those operations. Line functions are carried out but line members,
including the patrol officer, the detective, the sergeant, the lieutenant, the captain, and the chief of
police. Line members are responsible for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Carrying out the majors purposes of the police department.

Delivering the services provided by the department.
Dealing directly with the departments clientele.
Making final decisions with respect to the activities they perform.

www.rkmfiles.net
36
*********************************************************************
Staff Functions: Staff functions are those operations designed to support the line
functions, Staff members are necessarily advisors who are typically assigned to planning,
research, legal advice, budgeting, and educational services. Staff members are often civilians
with specialized training who serve within the department but do not deal with daily operation son
the street. Their main function is to study police policies and practices and to offer proposals to
the chief executive of the department. Staff personnel tend to be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Highly specialized.
Involved in an advisory capacity
Detached from the public
Not directly responsible for the decisions made by department executive.
Auxiliary Functions: Auxiliary functions involve the logistical operations of the

department. These include training, communications, jailing, maintenance, record keeping, motor
vehicles, and similar operations.
ELEMENTS OF THE ORGANIZATON
Specialization
The grouping of activities and segregation of line, staff, and auxiliary functions are largescale examples of specialization within a bureaucratic organization.
Specialization of an individual level is also important in all organizations, since it must be
expected that some members will know more, perform better and contribute more in one area of
activity than in others, Disparities in job ability among persons may be the result of physical
attributes, mental aptitude, skills, interests education, training, motivation, or adaptation, among
other factors.
Specialization Defined: Specialization is the assignment of particular workers to
particular tasks. Thus, it can be thought of in terms of either jobs or people.
Specialization of people (specialists) is the designation of particular persons as having
expertise in a specific area of work. Here, specialization signifies the adaptation of an individual to
the requirements go some technical tasks through training, conditioning or extensive on-the-job
experience.
Example: Areas of police specialization include undercover works, c rime scene
operations, legal advising, computer work, planning, community relations, drug reaction,
gang activities, or SWAT operations.

www.rkmfiles.net
37
*********************************************************************
Hierarchy of Authority
If all persons within an organization were given the freedom to do what they like (and to
refuse to do what they dislike), there would be little likelihood of accomplishment.
Any
collaborative effort such as that in a police department thus requires a system of checks and
controls on individual behavior. Hence, the department must have a person or persons with
authority to direct the actions of workers and ensure compliance with standards in order to
achieve the departments goals.
Hierarchy defined: A hierarchy represents the formal relationship among superiors and
subordinates in any given organization. It can be visualized as a ladder, with each rung (or rank)
representing a higher or lower level of authority.
Each rank or position on a hierarchical ladder has specific rights, while at the same time
owing specific duties to the positions above and below it. Any particular position of the ladder is
expected to direct and control the activities of the ranks, while obeying the directions and
instructions received from higher ranks.
Authority Defined: Authority is the right to command and control the behavior of
employees in lower positions within an organizational hierarchy. A hierarchy thus serves as the
framework for the flow of authority downward (and obedience upward) through the department.
Example: Authority can be illustrated by the situation in which a subordinate abstains
from making his or her choice among several courses of action and instead automatically
accepts the choice made by the supervisor regardless of whether one personally agrees.
Authority Roles: Authority within an organization must be viewed in terms of prescribed
roles rather than of individuals. A particular position within an organization carries the same
authority regardless of who occupies that position. While the personality of the occupant may
change the style or manner in which authority is exercise, it should increase or decrease the
basic obligations of the occupant toward those in subordinate positions.
Example: The authority of a police chief stems from the role that a chief executive must
play whether he or she is referred to as chief, superintendent, commissioner, or some
other title, and regardless the size or location of the department he or he commands.
Span of Control

www.rkmfiles.net
38
*********************************************************************
A span of control is the maximum number of subordinates at a given position that
superior can supervise effectively.
Determining the Span of Control
Effective organization requires that only a manageable number of subordinates be
supervised by one person at any given time. This number will, of course, vary not only from one
organization to another (depending on each organizations definition of effective supervision) but
also within each organization depending on the number of task and the size of personnel
available at a given time.
Delegation of Authority
Delegation is the conferring of an amount of authority by a superior position onto a lowerlevel position. The person to whom authority is delegated becomes responsible to the superior for
doing the assigned job. However, the delegators remain accountable for accomplishment of the
job within the guidelines and quality standards of the agency.
Unity of Command
Traditional theories of organization insisted that each employee should have only one
supervisor of boss, and considered this principle of unity of command the backbone of any
organizational structure. Thus, a patrol officer, for example, would always receive orders from one
sergeant and would always report to that same sergeant. If the officer was instructed or advised
by a detective, garage sergeant, or any other administrator (with the possible exception of the
chief), the officer is expected to check with his or her sergeant before taking any action.
Formal Communication
Basically, communication is the process of sharing understanding and information on
common subjects. More precisely, it is an intercourse between, through or more people by means
of words, letters symbols, or gestures for the purpose of exchanging information. Procedures,
channels, and standardized languages are essential to effective communication within such large
organization.
While the eight elements previously discussed are crucial to any police organization, they
would remain fragmented without some means of integrating them into a meaningful and practical
whole. The integrating element is communication. Through communication, personnel are kept
informed of the objectives of the organization, of the means selected for achieving them, and of
the information necessary for the continuing operation of the department. Effective

www.rkmfiles.net
39
*********************************************************************
communication would ensure a common understanding of department goals, policies, and
procedures and this helps to bind the agency together.
THE PRINCIPLES OF POLICE ORGANIZATION
Police organizations are either formal or informal. Formal organizations are highly
structured while informal organizations are those without structures.
Every formal police organization whether small or large are governed by the following
principles:
1. Principle of Unity of Objectives - an organization is effective if it enables the individuals
to contribute to the organizations objectives.
2. Principle of Organizational Efficiency organization structure is effective if it is
structured in such a way to aid the accomplishment of the organizations objectives with a
minimum cost.
3. Scalar Principle shows the vertical hierarchy of the organization which defines an
unbroken chain of units from top to bottom describing explicitly the flow of authority. The
scalar principles are:
a. Line of Authority and Chain of Command - This principle of organization
suggests that communications should ordinarily go upward through established channels
in the hierarchy. Diverting orders, directives, or reports around a level of command
usually has disastrous effects on efficiency of the organization.
b. The Span of Control of a supervisor over personnel or units shall not mean
more than what he can effectively direct and coordinate. In span of control, levels of
authority shall be kept to a minimum.
c. The Delegation of authority shall carry with it a commensurate authority and
the person to whom the authority is delegated shall be held accountable therefore. It
implies that delegation must carry with it appropriate responsibility.
d. The Unity of Command - explains that subordinates should only be under the
control of one superior.
4. Functional Principle refers to division of work according to type, place, time and
specialization.
5. Line and Staff implies that a system of varied functions arrange into a workable
pattern. The line organization is responsible for the direct accomplishment of the
objectives while the staff is responsible for support, advisory or facilitative capacity.

www.rkmfiles.net
40
*********************************************************************
6. Principle of Balance states that the application of principles must be balanced to
ensure the effectiveness of the structure in meeting organizations objectives.
7. Principle of Delegation by Results states that authority delegated should be
adequate to ensure the ability to accomplish expected results.
8. Principles of Absoluteness of Responsibility explains that the responsibility of the
subordinates to their superior for performance is absolute and the superior cannot
escape responsibility for the organization on activities performed by their subordinates.
9. Principle of Parity and Responsibility explains that responsibility for action cannot be
greater than that implied by the authority delegated nor should it be less.
10. Authority Level Principle implies that decisions within the authority of the individual
commander should be made by them and not be returned upward in the organizational
structure.
11. Principle of Flexibility means that the more flexible the organization, the more it can
fulfill its purpose.
Other Principles in Police Organizations
1. Grouping of Similar Task
Tasks, similar or related in purpose, process, method, or clientele, should be grouped
together in one or more units under the control of one person. Whenever, practicable, every
function of the police force shall be assigned to a unit.
According to Function
The force should be organized primarily according to the nature of the basis to be
performed. It should be divided into groups so that similar and related duties may be assigned to
each.
According to Time Frame
The elements are divided into many shifts or watches according to the time of the day.
This is the most elementary form of police organization. Any large functional unit can also be
organized according to time if the demand exists.
According to Place of Work
A territorial distribution of a platoon, accomplished by assigning patrolman on beats, is
necessary to facilitate the direction and control of the officers and to ensure suitable patrol service
at every point with in the jurisdiction. Patrolman on street duty is usually under the supervision of
a patrol sergeant. When the number of patrolmen is great, it may be desirable to divide them into
squads assigned to specific sectors of jurisdiction, with a sergeant in charge of each squad.
According to Level of Authority
A police department is always divided according to the level of authority. Example, there
will be some patrolmen, sergeants, some lieutenants, some captains, and so on. Vertical

www.rkmfiles.net
41
*********************************************************************
combinations of superior officers, with each rank at a different level of authority from any other,
from channels through which operations may be directed and controlled can be adopted in certain
cases to ensure coordination.
2. Specialization Based on Need
Specialized units should be created only when overall departmental capability is thus
significantly increased.
Specialization is a principle of organization which is the result of the division of the force
into separate units. The degree of specialization is determined by the size and sophistication of
the department and by the extent to which unit has exclusive responsibility for the performance of
each group of the operational task.
THE PNP ORGANIZATION
The PNP is composed of a national headquarter, regional headquarters, provincial
headquarters, district headquarters or municipal stations. At the national level, the PNP
maintains its national headquarter in Camp Crame, Metropolitan Manila which houses the
directorial staff, service staff and special support units.
PNP Staff and Support Units
a. The Chief of the Philippine National Police has the rank of Police Director General in the
Armed Forces of the Philippines with a four-star rank. He is assisted by a Personal Staff
composed of:
The Inspector General
Aide-de-Camp
Command Police Non-Commissioned Officer
b. Deputy Chief of Philippine National Police for Administration.
c. Deputy Chief of Philippine National Police for Operations
d. The Chief of Directorial Staff is assisted by a Secretary, Directorial Staff.
The two deputies and the Chief of Directorial Staff have the rank of Police Deputy
Director General equivalent to a three-star rank in the Armed Forces of the Philippines.
Directorial Staff (Functional Staff)
1. Directorate for Personnel - Record Management
2. Directorate for Intelligence

www.rkmfiles.net
42
*********************************************************************
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Directorate for Operations

Directorate for Investigation
Directorate for Logistics
Directorate for Plans
Directorate for Comptrollership
Directorate for Police Community Relations
Directorate for Human Resources and Doctrine Development
Directorate for Research and Development
Administrative Support Units

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Logistic Support Service Legal Service

Medical and Dental Service
Computer Service
Crime Laboratory Support Service
Engineering Service
Headquarters Support Service
Finance Service
Communications-Electronics Service
Captain Service
Operational Support Units

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Criminal Investigation Command

Narcotics Command absorbed into the PDEA
Traffic Management Command
Intelligence Command
Special Action Force Command
Security Command
Civil Security Force Command
Maritime Command
Police Community Relations Command
Aviation Security
The Powers and Functions of the PNP

1.
2.
3.
Enforce all laws and ordinances relative to the protection of lives and properties;
Maintain peace and order and take all necessary steps to ensure public safety;
Investigate and prevent crimes, effect the arrest of criminal offenders, bring offenders
to justice, and assist in their prosecution.

www.rkmfiles.net
43
*********************************************************************
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Exercise the general powers to make arrest, search and seizure in accordance with
the Constitution and pertinent Laws.
Detain and arrest person for a period not beyond what is prescribed by law, informing
the person so detained of all his/her rights under the Constitution;
Issue licenses for the possession of firearms and explosives in accordance with law;
Supervise and control the training and operation of security agencies and issue
licenses to operate security agencies, and to security guards and private detectives for
the practice of their profession; and
Perform such other duties and exercises all other functions as may be provided by
law. One of these is the Forestry law wherein the PNP is primary enforcer in coordination
with the Department of Environment and Natural Resources (DENR).
The Rank Classification of the PNP Personnel

POLICE RANKS
ABBREVIATIONS
EQUIVALENT
MILITARY RANKS
A. COMMISSIONED OFFICERS:
Director General (DG)
Deputy Director General (DDG)
Director (DIR)
Chief Superintendent (CSUPT)
Senior Superintendent (SR SUPT)
Superintendent (SUPT)
Chief Inspector (CINSP)
Senior Inspector (SR INSP)
Inspector (INSP)
General
Lt General
Maj General
Brig.Gen.
Colonel
Lt Colonel
Major
Captain
Lieutenant
B. NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS:
Senior Police Officer IV (SPO IV)
Senior Police Officer III (SPO III)
Senior Police Officer II (SPO II)
Senior Police Officer I (SPO I)
Police Officer III (PO III)
Police Officer II (PO II)
Police Officer I (PO I)
Master Sergeant
Tech. Sergeant
Staff Sergeant
Sergeant
Corporal
Private 1st Class
Private

www.rkmfiles.net
44
*********************************************************************
C. Cadets of the Philippine National Police Academy (PNPA) are classified above the Senior
Police Officer IV and below the Inspector rank in the PNP.
PNP: National in Scope - Civilian in Character
National in scope simply means that the PNP is a nation wide government organization
whose jurisdiction covers the entire breath of the Philippines archipelago which extends up to the
municipality of Kalayaan islands in the province of Palawan. All PNP personnel both the
uniformed and non-uniformed components are national government employees. Civilian in
character means that the PNP is not a part of the military. Although,. it retains some military
attributes such as discipline, it shall adopt unique non-military cultures, Code of Ethics, and
Standard of Professional conduct comparable to the civilian police forces of other countries.
THE ANTI-CRIME MACHINERY Criminal Justice System (CJS)
Anti-crime strategies, programs for crime prevention and the like in any society is
practically based on an organized criminal justice system.
Justice defined
Justice is rendering what is due or merited and that which is due or merited.
According to Mortimer J. Adler, there are two principles of justice:
Render to each his due
Treat equals equally and unequal unequally but in proportion to their inequality.
Justice, according to the Supreme Court of the Philippines, is symbolically represented
by a blindfolded woman, holding with one hand a sword and with the other a balance.
What is Criminal Justice System?
The Criminal Justice System (CJS) is the machinery which society uses in the prevention
and control of crime. The process is the totality of the activities of law enforcers, prosecutors,
defense lawyers, judges and corrections personnel, as well as those of the mobilized community
in crime prevention and control.
In theory, CJS is an integrated process primarily concerned with apprehension,
prosecution, trial, adjudication, and correction of criminal offenders.
What are the major components of the CJS?

www.rkmfiles.net
45
*********************************************************************
Police or Law Enforcement

Prosecution
Courts
Corrections
Mobilized Community
What are the functions of the major components of the CJS?
To prevent and control the commission of crime;

To enforce the law;
To safeguard lives, individual rights, and properties;
To investigate, apprehend, prosecute and sentence those who violated the rules of
society; and,
To rehabilitate the convicts and reintegrate them into the community as law-abiding
citizens.
How does the CJS Operate?

The first four pillars, i.e., law enforcement, prosecution, courts, and corrections, pertain to
the traditional agencies vested with the official responsibility in dealing with crime or in crime
control. The community pillar is the broadest pillar.
Under the concept of a participative criminal justice system in the Philippines, public and
private agencies, as well as citizens, become a part of the CJS when they become involved in
issues and participate in activities related to crime prevention and control.
The Police or Law Enforcement Pillar
The first pillar consists mainly of the members of Philippine National Police (PNP) and
other law enforcement agencies. The work of the PNP is the prevention and control of crimes,
enforcement of laws, and affecting the arrest of offenders, including the conduct of lawful
searches and seizures to gather necessary pieces of evidences so that a complaint may be filed
with the Prosecutors Office.
The Prosecution Pillar
The second pillar takes care of the investigation of the complaint. In the rural areas, the
PNP may file the complaint with the inferior courts (i.e. the Municipal Trial Courts or the Municipal
Circuit Trial Courts). The judges of these inferior courts act as quasi-prosecutors only for the
purpose of the preliminary investigation. Once a prima facie case has been determined, the

www.rkmfiles.net
46
*********************************************************************
complaint is forwarded to the City or Provincial Prosecutors Office which will review the case.
When the complaint has been approved for filing with the Regional Trial Court, a warrant of arrest
for the accused will be issued by the court once the information has been filled.
The Courts Pillar
The third pillar of the CJS is the forum where the prosecution is given the opportunity to
prove that there is a strong evidence of guilt against the accused. It is also in the courts that the
accused is given his day in court to disprove the accusation against him.
The Constitutional presumption is the innocence of any person accused of a crime unless
proved otherwise. This means that the courts must determine the guilt of the accused beyond
reasonable doubt based on the strength of the evidence of the prosecution.
If there is any reasonable doubt that the accused committed the crime, he has to be
acquitted.
The Rules of Court, however, provides that the accused can be convicted of a lesser
crime than the crime he has been charged with in the information. But the elements of the lesser
offense should be necessarily included in the offense charged, and such lesser crime was proven
by competent evidence.
The Corrections Pillar
The fourth pillar takes over once the accused, after having been found guilty, is meted out
the penalty for the crime he committed. He can apply for probation or he could be turned over to
a non-institutional or institutional agency or facility for custodial treatment and rehabilitation. The
offender could avail of the benefits of parole or executive clemency once he has served the
minimum period of his sentence.
When the penalty is imprisonment, the sentence is carried out either in the municipal,
provincial or national penitentiary depending on the length of the sentence meted out.
The Community Pillar
The fifth pillar has a two-fold role. First, it has the responsibility to participate in law
enforcement activities by being partners of the peace officers in reporting the crime incident, and
helping in the arrest of the offender. Second, it has the responsibility to participate in the
promotion of peace and order through crime prevention or deterrence and in the rehabilitation of
convicts and their reintegration to society. Rehabilitation takes place when the convict is serving
his sentence. A convict may be paroled or may even be placed on probation.
Under the concept of a participative criminal justice system in the Philippines, public and
private agencies as well as citizens, become a part of the CJS when they participate and become

www.rkmfiles.net
47
*********************************************************************
involved with issues and activities related to crime prevention. Thus, citizen-based crime
prevention groups become part of the CJS within the framework of their involvement in crime
prevention activities and in the reintegration of the convict who shall be released from the
corrections pillar into the mainstream of society.
POLICE OPERATIONAL PLANNING
What is a Plan?
A plan is an organize schedule or sequence by methodical activities intended to attain a
goal and objectives for the accomplishments of mission or assignment. It is a method or way of
doing something in order to attain objectives. Plan provides answer to 5Ws and 1 H.
What is Planning?
Planning is a management function concerned with visualizing future situations, making
estimates concerning them, identifying issues, needs and potential danger points, analyzing and
evaluating the alternative ways and means for reaching desired goals according to a certain
schedule, estimating the necessary funds and resources to do the work, and initiating action in
time to prepare what may be needed to cope with the changing conditions and contingent events.
Planning is also the process of preparing for change and coping with uncertainty
formulating future causes of action; the process of determining the problem of the organization
and coming up with proposed resolutions and finding best solutions.
The process of combining all aspects of the department and the realistic
anticipation of future problems, the analysis of strategy and the correlation of
strategy to detail.
The conceptual idea of doing something to attain a goal or objective.
What is Police Planning?
Police Planning is an attempt by police administrators in trying to allocate anticipated
resources to meet anticipated service demands. It is the systematic and orderly determination of
facts and events as basis for policy formulation and decision affecting law enforcement
management.
What is Operational Planning?

www.rkmfiles.net
48
*********************************************************************
Operational Planning is the use of a rational design or pattern for all departmental
undertakings rather than relying on chance in an operational environment. It is the preparation
and development of procedures and techniques in accomplishing of each of the primary tasks
and functions of an organization.
What is Police Operational Planning?

Police Operational Planning is the act of determining policies and guidelines for police
activities and operations and providing controls and safeguards for such activities and operations
in the department. It may also be the process of formulating coordinated sequence of methodical
activities and allocation of resources to the line units of the police organization for the attainment
of the mandated objectives or goals.
Objectives are a specific commitment to achieve a measurable result within a specific
period of time. Goals are general statement of intention and typically with time horizon, or it is an
achievable end state that can be measured and observed. Making choices about goals is one of
the most important aspects of planning. Relate this definitions with their description as defined in
chapter one.
The process of police operational planning involves strategies or tactics, procedures,
policies or guidelines. A Strategy is a broad design or method; or a plan to attain a stated goal or
objectives. Tactics are specific design, method or course of action to attain a particular objective
in consonance with strategy. Procedures are sequences of activities to reach a point or to attain
what is desired. A policy is a product of prudence or wisdom in the management of human
affairs, or policy is a course of action which could be a program of actions adopted by an
individual, group, organization, or government, or the set of principles on which they are based.
Guidelines are rules of action for the rank and file to show them how they are expected to obtain
the desired effect.
STRATEGIC PLANNING
Strategic Planning is a series of preliminary decisions on a framework, which in turn
guides subsequent decisions that generate the nature and direction of an organization. This is
usually long ranged in nature. The reasons for Strategic Planning are:
1. VISION - A vision of what a police department should be.
2. LONG-RANGE THINKING - Keeping in mind that strategy is deciding where we want to
be

www.rkmfiles.net
49
*********************************************************************
3.
4.
5.
6.
STRATEGIC FOCUS
CONGRUENCE
A STRATEGIC RESPONSE TO CHANGE
A STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK
What is the Strategic Planning process?

TASK 1 - Develop Mission and Objectives
TASK 2 - Diagnose Environmental Threats and Opportunities
TASK 3 - Assess Organizational Strengths and Weaknesses
TASK 4 - Generate Alternative Strategies
TASK 5 - Develop Strategic Plan
TASK 6 - Develop Tactical Plan
TASK 7 - Assess Results of Strategic And Tactical Plan
TASK 8 - Repeat Planning Process
In the process, the police administrator can use the potent tool of alternatives.
Alternatives (options) are means by which goals and objectives can be attained. They maybe
policies, strategies or specific actions aimed at eliminating a problem. Alternatives do not have to
be substitutes for one another or should perform the same function. For example, our goal is to
improve officer-survival skills. The plan is to train the officers on militaristic and combat
shooting. The alternatives could be:
Alternative 1 - modify police vehicles
Alternative 2 - issuing bulletproof vests
Alternative 3 - utilizing computer assisted dispatch system
Alternative 4 - increasing first-line supervision, etc
FUNDAMENTALS OF POLICE PLANNING
What are the Objectives of Police Planning?
1. To increase the chances of success by focusing on results and not so much on the
objectives.
2. To force analytical thinking and evaluation of alternatives for better decisions.
3. To establish a framework for decision making consistent with the goal of the organization.
4. To orient people to action instead of reaction.

www.rkmfiles.net
50
*********************************************************************
5. To modify the day-to-day style of operation to future management.
6. To provide decision making with flexibility.
7. To provide basis for measuring original accomplishments or individual performance.
What can be expected in planning?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Improve analysis of problems

Provide better information for decision-making
Help to clarify goals, objectives, priorities
Result is more effective allocation of resources
Improve inter-and intradepartmental cooperation and coordination
Improve the performance of programs
Give the police department a clear sense of direction
Provide the opportunity for greater public support
What are the characteristics of a good police plan?

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
With clearly defined Objectives or Goals.

Simplicity, Directness and Clarity
Flexibility
Possibility of Attainment
Must provide Standards of Operation
Economy in terms of Resources needed for implementation
What are the guidelines in Planning?

The five (5) Ws and one (1) H
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
What to do mission/objective
Why to do reason/philosophy
When to do date/time
Where to do place
Who will do people involve
How to do strategy
What are the approaches in Police Planning?

A variety of approaches are employed in the planning processes. Each is unique and can
be understood as a method of operationalizing the word planning. There are basically five major
approaches to planning which are:
1. Synoptic Approach

www.rkmfiles.net
51
*********************************************************************
2.
3.
4.
5.
Incremental Approach
Transactive Approach
Advocacy Approach
Radical Approach
What is Synoptic Planning?

Synoptic planning or the rational comprehensive approach is the dominant tradition in
planning. It is also the point of departure for most other planning approaches.
This model is based on a problem-oriented approach to planning especially appropriate
for police agencies. It relies heavily on the problem identification and analysis of the planning
process. It can assist police administrators in formulating goals and priorities in terms that are
focused on specific problems and solutions that often confront law enforcement.
Steps in Synoptic Planning
Prepare for Planning - The task of planning should be detailed in a work chart that
specifies (a) what events and actions are necessary, (b) when they must take place, (c) who is to
be involved in each action and for how long, and (d) how the various actions will interlock with
one another.
Describe the present situation - Planning must have a mean for evaluation. Without an
accurate beginning database there is no reference point on which to formulate success or failure.
Develop projections and consider alternative future states - Projections should be written
with an attempt to link the current situation with the future, keeping in mind the desirable
outcomes. It is important for the police executive to project the current situations into the future to
determine possible, probable and desirable future states while considering the social, legislative,
and political trends existing in the community.
Identify and analyze problems - The discovery of the problems assumes that a system to
monitor and evaluate the current arena is already on place. Closely related to the detection and
identification of issues is the ability of the police to define the nature of the problem, that is to able
to describe the magnitude, cause, duration, and the expense of the issues at hand. A complete
understanding of the problem leads to the development of the means to deal with the issues.
Set goals - Making choices about goals is one of the most important aspects of planning.
It makes no sense to establish a goal that does not address a specific problem. Remembering

www.rkmfiles.net
52
*********************************************************************
that the police departments are problem oriented, choices about goals and objectives should
adhere to the synoptic model.
Identify alternative course of action As stated earlier, alternatives are means by which
goals and objectives can be attained. These are options or possible things to be done in case the
main or original plan is not applicable.
Select preferred alternatives there are three techniques to select alternative:
1.
Strategic Analysis this includes the

study on the courses of actions; suitability studies; feasibility studies; acceptability
studies; and judgment.
Suitability each course of action is evaluated in accordance with general policies,
rules and laws. Feasibility - these include the appraisal of the effects of a number of
factors weighed separately and together. Acceptability those judged to be suitable
and feasible are then analyzed in acceptability studies.
2.
Cost-effectiveness Analysis - This

technique is sometimes called cost-benefit or cost performance analysis. The
purpose of this form of selection is that the alternative chosen should maximize the
ratio of benefit to cost.
3.
Must-wants Analysis This method of

selecting a preferred course of action combines the strengths of both strategic and
cost effectiveness analysis. Must wants analysis is concerned with both the
subjective weights of suitability, feasibility, and acceptability and the objectives
weights of cost versus benefits.
Plan and carryout implementation - The police administrator must be aware that the
implementation requires a great deal of tact and skill. It maybe more important how an
alternative is introduced to a police department than what actually is.
Monitor and evaluate progress - Evaluation requires comparing what actually happened
with what was planned for- and this may not be a simple undertaking. Feedback must be
obtained concerning the results of the planning cycle, the efficiency of the implementation
process, and the effectiveness of new procedures, projects or programs. This is an
important step of synoptic planning, trying to figure out what, if anything happened as a
result of implementing a selected alternative.

www.rkmfiles.net
53
*********************************************************************
Summation of the synoptic planning approach This can be done by making a summary
of the presentation, could be tabular or other forms of presentation.
Repeat the Planning Process repetition of the process of planning enables the planner
to thresh out possible flaws in the plan.
What is Incremental Planning?
Incrementalism concludes that long range and comprehensive planning are not only too
difficult, but inherently bad. The problems are seen as too difficult when they are grouped
together and easier to solve when they are taken one at a time and broken down into gradual
adjustments over time.
What is Transactive Planning?

Transactive planning is carried out in face-to-face interaction with the people who are to
be affected by the plan and not to an anonymous target community of beneficiaries. Techniques
include field surveys and interpersonal dialogue marked by a process of mutual learning.
What is Advocacy Planning?
Beneficial aspects of this approach include a greater sensitivity to the unintended and
negative side effects of plans.
What is Radical Planning?
The first mainstream involves collective actions to achieve concrete results in the
immediate future. The second mainstream is critical of large-scale social processes and how they
permeate the character of social and economic life at all levels, which, in turn, determine the
structure and evolution of social problems.
CONSIDERATIONS IN POLICE PLANNING
1. Primary Doctrines

www.rkmfiles.net
54
*********************************************************************
Fundamental Doctrines These are the basic principles in planning, organization and
management of the PNP in support of the overall pursuits of the PNP Vision, mission
and strategic action plan of the attainment of the national objectives.
Operational Doctrines These are the principles and rules governing the planning,
organization and direction and employment of the PNP forces in the accomplishment
of basic security operational mission in the maintenance of peace and order, crime
prevention and suppression, internal security and public safety operation.
Functional Doctrines These provide guidance for specialized activities of the PNP
in the broad field of interest such as personnel, intelligence, operations, logistics,
planning, etc.
2. Secondary Doctrines
Complimentary Doctrines Formulated jointly by two or more bureaus in order to

effect a certain operation with regard to public safety and peace and order. These
essentially involve the participation of the other bureaus of the Bureau of Jail
Management and Penology (BJMP), Bureau of Fire Protection (BFP), Philippine
Public Safety College (PPSC), National Bureau of Investigation (NBI) and other law
enforcement agencies.
Ethical Doctrines These define the fundamental principles governing the rules of
conduct, attitude, behavior and ethical norm of the PNP.
3. The Principles of Police Organization

The principles of organization are presented in chapter three. These principles are
considered in police planning in order not to violate them but rather for the effective and
efficient development of police plans.
4. The Four (4) Primal Conditions of the Police Organization
Authority The right to exercise, to decide, and to command by virtue of rank and
position.
Doctrine It provides for the organizations objectives. It provides the various actions.
Hence, policies, procedures, rules and regulations of the organization are based on
the statement of doctrines.
Cooperation or Coordination
Discipline It is imposed by command or self-restraint to insure supportive behavior.

www.rkmfiles.net
55
*********************************************************************
Classifications of Police Plan
According to coverage: Police Plans could be Local Plans (within police precincts, substations, and stations), Regional Plans, and National Plans.
According to Time: Police Plans are classified as:
1.
Strategic or Long Range Plan It relates to plans which are

strategic or long range in application, and it determine the organizations original
goals and strategy.
Example: Police Action Plan on the Strategy DREAMS and Program P-O-L-I-C-E
2000, Three Point Agenda, and GLORIA (These are discussed on the latter part of
this Chapter).
2.
Intermediate or Medium Range Planning It relates to plans,

which determine quantity and quality efforts and accomplishments. It refers to the
process of determining the contribution on efforts that can make or provide with
allocated resources.
Example:
6 Masters Plans:
Master Plan Sandigan-Milenyo (Anti-Crime Master Plan)
Master Plan Sandugo (Support to Internal Security Operations Master

Plan)
3.
Master Plan Banat (Anti-Illegal Drugs Master Plan)
Master Plan Sang-ingat (Security Operations Master Plan)
Master Plan Saklolo (Disaster Management Master Plan)
Sangyaman (protection and Preservation of Environment, Cultural

Properties, and Natural Resources Master Plan)
Operational or Short Range Planning - Refers to the

production of plans, which determine the schedule of special activity and are
applicable from one week or less than year duration. Plan that addresses immediate
need which are specific and how it can be accomplished on time with available
allocated resources.
Examples of OPLANS

www.rkmfiles.net
56
*********************************************************************
Oplan Jumbo Aviation Security Group Strategic Plan against terrorist attacks
Oplan Salikop Criminal Investigation and Detection Group (CIDG) Strategic Plan
against Organized Crime Groups
LOI PAGPAPALA is the entry point in the conceptualization of the PNP Pastoral
Program for the next five years with a Total Human Development Approach (THD
Approach).
The TMG through its "OPLAN DISIPLINA" that resulted in the apprehension of
110,975 persons, the confiscation of 470 unlawfully attached gadgets to vehicles, and
rendering various forms of motorists assistance.
OPLAN BANTAY DALAMPASIGAN that sets forth the operational guidelines on the
heightened security measures and sea borne security patrols.
TYPES OF PLANS in general
Reactive Plans are developed as a result of crisis. A particular problem may occur for
which the department has no plan and must quickly develop one, sometimes without careful
preparation.
Proactive Plans are developed in anticipation of problems. Although not all police
problems are predictable, many are, and it is possible for a police department to prepare a
response in advance.
Visionary Plans are essential statements that identify the role of the police in the
community and a future condition or state to which the department can aspire. A vision may also
include a statement of values to be used to guide the decision making process in the department.
Strategic Plans are designed to meet the long-range, overall goals of the organization.
Such plans allow the department to adapt to anticipated changes or develop a new philosophy or
model of policing (e.g. community policing). One of the most important aspects of strategic
planning is to focus on external environmental factors that affect the goals and objectives of the
department and how they will be achieved. Important environmental factors include personnel
needs, population trends, technological innovations, business trends and demand, crime
problems, and community attitudes.
Operational Plans are designed to meet the specific tasks required to implement
strategic plans. There are four types of operational plan:
1. Standing Plans provide the basic framework for responding to organizational
problems. The organizational vision and values, strategic statement, policies, procedures, and

www.rkmfiles.net
57
*********************************************************************
rules and regulations are examples of standing plans. Standing plans also include guidelines for
responding to different types of incidents; for example, a civil disturbance, hostage situation,
crime in progress, and felony car stops.
2. Functional Plans include the framework for the operation of the major functional units
in the organization, such as patrol and investigations. It also includes the design of the structure,
how different functions and units are to relate and coordinate activities, and how resources are to
be allocated.
3. Operational-efficiency, effectiveness, and productivity plans are essentially the
measures or comparisons to be used to assess police activities and behavior (outputs) and
results (outcomes). If one of the goals of the police department is to reduce the crime rate, any
change that occurs can be compared to past crime rates in the same community or crime in other
communities, a state, or the nation. If the crime rates were reduced while holding or reducing
costs, it would reflect an improvement not only in effectiveness but also in departmental
productivity.
4. Time-specific Plans are concerned with a specific purpose and conclude when an
objective is accomplished or a problem is solved. Specific police programs or projects such as
drug crackdown, crime prevention program, and neighborhood clean-up campaign are good
examples of time-specific plans.
KINDS OF POLICE PLANS
Policy and Procedural Plans to properly achieve the administrative planning
responsibility within in the unit, the Commander shall develop unit plans relating to: (a) policies or
procedure; (b) tactics; (c) operations; (d) extra-office activities; and (e) management.
Further, standard-operating procedures shall be planned to guide members in routine and
field operations and in some special operations in accordance with the following procedures:
Field Procedure Procedures intended to be used in all situations of all kinds shall be
outlined as a guide to officers and men in the field. Examples of these procedures are
those related to reporting, to dispatching, to raids, arrest, stopping suspicious persons,
receiving complaints, touring beats, and investigation of crimes. The use of physical
force and clubs, restraining devices, firearms, tear gas and the like shall, in dealing with
groups or individuals, shall also be outlined.
Headquarters Procedures Included in these procedures are the duties of the
dispatcher, jailer, matron, and other personnel concerned which may be reflected in the
duty manual. Procedures that involve coordinated action on activity of several offices,
however, shall be established separately as in the case of using telephone for local or
long distance calls, the radio teletype, and other similar devices.

www.rkmfiles.net
58
*********************************************************************
Special Operation Procedures Certain special operations also necessitate the
preparation of procedures as guides. Included are the operation of the special unit
charged with the searching and preservation of physical evidence at the crime scenes
and accidents, the control of licenses, dissemination of information about wanted
persons, inspection of the PNP headquarters, and the like.
Tactical Plans These are the procedures for coping with specific situations at known
locations. Included in this category are plans for dealing with an attack against buildings with
alarm systems and an attack against the PNP headquarters by lawless elements. Plans shall be
likewise be made for blockade and jail emergencies and for special community events, such as
longer public meetings, athletic contests, parades, religious activities, carnivals, strikes,
demonstrations, and other street affairs.
Operational Plans These are plans for the operations of special divisions like the
patrol, detective, traffic, fire and juvenile control divisions. Operational plans shall be prepared to
accomplish each of the primary police tasks. For example, patrol activities must be planned, the
force must be distributed among the shifts and territorially among beats, in proportion to the
needs of the service, and special details must be planned to meet unexpected needs. Likewise in
the crime prevention and in traffic, juvenile and vice control, campaigns must be planned and
assignments made to assure the accomplishment of the police purpose in meeting both average
and regular needs. Each division or unit has primary responsibility to plan operations in its field
and also to execute the plans, either by its own personnel or, as staff agency, by utilizing
members of the other divisions.
Plans for operations of special division consist of two types, namely: (1) those designed
to meet everyday, year-round needs, which are the regular operating program of the divisions;
and (2) those designed to meet unusual needs, the result of intermittent and usually unexpected
variations in activities that demand their attention.
Regular Operating Programs These operating divisions/units shall have specific plans
to meet current needs. The manpower shall be distributed throughout the hours of
operation and throughout the area of jurisdiction in proportion to need. Assignments
schedules shall be prepared that integrate such factors as relief days, lunch periods,
hours, nature, and location of regular work. Plans shall assure suitable supervision,
which become difficult when the regular assignment is integrated to deal with this short
time periodic needs.
Meeting unusual needs The unusual need may arise in any field of police activity and is
nearly always met in the detective, vice, and juvenile divisions by temporary readjustment of
regular assignment.
Extra-office Plans The active interest and the participation of individual citizen is so
vital to the success of the PNP programs that the PNP shall continuously seek to motivate,

www.rkmfiles.net
59
*********************************************************************
promote, and maintain an active public concern in its affairs. These are plans made to organize
the community to assist in the accomplishment of objectives in the fields of traffic control,
organized crime, and juvenile delinquency prevention. The organizations may be called safety
councils for crime commissions and community councils for the delinquency prevention. They
shall assist in coordinating community effort, in promoting public support, and in combating
organized crime. Organization and operating plans for civil defense shall also be prepared or
used in case of emergency or war in coordination with the office of the Civil Defense.
Management Plans Plans of management shall map out in advance all operations
involved in the organization management of personnel and material and in the procurement and
disbursement of money, such as the following:
Budget Planning Present and future money needs for personnel, equipment, and
capital investments must be estimated. Plans for supporting budget request must be
made if needed appropriations are to be obtained.
Accounting Procedures Procedures shall be established and expenditure reports be
provided to assist in making administrative decisions and in holding expenditures within
the appropriations.
Specifications and Purchasing Procedures Specifications shall be drawn for
equipment and supplies. Purchasing procedures shall likewise be established to insure
the checking of deliveries against specifications of orders. Plans and specifications shall
be drafted for new building and for remodeling old ones.
Personnel Procedures shall be established to assure the carrying out of personnel
programs and the allocation of personnel among the component organizational units in
proportions need.
Organization A basic organizational plan of the command/unit shall be made and be
posted for the guidance of the force. For the organization to be meaningful, it shall be
accompanied by the duty manual which shall define relationships between the
component units in terms of specific responsibilities. The duty manual incorporates rules
and regulations and shall contain the following: definition of terms, organization of rank,
and the like, provided the same shall not be in conflict with this manual.
FIELD OPERATIONS: How planning affects them?
Field Operations shall be directed by the police commander and the subordinate
commanders and the same shall be aimed at the accomplishment of the following primary tasks
more effectively and economically:
Patrol The patrol force shall accomplish the primary responsibility of safeguarding the
community through the protection of persons and property, the preservation of the peace, the

www.rkmfiles.net
60
*********************************************************************
prevention of crime, the suppression of criminal activities, the apprehension of criminals, the
enforcement of laws and ordinances and regulations of conduct, and performing necessary
service and inspections.
Investigation The basic purpose of the investigation division unit shall be to investigate
certain designated crimes and clear them by the recovery of stolen property and the arrest and
conviction of the perpetrators. To this end, the investigation division shall supervise the
investigation made by patrolman and undertake additional investigation as may be necessary of
all felonies.
Traffic Patrol Police control of streets or highways, vehicles, and people shall facilitate
the safe and rapid movement of vehicles and pedestrians. To this end, the inconvenience,
dangers and economic losses that arise from this moment, congestion, delays, stopping and
parking of vehicles must be lessened. Control of traffic shall be accomplished in three (3) ways:
a. Causes of accidents and congestion shall be discovered, facts gathered and
analyzed for this purpose;
b. Causes shall be remedied, charges shall be made in physical condition that create
hazards, and legislation shall be enacted to regulated drivers and pedestrians; and
c. The public shall be educated in the provisions of traffic and ordinances. Motorists
and pedestrians shall be trained in satisfactory movement habits, and compliance
with regulations shall be obtained by enforcement. The police shall initiate action and
coordinate the efforts of the agencies that are concerned in the activities.
Vice Control It shall be the determined stand of the PNP in the control of vices to treat
vice offenses as they shall do to any violation, and to exert efforts to eliminate them, as there
attempt to eliminate robbery, theft, and public disturbance. Control of vice, shall be based on law
rather than on moral precepts, and intensive operations shall be directed toward their elimination.
A primary interest in vice control results from the close coordination between vice and criminal
activities. Constant raids of known vice dens shall be undertaken.
Juvenile Delinquency Control Effective crime control necessitates preventing the
development of individuals as criminals. The police commander shall recognize a need for
preventing crime or correcting conditions that induce criminality and by rehabilitating the
delinquent.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs)

www.rkmfiles.net
61
*********************************************************************
Standard Operating Procedures or SOPs are products of police operational planning
adopted by the police organization to guide the police officers in the conduct of their duties and
functions, especially during field operations.
The following are Police Security Service Package of the PNP with the following
standard operating procedures and guidelines:
a. SOP #01 POLICE BEAT PATROL PROCEDURES - This SOP prescribes the basic
procedures to be observed by all PNP Units and mobile patrol elements in the conduct of
visibility patrols.
b. SOP #02 BANTAY KALYE - This SOP prescribes the deployment of 85% of the PNP in
the field to increase police visibility and intensifies anti-crime campaign nationwide.
c. SOP #03 SIYASAT - This SOP prescribes the guidelines in the conduct of inspections
to ensure police visibility.
d. SOP #4 REACT 166 - REACT 166 was launched in 1992 as the peoples direct link to
the police to receive public calls for assistance and complaints for prompt action by police
authorities. This SOP prescribes the procedures in detail of Duty Officers, Telephone
Operators and Radio Operators for REACT 166; and their term of duty and
responsibilities.
e. SOP #5 LIGTAS (ANTI-KIDNAPPING) - With the creation of the Presidential AntiOrganization Crime Task Force (PAOCTF), the PNP is now in support role in campaign
against kidnapping in terms of personnel requirements. SOP #5 sets forth the PNPs
guidelines in its fight against kidnapping activities.
f. SOP #6 ANTI-CARNAPPING - This SOP prescribes the conduct of an all-out and
sustained anti carnapping campaign to stop/minimize carnapping activities, neutralize
syndicated carnapping groups, identify/prosecute government personnel involved in
carnapping activities, and to effectively address other criminal activities related to car
napping.
g. SOP #7 ANTI-TERRORISM - This prescribes the operational guidelines in the conduct
of operations against terrorists and other lawless elements involved in terrorist activities.
h. SOP #8 JOINT ANTI-BANK ROBBERY ACTION COMMITTEE (ANTI-BANK
ROBBERY) - This SOP provides overall planning, integration, orchestration or
coordination, and monitoring of all efforts to ensure the successful implementation.
i. SOP #9 ANTI-HIJACKING/HIGHWAY ROBBERY This SOP sets forth the
guidelines and concepts of operations to be observed in the conduct of anti-highway
robbery/hold-up/hijacking operations.
j. SOP #10 PAGLALANSAG/PAGAAYOS-HOPE - This SOP sets forth the concept of
operations and tasks of all concerned units in the campaign against Partisan Armed
Groups and loose fire.

www.rkmfiles.net
62
*********************************************************************
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
SOP # 11 MANHUNT BRAVO (NEUTRALIZATION OF WANTED PERSONS) - This

SOP sets forth the objectives and concept of operation tasks of all concerned units in the
neutralization of wanted persons.
SOP #12 ANTI-ILLEGAL GAMBLING - This SOP sets forth the operational thrusts to be
undertaken by the PNP that will spearhead the fight against all forms of illegal gambling
nationwide.
SOP #13 ANTI-SQUATTING - This SOP sets forth the concept of operation in the
campaign against professional squatters and squatting syndicates.
SOP #14 JERICHO - This SOP prescribes the operational guidelines to be undertaken
by the National Headquarter (NHQ) of PNP in the establishment of a quick reaction group
that can be detailed with the office of the Secretary of Interior and Local Government
(SILG), with personnel and equipment requirements of that reaction group supported by
the PNP.
SOP #15 NENA (ANTI-PROSTITUTION/VAGRANCY) - This SOP sets forth the
operational thrusts to be undertaken by the PNP that will spearhead the fight against
prostitution and vagrancy.
SOP #16 ANTI-PORNOGRAPHY - This prescribes the guidelines to be followed by
tasked PNP Units/Offices in enforcing the ban on pornographic pictures, videos and
magazines.
SOP #17 GUIDELINES IN THE CONDUCT OF ARREST, SEARCH, AND SEIZURE
-This SOP prescribes the procedures and manner of conducting an arrest, raid, search
and/or search of person, search of any premises and the seizure of properties pursuant
to the 1987 Philippine Constitution, Rules of Court, as amended and updated decision of
the Supreme Court.
SOP #18 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SANDIGAN MASTER PLAN
SOP #19 ANTI-ILLEGAL LOGGING
SOP #20 ANTI-ILLEGAL FISHING
SOP #21 ANTI-ILLEGAL DRUGS
DISASTER AND EMERGENCY PLANNING

Emergency and disaster planning is one of the most important interrelated function in a
security system. It is important in any organization as physical security, fire protection, guard
forces, security of documents and personnel security.
Emergency and disaster planning refers to the preparation in advance of protective
and safety measures for unforeseen events resulting from natural and human actions.
Disaster plans outline the actions to be taken by those designated for specific job. This
will result in expeditious and orderly execution of relief and assistance to protect properties and

www.rkmfiles.net
63
*********************************************************************
lives. These plans must also be rehearsed so that when the bell ring, there will be speed and not
haste in the execution. Speed is the accurate accomplishment of a plan as per schedule, while
haste is doing a job quickly with errors. Plans therefore must be made when any or all of the
emergencies arise. Those plans, being special in nature, must be prepared with people whose
expertise in their respective field is legion together with the coordination and help of
management, security force, law enforcement agencies, and selected employees.
Planning is necessary to meet disaster and emergency conditions and it must be
continuing and duly supported by management. One aspect of the plans will be to consider
recovery measures to be undertaken by the organization. Being prepared for the eventuality gives
better chances of protection and eventual recovery than those not prepared. Without planning,
the emergency or disaster can become catastrophic. With a good, suitable plan to follow, the
unusual becomes ordinary, hence, the mental preparedness for easy survival and recovery.
Understanding Disaster
A DISASTER is a sudden, unforeseen, extraordinary occurrence. It can be considered as
an EMERGENCY but an emergency may not always be a disaster.
An EMERGENCY falls into 2 broad categories:
Disaster
(Natural Crisis)
Induced
Catastrophe
(Man-made Crisis)
Commonalities:
Deciding Policy
Assessing Threat
Identifying Resources
floods, earthquake, famine,

typhoon, diseases, volcanic
eruption, crashes, industrial
accident, fires, landslide,
avalanches,
tsunamis,
etc.
arson, bombing,
kidnapping,
robbery, hostage-taking,
skyjacking, assassination, ambush,
and other acts terrorism

www.rkmfiles.net
64
*********************************************************************
Selecting crisis team personnel

Locating crisis management center
Equipping the crisis center
Testing contingency plans and emergency procedures
Dealing with the media
Dealing with victims and their families
Dealing with other affected person (such as employees)
Getting the organizations normal work done
Returning to normal after the crisis
Plan Checklist
Identify the type of crisis/disaster/induced catastrophe

Identify which operation, facility, personnel at risk
Prioritize accordingly
Determine effects of emergencies in the operation
Identify broad categories that must be addressed in your contingency planning
Review existing emergency plans to identify gaps
Consider the environment with in which your emergency plans will be implemented.
Assessing the Risk

Pro-crisis Actions - The planning process begins with an understanding of the situation
and recognition that a number of policy decisions must be made before the actual planning can
begin.; Many emergencies can be prevented completely with adequate thought and action.
Others can be anticipated often by doing nothing but mere common sense. REMEMBER! It
was not raining when NOAH build the ark.
Checklist for a Disaster Action Plan
Identify the type of disaster occurred in the area
Identify those that could affect your operation in the area
Determine which scenarios are plausible
Survey your physical facilities and operating procedures to determine preparedness
Survey surrounding area to determine if there are operations or facilities near which
might create emergencies
Establish a liaison with law enforcement agencies and emergency response groups
Know where to get help, how to get help, and what help you can expect

www.rkmfiles.net
65
*********************************************************************
Know who currently has authority to make key decisions with in your organization and
who control access to decision makers in an emergency
Review emergency procedures, its completeness and accuracy
Phases in Emergency/Disaster Planning

Phase I
Assessment of the
Situation
This will be a research in depth by a knowledgeable and specially trained group
on the vulnerabilities as well as the resources available for the disaster plan. Surveys and
Inspection may be conducted
Phase II
Writing the Plan

The plan will have to be written based on the findings in phase I. The plan can be
code title, management will just call for the name of the plan.

www.rkmfiles.net
66
*********************************************************************
Phase III
Testing the Plan
Dry runs of the emergency plan is a part of the entire process of planning to
determine plan reliability and to identify deficiencies and make neceassry corrections or
adjustments.
Phase IV
Critique the Plan
This involves the analysis of feedbacks. The unworkable procedures should be

noted and finally corrected.
Checklist for Reviewing Policies,
Procedures, and Plans
Compile and review your organizations policies on various contingencies before
establishing your plans
Ensure that these policies are known throughout the organization and that they are
included in your emergency manuals
Ensure that your procedures and plans are consistent with your organizations
established policies and goals
Identify appropriate outside consultants and other sources of assistance in developing
and implementing your plans and procedures
Ensure that appropriate personnel have any security clearances or background cheks
which might be required
Establish a viable record-keeping system and procedures to ensure they are followed

www.rkmfiles.net
67
*********************************************************************
Organizing Disaster Management Team
Disaster Team Leadership
Disaster team leadership is vested in one person, who should designate an alternate
capable of acting independently in his or her absence.
One of the team leaders primary tasks is to ensure that control is maintained over the
teams activities, information flow, and the implementation of decisions and organizational
policies. For these reason, the team leader should be a person who has demostarted ability to
function under pressure, must have sufficient authority to make on the spot decisions with in the
framework of overall organizations policy, access to decision makers when required, and the
ability to recognize which decisions to make independently and which to refer to upper
management.
Disaster Action Team Members
Depending on the size of the organization and the number of people available, the
following team mebers maybe considered:
Team leader/ Alternate

Executive Assistance
Public Affairs
Liaison Officers
(for family/victim/government/International)
Administrative Support
Communications Specialist
Legal Specialist
Medical and Relief Operations Officer
Financial Specialist
Each disaster team member must be oriented and trained on their respective role and the
functional requirements for disaster management.
Disaster Action Team Duties
On Pre-event

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Supervise the formulation of policies

Ensure the development of procedures
Participate in preparing plans
Oversee and participate in exercise of plans
Select crisis management/disaster center
Participate in personnel training
Review preparation of materials
Delegate authority
Brief personnel
Ensure the assembly of supplies
Ensure preparation of rest, food, medical areas
During the Event
Establish shift schedules immediately

Delegate tasks
Focus on underlying problem
Maintain control
Follow organizational policies
Use prepared procedures
Innovate as needed
Ensure that information is shared with the entire team
Review all press release and public statements
Double check or confirm informations if possible
Aid victim and their families
Try to anticipate future consequences
Control stress of team members
Ensure log maintenance
On Post Event (After the Incident)
Evaluate effectiveness of plans

Evaluate adequacy of procedures
Debrief personnel
Evaluate equipment and training used
Revise plans and procedures in the light of new experience
Reward personnel as appropriate
Assist victims as appropriate
68

www.rkmfiles.net
69
*********************************************************************
Document events
Prepare after-action reports
Arrange an orderly transition to normal conditions
Retain archives
The chain of events during a disaster is simplified as follows:

Security receives initial report of emergency
Security notifies Disaster Team Leader
Team leader decides if immediate action is required
If action is required, he notifies the other team members to convene at the crisis
management center
Initial liason established and actions taken: create log, contact of family, employees
involved, government or law enforcement liaison contacts, prepare contingency press
guidance, others.
Respond to event
Crowd Control and Riot Prevention

Background
Riot, in general is an offense against the public peace. It is interpreted as a tumultuous
disturbance by several persons who have unlawfully assembled to assist one another, by the use
of force if necessary, against anyone opposing them in the execution of some enterprise of a
private nature; and who execute such enterprise in a violent manner, to the terror of the people.
Under the law, it is punishable for any organizer or leader of any meeting attended by
armed persons for the purpose of committing any of the crimes punishable under the Revised
Penal Code, or any meeting in which the audience is incited to the commission of the crimes of
treason, rebellion or insurrection, sedition or assault upon a person in authority or his agents (Art.
146, RPC). It is also punishable for any person who shall cause any serious disturbance in a
public place, office, or establishment, or shall interrupt or disturb public functions or gatherings or
peaceful meetings (Art 153, RPC).
Some Basic Definition of Terms
Tumultuous The disturbance or interruption shall be deemed tumultuous if caused by
more than three persons who are armed or provided with means of violence.

www.rkmfiles.net
70
*********************************************************************
Outcry The means to shout subversive or proactive words tending to stir up the people
to obtain by means of force or violence.
Crowd It consists of a body of individual people with no organization, no single
partnership. Each individuals behavior is fairly controlled and ruled by reason. All the participants
have been thrown by circumstance into a crowd for some common purpose that may give them at
least one thing in common.
Mob A mob takes on the semblance of organization with some common motive for
action, such as revenge for a crime committed on the scene where the crowd assembled, an
aggravated fight, or a confrontation with the police. At times like this, there is already a strong
feeling of togetherness (we are one attitude).
Riot It is a violent confusion in a crowd. Once a mob started to become violent, it
becomes a riot.
What is the Role of Planning in Crowd Control or Riot Prevention?
A sound organizational planning, training, logistical support and a high departmental
morale are the essential success elements in modern counter-riot operations.
The control of violent civil disorder involving large segments of the population, especially
in congested urban areas, requires a disciplined, aggressive police counter-action which at the
same time adheres to the basic law enforcement precepts. This is done through effective police
operational planning.
Through planning, the law violators can be arrested and processed with in the existing
legal frameworks by the exercise of reasonable force. Without an immediate decisive police
action, the continually recurring conditions of civil unrest and lawlessness could quickly evolve
into a full-scale riot. Police planning could provide the best police reaction and order can be
restored with a minimum of property damage and injury.
What are the Police Purpose and Objectives in Anti-Riot Operations?
Containment Unlawful assembly and riot are as contagious as a plague unless they
are quarantined from the unaffected areas of the community. In here, all persons who are at the
scene should be advised to leave the area, thereby reducing the number of potential anti-police
combatants.
Dispersal The crowd of unlawful assembly or riot should be dispersed at once. It may
appear at first to be a legal assembly but the nature of the assembly at the time of the arrival of
the police may clearly distinguish it as being unlawful. Once it is determined, the responsibility of

www.rkmfiles.net
71
*********************************************************************
the police to command the people to disperse. Crowd control formations may be done if
necessary to expedite their movements.
Prevention of Entry or Reentry- The police have to protect the area once the people
have been moved out or dissipated into smaller groups to prevent them from returning. Enforce
quarantine by not allowing the group to resume their actions.
Arrest Violators One of the first acts of the police upon arrival at the scene of the
disturbance is to locate and isolate individuals who are inciting the crowd to violate or fragrantly
violating the law. Prevent any attempt by the crowd or mob to rescue those arrested by enforcing
total quarantine.
Establish Priorities Depending upon the circumstances, it is always necessary to
establish priorities. Assessing the situation to determine the nature of assistance and number of
men needed is part of the planning process.
What are the Basic Procedures in Anti-Riot Operations?
Assess the Situation
determine whether the original purpose of the gathering was lawful or not
determine also the lawfulness at the time of arrival at the scene
assess their attitude, emotional state, and their general condition
determine any state of intoxication and other conditions that may lead to violence
identify the cause of the problem
locate and identify leaders or agitators
Survey the Scene
determine as soon as possible the best position of the command post
locate the best vintage point for observations
consider geographical factors such as natural barriers, buildings, and weather
condition
note the best method of approach
Communicate
report on your assessment, keeping your assessment brief but concise, giving
your superior the sufficient data with which to proceed for plans of action
ask for assistance or help from the command post hence remain close to the
radio as possible until additional units arrived or to communicate new
developments

www.rkmfiles.net
72
*********************************************************************
Maintain a Watchful Waiting
make your presence known to the people in the vicinity
if the crowd is too much to handle, stay near the command post and wait for
additional support units
use radio or other means of communications to call for assistance
make preparations for decisive police action.
Concentrate on Rescue and Self-Defense
take care of the immediate needs of the situation until help arrives
apply first aid to injured people and self protection must be considered
remember the primary objective of protecting lives, property and the restoration
of order
Maintain an Open Line of Communication
keep the dispatcher advised on the progress of the scene
continue directing the support units to the scene and the general perimeter
control
Establish a Command Post
follow what is in your contingency plan for civil disturbance
make every officer aware of the command post for proper coordination
Take immediate action for serious violations
arrest perpetrators
isolate the leaders or agitators from the crowd
show full police force strength
Give the dispersal order
disperse the crowd upon order
anti-riot formations and procedures must be used
use of force necessary for dispersal maybe considered
What are the General Guidelines in Handling Riot?

www.rkmfiles.net
73
*********************************************************************
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Preplanning must be high on the agenda whenever the

department anticipates any disorder or major disturbance.
Meet with responsible leaders at the scene and express your
concern for assuring them their constitutional guarantees. Request them to disperse the
crowd before attempting to take police action.
Maintain order and attempt to quell the disturbance without
attempting to punish any of the violators.
Use only the force that is necessary but take positive and
decisive action.
Post the quarantine area with signs and barricades, if necessary.
Keep the traffic lane open for emergency and support vehicle.
Consider the fact that most impressive police action at the scene
of any type of major disturbance is the expeditious removal of the leaders by a welldisciplined squad of officers.
For riot control, consider the following:
a.
Surprise Offensive The police action in its initial stages
at a riot must be dramatic. The elements of surprise may enhance effectiveness
of riot control
b.
Security of Information Plans for action and
communications regarding the movement of personnel and equipment should be
kept confidential
c.
Maximum utilization of Force A show of police force
should be made in a well-organized manner, compact, and efficient in a militarytype squad formations.
d.
Flexibility of Assignments Officers and teams should
be flexibly assigned to various places where the need is greatest.
e.
Simplicity Keep the plan as simple as possible and the
instructions are direct to avoid mass confusion among the officers.
What are the Special Problems in Crowd Control and Anti-Riot Operations?
Snipers Certain psychopathic people may attempt to take advantage of the mass
confusion and excitement at a riot scene by taking a concealed position and shooting at people
with some type of weapons, usually rifle.
Arsonist Persons holding torch in their hands are potential arsonists. They must be
taken into custody immediately.

www.rkmfiles.net
74
*********************************************************************
Looters Acts of simple misdemeanor thefts or may consists of robbery of breaking and
entering. Take the suspects into custody by whatever means are necessary.
POLICE PATROL OPERATIONS

What is Patrol?
According to Hale, Patrol is the essence of police function while Payton said, the Patrol
division is the backbone of a police department. However, making it simpler, patrol may refer to
the regular tour made by a guard in a place in order to protect it or to maintain order. It could also
mean a person or a group (such as a police or military unit) sent to carry out a tour of duty in a
certain place with a particular mission either for reconnaissance purposes or simply to provide
protection.
Etymology of the Term Police and Patrol
As discussed earlier, the term police originated from the Greek word politeia, which
means civil organization and the state; the Romans slightly changed the word to politia. The
French changed the word to police to call those people authorized to implement the law. The
English and the Americans borrowed the word from the French and used it to describe a law
enforcer. Cop and constable are other common descriptions of a police officer. Cop is a
European term meaning to catch or seize.
It must be noted that the terms constable and patrol came from the French. Patrol
originated directly or via German Patrolla from the French patrouller (patroullier), which originally
means to walk through mud in a military camp.
The Evolution of Police Patrol
Police is the agency of a community or government that is responsible for maintaining
public order and preventing and detecting crime. The idea of the police force as a protective and
law enforcement organization developed from the use of military bodies as guardians of the
peace, such as the Praetorian Guard of ancient Rome.
The Praetorian Guard is composed of Roman soldiers or centurions carefully selected by
the commander of the city under the authority of Emperor Ceasar. The Romans achieved a high
level of law enforcement, which remained in effect until the decline of the empire and the onset of

www.rkmfiles.net
75
*********************************************************************
the Middle Ages. Beginning in the 15 th century, policing became a task of the heads of fiefdoms
and principalities.
Police in the Ancient Time

In recorded history, we can find many documents and archeological finds that insinuate a
form of organized police. For example, a clay tablet used by the ancient Babylonian dated,
around 2000 BC, contains a report from a Babylonian officer to his superiors notifying them that
he had proceeded to the mans house as ordered, arrested him, taken his fingerprints and then
taken control of his property. Around the same date, the discovery in the Indus valley revealed not
only that this city had sewers and a bathroom in each house, but that there are special watchhouses which were used by policemen whose duty it was to patrol the streets and maintain
order.
In both the Old Testament (Song of Solomon, Isaiah and Jeremiah) and the New
Testament (Matthew and John), we find references to watchmen whose duty it was to protect
the city and arrest offenders.
The hieroglyphics of the ancient Egyptians indicates that they had police officers. They
had special flag with its distinctive emblem, a gazelle with a large ostrich feather attached to its
neck. There was a constant for some type of protective police patrol because of the great
treasures hidden in the many tombs. It was in this regard that the Egyptians became the first
people to use police dogs on patrol. They also invented the lock.
The police were civilians called medjay and headed by an Egyptian military officer.
Augustus, just before the time of Christ, formed the Vigiles of Rome, a group of over
two thousand men, armed with staves and shortsword, whose duty was to keep the peace and
fight fires.
Police in the Middle Ages
In the early Middle Ages (a period from the 5 th Century A.D. to about 1350), a system of
mutual protection was developed called the Frankpledge. Under this system, a community
was divided into tithings or groups of 10 men, each member of which was responsible for the
conduct of the other members of his group and for the assurance that a member charged with a
breach of the law would be produced at court.

www.rkmfiles.net
76
*********************************************************************
This system has in some ways prevailed in the British military. If one man makes a mistake, the
whole group to which he belongs is punished.
England
In England, each petty kingdom was divided into shires or counties. Each shire was the
responsibility of a Reeve, later called the Sheriff, who in turn was responsible to their King for
law and order in his respective district. Each Shire was broken down into Hundreds (100
households) headed by a Hundredman, later known as a High Constable. Each hundred was
further broken down into Tythings (10 families) headed by a Tythingman or Chief Tythingman who
was elected by the group, later on replaced by the Constable in the 12 th century. He served as
constable and judge.
Another form of police protection used at the end of this era was for each able bodied
man to serve so much time patrolling the town at night as a Watchman. Later, it was required
that they call out the time and weather on the hour.
The Hue and Cry - It was an ancient Saxon practice that the invaders brought over to
England. The horn, the oldest known warning device in history, was sounded when a person
committed a crime, or a felon escaped, and it was detected. When they hear this, they raised a
cry, sounded their horns, and by law had to lay aside their work and join their pursuit. If they failed
to join, they were considered to have taken the part of the escaping person and would be
arrested. The law stated that pursuit of the fugitive must continue until he was caught or reached
the sea.
Keepers of the Peace - At the end of the 12 th Century (1195), King Richard issued a
proclamation entitled Keepers of the Peace, requiring the appointment of knights to keep the
Kings Peace. Some believe that the present shield type badge used by some police
departments had its origin with the shield the knights used. They keep guard at bridges and
gates and checking on people leaving and entering the town.
Statute of Winchester (Watch and Ward Act) - Near the end of the 13 th Century (1285),
the Statute of Winchester enacted the system of Watch and Ward Act. A watch was stationed
between sunset and sunrise at each gate of a walled town. It revived the Hue and Cry. Some
watches are grouped together for protection and patrolled the town in Marching Watches.
The Charlies - Near the middle of the 17th Century (1663), King Charles passed an act
which provided in London one thousand Night Watchmen or bellmen to be on duty from sunset
to sunrise and they were called Charlies. Also referred to by the local citizens as Shiver and
Shake watch because they were often old and frail and would run off if they saw any trouble, or

www.rkmfiles.net
77
*********************************************************************
heard a cry for help. They carried long staves and dimly lit lanterns, and they called out the hour
and weather conditions. Some were not honest and sometimes work for criminals as lookouts.
Because of this ineffectiveness, merchants hired their own watchman who was known as the
Merchant Police.
Bow Street Runners - In 1748, Henry Fielding became the Chief Magistrate at Bow
Street in Middlesex, London. He organized a group of men known as Bow Street Runners whose
task was to run errands for the Bow Street Court. He later formed The Bow Street Horse Patrol
whose duty was to patrol the main roads thus secure the travelers from highwaymen or highway
bandits. According to some books, Bow Street Runners was the first organized foot patrol and
Bow Street horse Patrol was the first mounted police on patrol.
The Metropolitan Police - In 1829, Sir Robert Peel introduced the Metropolitan Police
Act and was passed by the English parliament of England in the same year. This law led to the
creation of the Metropolitan Police Force of London, which is viewed by some historians as the
first organized uniformed police form. This police force was later called Scotland Yard. Being
the sponsor of the law, Peel became the first head of the police organization thus earning the title
of The Father of Modern Policing System.
The New Police by Peel were not well received at first. Oftentimes, they were referred
to as Peels Bloody Gang, Blue Devils, and Dirty Papists.
France
The French Police is quite old. During the Roman Empire, France was the Roman
province Gaul, and the French seemed to expand on Augustus Caesars idea of police by giving
them very wide powers including price control, welfare, public morals, and even sitting in
judgment of these offenders. They (the police) handled duties that today we consider civil
matters and their power came directly from the king not from the community.
16th Century - Paris had two patrols: The Citizen Night Guard; (similar to English
Watchman) and the Royal Guard which was probably for the kings protection. At this time, SaintLouis gave the Guard a motto that is even today on the French police emblem, Vigilat ut
Quiescant (He watches that they may sleep).
End of 18th Century (1791) - The position of Officers de Paix was formed (origin of
Peace Officer).
First Police Organization (headed by Louis-Marie Debelleme)In truth, the
French were the first to establish a group of uniformed police officers tasked to patrol the city of

www.rkmfiles.net
78
*********************************************************************
Paris. This police force was called Sergent de Ville (servant of the city) which was organized
six months earlier before the creation of Metropolitan Police Force of London.
The United States
In Colonial Times - As former colony of England, it borrowed most of th system of its
country of origin.
Two main trends in law enforcement were:
1. North life was more urban oriented, and the Watch or Constable system seemed to be
best suited.
2. South development was more rural because of agriculture, hence, the sheriff system
became the trend.
Other pertinent developments:
1. Boston, 1636 formed the first Night Watch
2. Plymouth, 1634 first constable
3. New York (Dutch colonists), twenty years later formed the Ratelwatch (rattle watch).
4. Philadelphia, at the turn of century set up a system that obligated duty where citizens
served as Watchmen.
American watchmen were called Leathermen because they wore varnished leather
hats.
Intermediate period the following were the key events concerning police and patrol before
the modernization of the United States of America:
1. Philadelphia, 1833 instituted the first daytime, paid police service
2. New York, 1844 organized the first modern American police force based on the English
Metropolitan police.
3. In the frontier areas law enforcement was developed on a local level without many
established rules. Enforcement was aided by the use of the old legal process Posse
Comitatus (power of the state to summon assistance in enforcing the law). To beef up
law enforcement, Wanted Poster and Bounty Hunters were used.
4. San Francisco formed the Committee of Vigilance in lieu of an established police.
Their motto: Fiat Justitia Ruat Coelum (Heaven decrees, Let There Be Justice).
5. Pendleton Act of 1833 established civil Service for federal employees.
Modern Period - This period began in the 1920s with the use of automobile patrol and voice
radio communications.

www.rkmfiles.net
79
*********************************************************************
World War II During the war, the following were some of the events highlighting policing in
America:
1. Difficulty of getting police personnel.
2. However, since many young men joined the military police, they were stimulated to
pursue career in police work.
3. GI Bill required police men to get college education and the New Breed was born.
Philippines
The evolution of policing system and police patrol in the country developed from the
practice of different tribes. The common tradition was to select able-bodied young men to protect
their villages from the depredation of wild animals that prey on their crops and livestock.
Some Important Dates or Events in Early Policing particularly in the area of patrol
organization (some were already discussed in the Preliminaries of this book):
1712 - Carabineros de Seguridad Publico was organized for the purpose of carrying the
regulation of the Depoprtment of State and was armed and considered as the
Mounted Police.
Jan. 8, 1836 - Guardrilleros, a body of rural police organized in each town as
established by a Royal Decree.
Feb. 12, 1852 - Guardia Civil, was created by a Royal Decree issued by the crown to
partially relieve the Spanish Peninsular Troops of their policing towns.
1899 - Post Office Inspection system begun.
1901 - Department of Public Instruction was concerned with peace and order. Gen.
Howard Taft became the first Civil Governor of the Philippine.
July 18, 1901 - The PC, better known as the Insular Constabulary, was organized, the
first insular police force in the Philippines, manned mostly by Filipinos but most
officers were Americans. Capt. Henry Allen named as the first Chief of the PC.
1935 - American Police Force withdrawn with the advent of the Commonwealth. Capt.
Columbus Piatt was the last American Police Chief in Manila. Col. Antonio C.
Torres became the first Filipino Police Chief.
With the outbreak of the Pacific War:
1939 - The Manila Police Department introduced the bicycle patrol.

www.rkmfiles.net
80
*********************************************************************
Dec. 8, 1941 - Col. Torres declared manila as an open city.
Jan. 2, 1941 - The first element of the Japanese Imperial Army entered Manila. The
Japanese Military Police (Kempetai) took Chief Torres in custody and rounded
the members of the Manila police and ordered them to cooperate. They were
held responsible to maintain peace and order. The MPD was renamed
Metropolitan Constabulary under the Supervision of the Bureau of Constabulary.
Feb. 7, 1945 - Gen. Douglas McArthur returned to the Philippine. The Battle of Manila
ended. The MPD was reconstituted and placed under American control. Col.
Marcus Ellis Jones became the Chief of Police.
Post War Era:

Mar. 17, 1954 - Automobile Patrol was introduced in Metro Manila. Isaias Alma Jose, the
first Chief of mobile patrol of MPD.
Dec. 13, 1990 - RA 6975, An Act establishing the PNP under a Reorganized Department
of the Interior and local government and for other purposes.
1998 - RA 8551, the PNP Attrition Law, Professionalization Law
Present Period The country through the Philippine National Police and the Department
of Interior and Local Government in coordination with other government agencies particularly the
Armed Forces of the Philippines, has tapped the involvement of the community in policing. One
of these is the institution of the Community Oriented Policing System or COPS, the Integrated
Patrol System (IPS) and the Patrol 117 (These are discussed in the latter part of this Chapter).
The Role of Police Patrol
The primary law enforcement body of the state is the police. The basic police mission
preserving order by enforcing rules of conduct or laws was the same in the ancient
communities as it is today in sophisticated and highly urbanized societies.
Police, the first component of the Criminal Justice System in the Philippine setting is
responsible in performing these fundamental functions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Prevention of crime and repression of criminal activities

Preservation of peace and order
Protection of life and property
Enforcement of laws and ordinances and regulation of non-criminal conduct
Investigation of crimes
Apprehension of criminals

www.rkmfiles.net
81
*********************************************************************
7. Safeguarding of citizens rights and public morals
On Law Enforcement, it embraces crime prevention and crime control, including
customary police functions. On the other hand, peace and order maintenance covers the
peacekeeping role and community-oriented services (community service role). Note that peace
and order maintenance has no law enforcement implications. Domestic trouble is a sample
situation wherein police officers must have to intervene although their action is not backed by any
specific law or ordinance. Sometimes, while performing a mediators role in a family squabble, the
responding officers may subsequently take police actions if:
1. the family dispute involves a felony;
2. an offense is committed in the officers presence;
3. self-defense is necessary on the part of the police officer.
Why is it that the citizens usually call first the police when a social problem occurs?
Traditionally speaking, these are the reasons: Because the police are constantly available
when needed; dependable when called upon; and capable of providing advice to decide or settle
interpersonal conflicts. Thus, there are two broad duties of police officers while on patrol.
1. Provide public protection through:
a. Preventive Enforcement progressive and continuous patrolling
b. Selective Enforcement research and investigation
2. Render social services
a. information services
b. police escort
c. assisting other agencies
d. serving court notices (warrants)
Patrol and Police Discretion
In police matters, discretion simply refers to the wise use of ones judgment based on
personal experience and common sense to decide a particular situation. Discretion may also
mean the freedom to decide: the freedom or authority to judge something or make a decision
about it
Police officers are decision-makers and most of their decisions involve discretion. In
hostage taking, for example: if they shoot, they are publicly condemned. But if they hesitate, even
for just a second, they are dead.
Police officers, especially those on patrol, must develop the positive side of split-second
decision-making. When a patrol officer confronts a situation, he must immediately decide - that
his decision must not only be on time but at its best. It is ironic that an officer on patrol makes

www.rkmfiles.net
82
*********************************************************************
more decisions and exercise broader discretion regarding the peoples life everyday than a judge
who normally decides one or two cases in one day. Note further that no law, no book, no lawyer,
no judge can instruct a policeman on the beat regarding the proper exercise of discretion.
The Nature of Police Patrol
Patrol is the backbone of the police department. The proof to this statement is that patrol
force is the only division in the police organization that cannot be eliminated. This is usually true
in small police organization since it cannot afford to create divisions such as Traffic, Investigation,
Juvenile and other specialized areas.
While small police departments grow to keep up with the increasing population,
expanding geographical boundaries, and growing diversity of police jurisdiction, there is a need to
hire uniformed and non-uniformed police personnel to take over the clerical and record keeping
functions in order to provide policemen more time for their field responsibilities. Specialized units
such as vice squad, homicide section, child and womens desk, and others have to be created.
But all the while, the patrol unit continues to exist as the principal functional unit or backbone of
the police department.
What is the importance of Police Patrol?
Obviously, the patrol force is indispensable unit in every police organization.
following are the specific points that justify the importance of Police patrol:
The
1. Patrol is the essence of police operations.

2. The patrol group is the single largest unit in the police organization.
3. Actions taken by the patrol officer have the most direct impact on the citizens satisfaction
and on the accomplishment of police goals and objectives.
4. Patrol operation is the most visible form of activity that enhances the welfare and security
of the community.
5. Individual patrol officers represent the police department in its contact with the
community.
6. Individual patrol officers play a major role in determining the quality of justice in a given
community. Errors made by patrolmen have significant negative effect in the publics
perception and on the other components of the CJS.
7. The patrol officer is the most important human element of the police organization since all
police field operations are supported by the patrol activity.

www.rkmfiles.net
83
*********************************************************************
What are the patrol functions?
Based on Section 1 of Rule II of the original Police Manual, the patrol force has the
primary responsibility of safeguarding the community. This can be done through the:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Protection of persons and property

Preservation of peace and order
Prevention of crime
Suppression of criminal activities
Apprehension of criminals
Enforcement of laws and ordinances
Regulation of criminal conduct
Performing necessary services and inspections
Police departments sometime gain reputation of efficiency and effectiveness based on

their vigilance in dealing with criminal offenses and the establishment of a high state visibility in
the community. Criminals usually plan their legal illegal ventures in areas where police are known
to be lax and inefficient. Hence, they purposely avoid communities whereby the police have
established reputation of being extremely vigilant and aggressive in deterring crimes.
In order to realize the above-enumerated functions, the patrol unit has to perform the
following activities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Routine Patrol and Observation

Benevolent and community services called-for services, inspection services
Control of public rallies preventive attendance & maintenance of order, responding
to emergency calls
Attending to criminal and civil complaints
Conduct preliminary investigation
Animal control, traffic direction and control
Business and property security
Collection and preservation of evidence
Arrest of offenders
Preparation of reports and testifying in court
What is the Concept of Crime Prevention and Crime Suppression?

Theoretically, crime prevention involves the suppression of the desire of potential
criminals to commit crimes. On the other hand, crime suppression involves the elimination of the
opportunity of criminals to perform acts against the law.

www.rkmfiles.net
84
*********************************************************************
In reality, crime prevention and crime suppression are activities that patrol officers do not
bother to distinguish. When they are deployed at the streets, patrol officers have no time to
ponder if what they do is under crime prevention or crime suppression.
Police Personnel Distribution
The patrol force is an organization within an organization. The patrol force is the nucleus
(focal unit) of the department about which the special services are grouped, and therefore, it shall
not be subordinated to any other police unit in the police department. The operational heart of a
police organization is the patrol force to which other departmental divisions relate in a supportive
role. In ordinary police stations, the suggested distribution of police functions is as follows:
Police Activity
Percentage
1. Patrol Functions
50%
2. Criminal Investigation
15%
3. Traffic Functions
10%
4. Vice & Juvenile Related Functions
10%
5. Administrative Functions
10%
6. Auxiliary Functions
5%
(courtesy of Isaias Alma Jose)
Manning Level of Patrol Force
One basis of the effectiveness and efficiency of the patrol force is the manning level or
manpower of the police organization. The patrol unit must get the most number of uniformed
personnel. The rule of thumb regarding the manning level of any police department must be
observed.
In the Philippine setting, the rule regarding the manning level of the police is provided
under section 27 of Republic Act # 6975. The standard manning level is 1:500 (1 police officer for
every 500 residents). However, in extreme conditions, this manning level maybe stretched to
maximum, which is 1:1000 (1 police officer for every 1,000 resident).
PATROL THEORIES AND PATROL METHODS
A. Fundamental Theories of Patrol

www.rkmfiles.net
85
*********************************************************************
1. Theory of Police Omnipresence - High police visibility discourages criminals. Normally,
criminals think twice before executing their plans if there is obvious presence of police
officers. Thus, patrol activity should be carried in a manner that attracts maximum
attention to the police officer or police vehicles. This theory applies the principle of overt
operation or high police visibility.
2. Low Profile Theory - Low police visibility increases the opportunity to apprehend
criminals. Deceptive absence of the police officers will let criminals believe that they will
not be detected or caught if they execute crimes that they planned. In this theory, the
objective is to attract as little attention as possible while on the process of patrolling. The
officers should operate in a manner that it would be difficult for either criminals or the
public to determine that police are around. The principle of covert operation is
integrated in this theory.
A smart patrol officer should use both approaches depending on the
circumstances of a situation. He can make his presence obvious in a high-crime area to
deter criminals by conducting slow motor patrol. In another situation, he may conceal
himself and test the presence of criminals around an area.
The most important role of a patrol officer is to serve as the police organizations
actual field contact with the people. Thus, the word PATROL is an acronym of: P
oliceman; A ssigned; T o; R estore; O rder in the ; L ocality
B. Patrol Methods
Patrol methods are various means of getting from one place to another within a specified
patrol jurisdiction. Various methods of patrol are not intended to isolate the patrol officer from the
people he vowed to serve and protect.
Patrol effort made by the police may be in the form of any or combination of the following:
1. Beat Patrol
a.
Foot Patrol
b.
Bicycle Patrol
2. Sector Patrol (Motorized Patrol)
a.
Automobile Patrol
b.
Motorcycle Patrol
c.
Aircraft Patrol (Helicopter and Fixed Wing)
3. Specialized Patrol Methods
a.
Horse (mounted) Patrol

www.rkmfiles.net
86
*********************************************************************
b.
c.
d.
Marine (water) Patrol

Canine (K-9) Assisted Patrol
Special Terrain Patrol
FOOT PATROL
Foot patrol is restricted to small areas and is used to deal with special situations while
maintaining radio contact with officers in patrol cars. Foot patrol is used to secure 2 types of
police geographical units:
1. Post a fixed position or location where an officer is assigned for guard duty
2. Beat the smallest area specifically assigned for patrol purposes
Types of Foot Patrol

1. Fixed foot patrol is usually used for traffic, surveillance, parades, and special events.
2. Mobile foot patrol is used where there is considerable foot movement such as patrolling
business and shopping centers, high crime areas, and in places where there are many or
multiple family dwellings.
a. Line beat patrol is used in securing a certain portion of a road or street.
b. Random foot patrol is used in checking residential buildings, business
establishments, dark alleys, and parking lots.
What are the basic techniques and procedures of Foot Patrol?
1. Do not establish a set of pattern of patrolling procedure.
If you patrol your beat along certain streets and make regular stops at specific
times and locations, criminals will learn your habits and take steps to avoid you.
Turn corners as often as possible to avoid being followed.
Refrain from taking meal or coffee breaks at the same time and place during your
shift.
Reverse the direction of your patrol route, often and at random.
Cut through lanes and alleys.
2. Walk systematically (with purpose) on the beat while on patrol.
Pause often during your patrol and look around you.
If you are not paying attention to your surroundings, you are not patrolling but
youre strolling.
3. Do not smoke nor drink while on patrol during night or day shift.

www.rkmfiles.net
87
*********************************************************************
4. Walk near the curb during daylight. This technique offers:
a better view for observing street activity;
less chance of obstruction by pedestrians on the sidewalk if you are required to
take quick action; and
higher police visibility, which is effective in crime prevention.
5. Walk near buildings during night patrol.
Check the window glass of street level stores or offices for cracks or broken
glass.
Avoid looking backwards, unless necessary. Use the reflection in store windows
to see your back.
Move discreetly to avoid tipping off burglars or muggers.
Pause frequently in shadows to observe without being seen.
Use convenient light to check doors in case of forcible entry.
6. Do not immediately open the door when intending to get inside. Observe and evaluate
first the situation.
7. Check the interiors of buildings and rattle doorknobs to ensure that premises are secure.
8. Watch for persons loitering or hiding in doorways, either ingress or egress.
9. Use fire escapes to inspect building rooftops once in a while.
10. Be attentive or on alert for the sound of breaking glass or any unusual noise that may be
caused by criminal activity.
Advantages of Foot Patrol
1. Greater personal contact with the public leading to increased community support for the
police. Police becomes closer to the community residents.
2. Greater opportunity to develop sources of information.
3. High police visibility. Regular police presence discourages criminals and provides greater
sense of security to storekeepers, females, and elderly persons.
4. Places not accessible by motor vehicles are reached and patrolled. Patrol officers can
enter small alleys and side streets.
5. Easier detection of criminal activities. Foot patrol provides closer observation of the
environment and the circumstances that may require immediate police attention.
6. Easy discovery and familiarization on the layout of the beat. In-depth knowledge of the
character and problems of the patrol area.
Disadvantages of Foot Patrol
1.
2.
Low mobility resulting to limited coverage of the patrol area.

Low response time to telephone complaints.

www.rkmfiles.net
88
*********************************************************************
3.
Foot patrol method involves a large number of personnel, since officers

are assigned on small areas of jurisdiction called posts and beats.
AUTOMOBILE PATROL
The patrol car is the most extensively used and the most effective means of
transportation for police on patrol. Equipped with state-of-the-art police gear, patrol cars today
provide a rapid, safe, and efficient means of transportation under average operating conditions.
Automobile patrol has the greatest mobility and flexibility. Most experts on patrol operation agree
that it is the most cost-effective method of patrol.
Features of State-of-the-Art Patrol Cars
1. Reflecting pressure-sensitive film covering rather than mere paint
2. Vehicle-mounted TV high-resolution video camera with wide-angle lens
3. MDT mobile data terminal computer that allow officers in patrol car to access files
from Headquarters (HQ) and other Law Enforcement agencies
4. HELP - high-intensity emergency lighting plan heavy duty light than can provide 2
million candle power of lighting
General Techniques and Procedures in Automobile Patrol
1.
2.
Thoroughly check the patrol car before leaving the garage.

Do not establish route patterns in patrolling the area of jurisdiction.
Recommended patrol patterns (can be applied in any of the types of patrol):
Clockwise Pattern usually done during the first hours of patrolling.
Zigzag or Free-Wheeling Pattern - start at one corner of the patrol area and work
your way diagonally across it to the opposite corner.
Criss-cross Pattern more or less similar to zigzagging.
Straightway Pattern the easiest to observe because as the name implies, the
patrol officer just follow the length of the street.
Cloverleaf Pattern
Counter-clockwise usually done before the tour of patrol duty ends.
CLOVERLEAF a highway intersection designed so as to route traffic without
interference, by means of a system of curving ramps from one level to another, in the
form of a 4-leaf clover. Hence, the cloverleaf patrol pattern follows this pattern of
movement in patrolling.
3.
Do not develop the habit of using only the main roads in your area. Most
criminal activity occurs at the back streets, out of sight from the main thoroughfares.
4.
Do not spend too much time in drive-inns or coffee spots.

www.rkmfiles.net
89
*********************************************************************
5.
Always take note (jot down) the plate numbers of strange or suspicious
vehicles.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Get out from the patrol car regularly or frequently to be visible and
accessible to the public; and develop personal contacts in the neighborhood.
Set an example to other motorists.
Observe/Obey all traffic laws (rules of the road), for both safety and public
relation (PR) reasons, unless you are en route to an emergency or while on
pursuit.
Always park the patrol car in the legal way.
Use seat belts or shoulder straps and other safety devices.
Use the proper traffic signal lights and hand signals.
Avoid driving too fast on general patrol conditions except during
emergencies or in pursuing some criminals/suspects. Maintain a cruising speed of 20-25
mph during patrol. This is slow enough to make detailed observations without impeding
the traffic flow.
When conducting solo patrol, maintain frequent contact with the
dispatcher or other communication personnel in the field or at the HQ.
If you are patrolling with a partner, divide the observation area around
your vehicle.
The driving officer covers at least 100 OC of vision in front. He must not, however,
allow his observations to interfere with the safe operation of the patrol car.
The passenger officer should cover a field of view twice more than the driving
officer.
Both driver and passenger officer must always be on alert for possible
informants.
Minimize hiding behind hills, curves or signboards to trap traffic violators.
This is bad PR and serves to erode community confidence in the police sense of fair play.
Frequently check the potential trouble spots in your patrol area.
Stop periodically among parked cars at the entrance of side streets to
observe activity on the street.
Check the occupants of vehicles that stop beside and behind you at
intersections.
Regularly check parking lots for abandoned stolen vehicles.
In stopping and checking a vehicle, park at the rear side of the suspect
vehicle. Leave the door slightly open unless the area is highly populated.
Do not leave the key in the patrol car especially if the place is in a highcrime or congested area.
Advantages of Automobile Patrol

www.rkmfiles.net
90
*********************************************************************
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
High mobility allowing coverage of greater area.

Quicker response time to complaints. Greater efficiency
in responding to emergency calls and other called-for services
More economical as compared to foot patrol.
Enable more effective street pursuit of offenders.
Enable more effective traffic enforcement.
Provide an element of surprise, especially when crime is
in progress.
Provide the officers with necessary protection during
inclement weather.
Enable officers to carry supplementary equipment
essential in patrolling.
Disadvantages of Automobile Patrol

1.
2.
3.
Diminished personal contact with the public.

Little opportunity to develop sources of information.
Marked police vehicle hampers apprehension and surveillance
operations.
Advantages of One Man Automobile Patrol

1. Preventive enforcement is doubled by having twice as many police cars on the street
2. An officer who is alone devotes his full attention to driving and beat observation rather
than conversing with his partner
3. Personality clashes are reduced and/or avoided
4. Promotes self-reliance and self-confidence.
Advantages of Two Man Automobile Patrol
1. Provides officers with greater safety by doubling the firepower and physical protection
2. Mistake made by one officer may be noticed and immediately corrected by his partner
3. Each officer could get rest and thus perform more effectively since each does not have to
drive for full 8 hours of duty
4. Beneficial since two pairs of eyes are better than one.
5. One could operate the radio while the other one drives.
6. Sleeping on duty could be avoided especially for the one who is driving since he has a
companion who keeps him awake
BICYCLE PATROL

www.rkmfiles.net
91
*********************************************************************
Bicycle patrol is growing in popularity because of easy operation and its acceptance by
the public, particularly children who view them as a non-threatening form of patrol. Bicycles are
now used in many countries as a simple and inexpensive means of silent transportation to carry
police officers throughout their patrol district. Often, bicycles are used in parks and on beaches
and have many of the same advantages and disadvantages as motorcycles.
Advantages of Bicycle Patrol
1.
2.
Lower-cost (inexpensive) to operate as compared to motorcycle and automobiles

Areas not accessible by patrol cars or are too wide for foot patrol can be covered
by bicycle
3.
Increased mobility and stealth since bicycle can be operated quietly and without
attracting too much attention. In Seattle, Washington, for, example, bicycle officers use
bikes to whip around corners and surprise drug dealers. This type of patrol provides the
maximum stealth and mobility to patrol officers.
4.
Found to be highly effective in combating theft, vandalism in residential areas,
parks, shopping malls, etc. The Seattle Citys 20 bicycle officers have averaged five times
the number of arrests made by foot patrols in the downtown area.
5.
Effectively used by plainclothesmen for surveillance in high crime areas wherein
officers wearing nondescript clothes could blend with the apparels worn by the criminals
Like motorcycles, bicycles leave the patrol officer extremely vulnerable. Officers should
have the proper safety equipment and follow all basic safety practices while on bicycle patrol.
MOTORCYCLE PATROL
Most police departments have their motorcycles marked with the same insignia as their
patrol cars. Motorcycles are beginning to be a favorite of patrol officers because of the ease and
speed of moving around. Motorcycle patrol has many of the same advantages as automobile
patrol, especially in speed and maneuverability. Motorcycles have greater access than
automobiles to some areas and are better suited to heavy traffic, narrow alleys and rugged
terrain.
Disadvantages of Motorcycle Patrol
1.
2.
3.
4.
relatively high cost to operate

limited use in bad weather
inability to carry additional equipment or officers
the danger involved in riding them

www.rkmfiles.net
92
*********************************************************************
Thus, in motorcycle patrol, proper protective clothing and helmets are a must. A
motorcycle also offers the patrol officer much less protection than a squad car should a person in
a vehicle being pursued decides to start shooting. Nonetheless, the ability of motorcycles to
maneuver through traffic and their ability to access areas, which squad cars cannot, make them
valuable patrol vehicles.
A number of American police agencies continue to use two wheel and three wheel
motorcycles, especially for traffic control and special occasions, such as parades and escort duty.
In general, however, the use of the two wheeled motorcycle patrol had decreased in recent years
for several important reasons. Departments that have used solo, or two wheels, motorcycles,
have found them to be:
a. costly to operate,
b. hazardous to the driver, and
c. inoperative during inclement weather when the police should be most active in the
enforcement of traffic regulations or readily available for special escort duties.
d. Additionally, the solo motorcycle is tiring for the driver and has no capacity to
transport prisoners, other personnel, or equipment.
However the three wheel motorcycle:
a. can be operated regardless of road conditions
b. is far less hazardous, less tiring to drive,
c. has transportation capabilities. In essence, the three wheel motorcycle has most of
the advantages of the solo motorcycle and
d. greater maneuverability in dense traffic than the automobile.
HORSE PATROL (Mounted Patrol)
Mounted patrol is decreasing in the US but is still used in some large cities for crowd and
traffic control. Mounted officers are usually more acceptable than K-9s as crowd control
instruments. Expense is one of the main advantages of mounted patrol. The greatest advantage
is that an officer on horseback is much more effective at controlling a disorderly crowd than one
on foot or in any kind of vehicle (other than a tank). Mounted officers can see up to three blocks
away and cover more territory than officers on patrol.
Horses are useful in patrolling jurisdiction that covers large park areas or similar places
where automobiles cannot go or may be forbidden. Mobile patrol cars cannot be expected to race
on grassy fields or wooded areas but horses can.
Mounted patrol is also valuable in search-and-rescue efforts in rural and wilderness
areas. Officers on horses have been called upon to:

www.rkmfiles.net
93
*********************************************************************
1. assist in evidence searches at crime scenes
2. round up straying cattle after a truck has tipped over
3. search for lost children in tall corn or grass where men on foot would be ineffective.
AIRCRAFT PATROL
Among the more recent trends in patrolling is the use of aircraft, either helicopter or fixedwing. Today, it has become necessary for the police use aircraft in performing both routine and
specialized patrol activities. The use of aircraft is not totally new. In 1925, the Los Angeles County
Sheriff Department has already formed a volunteer Reserve Aero Squadron. Full-time Aero detail
is still an official unit in this police department today.
Before 1929, the New York police department began using aircraft. In 1947, the New York
Port Authority began using helicopters for surveillance, transportation, and rescue. Other cities
and state agencies in United States has employed helicopters, usually during daylight hours. In
1986, the state of California developed an experimental program using helicopters for police
patrolling known as SKY KNIGHT.
During the latter part of 1959, the Public Safety Department of Dade County in Florida
used the aerial patrol concept. At present, it is effectively utilizing fixed-wing aircraft and
helicopters in regular patrols to prevent crime and apprehend offenders or engage in surveillance
activities.
Advantages of Fixed-Wing Aircraft Patrol
1. Patrolling long stretches of highway or expenses of inaccessible land.
2. Excellent for traffic control in long stretches of highways, for search and surveillance, and
other special missions.
Disadvantages of Fixed-Wing Aircraft Patrol
1. Fixed-wing aircraft has very little flexibility in congested metropolitan areas.
2. Needs a span of flat land for lift-off and landing.
3. Very expensive to operate.
Advantages of Helicopter Patrol
1. Able to travel at low speeds, to hover if necessary, and to land even in small patch of flat
land.

www.rkmfiles.net
94
*********************************************************************
2. Increased visual range/scope.
3. More efficient for rescue, medical evacuation, surveillance, and other high profile police
activities.
4. Improved response time to emergency calls and other called-for service.
5. Increased rate of apprehension of professional and organized crime groups.
6. Improved efficiency of regular patrol units through airborne reconnaissance.
7. Increased ability in conducting searches for missing or lost people suspected offenders
and escaping prisoners.
8. Provide a better system of flood lighting areas to be patrolled at night.
9. Capable of broadcasting information to a large area through airborne speakers.
10. Provide rapid emergency transportation of personnel.
11. Added security to patrol officers on foot, motorcycles or in patrol cars through backup
offered by aerial patrol.
Disadvantages of Helicopter Patrol
1. Very expensive high cost of training of pilots/operators, buying, fuel, and special
facilities for housing and maintenance.
2. Public complaints about the noise and about being spied upon.
3. Forcibly grounded during bad weather.
4. Smog and light or intermittent clouds affect visibility.
5. Presence of various hazards especially in congested areas, such as high wires and
smog.
6. There are landing patterns or procedures that must be followed, which delays landing
time.
7. Pilots must work shorter periods of time than regular police shifts since driver of
helicopters easily suffer work fatigues.
8. There are many tactical problems to overcome such as location of police units on ground
and the exact location of addresses
9. Element of surprise is lost since criminals could hear the helicopter coming even from a
great distance.
WATER PATROL (Marine/Bay/River Patrol)
Water patrol units are extremely specialized and are not in great use except in areas with
extensive coasts or a great deal of lake or river traffic. The objective was to use the water
vehicles in anti-smuggling operations as well as against robberies committed in warehouses
along riverbanks or water ports.

www.rkmfiles.net
95
*********************************************************************
Like aircraft, boats are expensive to buy, operate and maintain. Further, those who
operate them must have special training. Nonetheless, boats are the best means to effectively
control violators of water safety regulations as well as to apprehend drug and gun smugglers.
They are also valuable in rescue operations during times of flooding as well as in dragging
operations for drowning cases.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Winter or summer, the water patrol is responsible for:

search and rescue/recovery for drowning victims
routine patrol
buoying and marking
removal of navigation hazards
water safety inspections
water accident investigations
deterring boating law violations such as reckless operation
checking fishing licenses and catch limits
What are PWC?

A new trend in water patrol is the use of PWC or personal watercraft. Among the
earliest manufacturers of this type of vessel was the Yamaha Motor Corporation (1990). The
reason why PWC became popular was that the company began a loan program wherein law
enforcement agencies can obtain free use of Yamaha PWC during the boating season. These
vehicles have very shallow draft, high maneuverability and stability. They are also very easy to
operate. The 2 models most frequently used were the:
Wave Runner LX (for 2 people) and the Wave Runner III (for 3 people). The front
compartment allows for storage of ticket book, high-powered binoculars and a portable breath
test. Many are equipped with public-address systems, sirens, and lights.
Main advantages of using PWC rather than ordinary patrol boats are:
a. Marine patrol officers can approach areas not accessible to conventional patrol boats
because of shallow, low bridges or other impediments.
b. One or two officers are enough to operate while increasing maneuverability and
speed.
CANINE (K-9) ASSISTED PATROL (Dog Patrol)
As earlier mentioned, the Egyptians were the first to use dogs in patrolling. In the US,
dogs have been used in police patrol since 1900. In April 1957, Baltimore was the only American

www.rkmfiles.net
96
*********************************************************************
police force that used trained dog handler teams on patrol. As of April 1968, about 200 police
agencies used a total of 500 man dog teams in police patrol work.
Police dogs are especially useful in high crime areas, in dangerous search situations, in
dealing with street gangs, in dispersing a crowd, in taking fleeing suspects into custody, in
guarding suspects, in searching alleys, parks, schools, and other large building. A most recent
use of police dogs is in the search and detection of drugs in packages or on suspects.
The K-9 assisted patrol is becoming more popular, with even smaller departments
beginning to establish K-9 units. According to James C. Spurlock in his article K-9 in Law and
Order issue of March 1990: Along with mainframes and microchips, the small-to-medium-sized
police department shopping for the latest in cost-effective high-tech law enforcement might want
to consider the four-legged, cold-noised variety
A K-9 corps is essential for most medium size and large police departments but careful
planning and research must first be completed to determine the specific numbers and need for
police dogs. Dogs must be housed, transported then trained. Their handlers must be carefully
selected and trained.
Uses of Dogs or K-9s in police operations
1. Provide great assistance in search and rescue as well as in smelling out drugs and
bombs.
2. Provide protection for 1-officer patrol. Officer/s assigned to a high-crime area has little to
fear with a well-trained canine at their side.
3. Great value in crowd control since:
a. properly trained dogs are virtually fearless; and
b. totally loyal to their handlers have a significant psychological effect on would-be
trouble makers
4. Extensively used in international airports to detect narcotics and bombs because of their
keen sense of smell. A dog is capable of recognizing an odor 10 million times better
than a human can.
5. Specially trained dogs are extremely effective in finding bodies dead or alive, just buried
or buried for years.
6. Locating trapped people during emergencies.
7. Can be an asset to public relations efforts.
8. Well-trained police dogs can be used for demonstrations in public affairs, schools, or
parades.
What breeds of working dogs are best suited for police works?

www.rkmfiles.net
97
*********************************************************************
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
German Shepherds the most frequently used and highest-scoring dog for police work
Black Labrador retrievers
Giant Schnauzers
Rottweilers
Doberman pinschers
Bouviers
Newfoundlands
Airedale terriers
Alaskan malamutes
Disadvantages of using K-9

1.
2.
3.
4.
Most police dogs work with only one handler.

K-9, like most dogs, is territorial, and its handler and its K-9 cruiser are part of its territory.
Dog training is expensive. Dog training usually takes 10 to 12 weeks.
Police department that initiates a K9 section is vulnerable to law suits.
WOLVES It stands for Wireless Operational Link and Video Exploration System; the
system of attaching a miniature camera and transmitter to a search dog; this equipment
make mans best friend and even better friend, because the dog can now be the eyes and
ears of his handler in situations where saving life is paramount objective.
Bloodhounds These tracking dog; a large powerful dog with drooping ears, sagging jowls,
and keen sense of smell, formerly used for tracking.
PATROL: WORKING THE STREET
Preparation for Duty The patrol officers job starts even before they are in their respective area
of responsibility (AOR) because they need to prepare the following that are necessary in the
performance of their routines:
A. Equipment check
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Police uniform
Weapons
Watch
Money, including change for pay telephones
Flashlight, spare battery and bulbs

www.rkmfiles.net
98
*********************************************************************
6.
7.
8.
9.
Notebook with ample supply of blank paper

Forms re reports, traffic violations, etc.
Current list of stolen and wanted vehicles
Portable radio and other equipment as required
B. Information Check Prior to actual patrolling, the police officers should:

1. Secure and review descriptions of missing and wanted persons.
2. Arrange any follow-up work from previous shifts.
3. Check with the officer being relieved for any problems requiring your attention during
the shift.
4. Check patrol area log for problem areas requiring extra surveillance.
C. Vehicle Check In case of patrol officers assigned on mobile cars (prowl cars), they
should:
1. Check the inside of your patrol car, paying particular attention to the rear seat.
2. A prisoner may have hidden a weapon or evidence in the vehicle during the previous
shift.
3. During your own tour of duty, a prisoner might try the same maneuver. If you havent
checked the vehicle, any evidence you recover might be ruled inadmissible in court;
you would be unable to swear that the vehicle was empty before the suspect entered
it.
4. Record the condition of your vehicles interior in your notebook for possible latter use
as evidence.
5. Check your vehicles siren, roof light, radio and other equipment to ensure that they
are in proper working order. Note any damage or mechanical problems.
PATROL MANAGEMENT
The following are simple but vital questions in the management of a patrol unit in your
own department or in any police department:

www.rkmfiles.net
99
*********************************************************************
What is reactive Patrol?
It is the old system of police patrol activity which consists of continuously driving around
the area of patrol waiting for something to happen and to react accordingly in case something
does happen.
What is proactive Patrol?
It is the more economical alternative patrol system, which has an objective approach
against criminality as much as practicable. It addresses crime at its very root before it is able to
develop into a felonious act.
What is participative law enforcement?
It is a system where the citizenry and the police work together to reduce crime, prevent
juvenile delinquency and criminal behavior, maintain the peace and reduce local problems which
are the mutual responsibility of the police and the people.
What is the difference between prevention and repression of criminal and delinquent
behavior?
Prevention is the objective aimed towards ways and means to reduce the desire of the
human being to commit crime. Repression, on the other hand is the act of preventing the actual
commission of crimes. Repression is leveled on the prevention of the very act itself which
constitutes crimes.
What is Police Omnipresence?
It is a crime repression activity of the police which is accomplished by making their
presence known in such a way that even if they are longer present in a certain location, would be
criminals would still have the impression that they are still around and would therefore refrain
from committing an offense.
What is the meaning of the acronym COPS?

The acronym COPS refers to Community Oriented Policing System. It is the deploying of
policemen in police blocks to provide police and public safety services. It also involves the

www.rkmfiles.net
100
*********************************************************************
breaking down of large and impersonal police departments into small units to create as series of
mini-police precincts, which are responsive to the smaller communities.
What are the objectives of the PNPs New COPS?
1.) To enhance police visibility in order to reach out to the community to serve the
resident a policing out.
2.) To improve police community relation to gain public acceptance, build mutual respect
and trust and promote cooperation.
3.) To attend sustained and integrated police-community participation, in crime
prevention and suppression.
What is police block?
This is the NCOB (New Cops on the Block) Center of Command and Control of its
activities and the police base from which the citizen may seek assistance whether in person by
radio or telephone.
What is the so-called House Visitation?
It is a function of NCOBs where police officers on patrol visit every house and work place
to offer crime prevention advice and to organize the neighborhood crime watch groups.
What is the so-called Street Questioning method?
It is a method whereby policemen on patrol may interview within the bounds of law
suspicious personalities at random in order to serve as a deterrent to those intended to commit a
crime.
What is the police social service of the PNP?
It is a project that concerns a wide variety of activities such as physical fitness and sports
development and formation and education and livelihood projects. The following are some of the
benevolent services performed by the police patrol:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Midwife duties for childbirth.

Render first aid to accident victims.
Get relief assistance to disaster victims.
Mediate in family quarrels.
Delivery of death messages.

www.rkmfiles.net
101
*********************************************************************
What do you understand about the concept of Team Policing?
It is a grassroot approach undertaken to bring the people and the police together in a
cooperative situation. Its distinguishing feature is the establishments of neighborhood crime
watch groups to encourage the people to report crimes and to assume greater interest and
responsibility in crime prevention and suppression.
What is the purpose of police uniform?
As with any other occupation, the police uniform is intended to separate policemen from
everyone who are not in the same line of work to avoid confusion and to assure others of his
authority and his presence.
Give the four kinds of inspections conducted by policemen on patrol.
Policemen may conduct building inspection, crime prevention follow-up, house inspection
and miscellaneous inspection.
What is Patrol Hazard?
This is a term used frequently to describe a specific condition or place that requires a
patrol officers special attention.
What is the importance of Vehicle inspection for patrol?
The emergency nature of police work demands that the vehicle they use be in the best
condition as possible not only for routine patrol driving but also for pursuit operation. Hence,
there is a need for regular vehicle inspection.
What is the purpose of the District Orientation Tour in preparing for patrol?
Its purpose is to familiarize and orient a policeman about the patterns and characteristics
of his patrol area before he conducts actual patrol.
What is police surveillance?

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
It is the process of keeping under observation a person; a place or an object to obtain
information material to the solution of a case. It is also use to detect some forms of criminal
behaviors.
What is the purpose of the police at the scene of civil disturbance?
During civil disturbances, the police: protects lives and properties of everyone at the
scene; enforces the law; and restores peace and order.
What are the objectives of the police at the scene of unlawful assemblies?
The objectives of the police at the scene of unlawful assemblies like riot (these are
discussed in Chapter 4 Crowd Control and Riot Prevention): Containment; Dispersal;
Prevention of reentry or entry; Arrest of law violators; and Establish priorities.
State the essential steps that must be taken by the police during a disaster response.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Assess the nature and extend of the disaster or calamity.

Communicate information in the fastest means available.
Administer urgently needed first aid and rescue activities.
Establish a command post.
Contain the area.
Maintain open emergency lanes/streets.
Evacuate survivors and people from danger area.
Provide public information services.
Establish coordination with other government agencies.
Provide access area for authorities.
Record the events.
What are the keys to effective law enforcement at labor strikes?

1. Exercise strict neutrally and maximum tolerance.
2. Initiate friendly dialogue between contending parties.
3. Seek cooperation from both sides.
What are the primary line units concerned with the accomplishment of the police
operational tasks?
102

www.rkmfiles.net
103
*********************************************************************
The primary line units in the police include patrol, investigation, traffic, vice and juvenile
patrol.
What are the secondary or auxiliary units concerned with the service tasks?
The secondary or auxiliary units in the police include the records, property custodian,
jails, crime laboratory services, transportation, and communication.
What are the administrative or managerial units?
The administrative or managerial units in the police include personnel, intelligence,
planning, budgeting, and training in community relations.
Why participation of patrol in vice control necessary?
Patrol participation in vice control is necessary in order to lessen the force needed in the
vice-division; to increase its efficiency; to conserve time and energy of its members; and to focus
its attention to the more serious vice violations.
What are different types of calls response by the police patrol?
ROUTINE CALL Under this category, the mobile car is required to observe all traffic
laws and rules and does not normally use its flashing lights and siren while on its way to the
scene. This includes when the police responds to:
1. Provide police car transportation.
2. Obtain reports about offenses discovered after the criminal has left and which does not
involve injury.
3. Obtain information the nature of which is not given.
4. Investigate apparently abandoned vehicles.
5. Obtain damage reports.
6. Provide additional traffic control and direction.
URGENT CALL This is similar to the routine call, which also requires the responding
police car to observe all traffic rules and does not use its flashing lights or siren. However, it
proceeds directly to its destination and does not stop unless an incident of far more serious
nature occurs. This includes when the police responds to investigate:
Trouble of unknown nature.
Shoplifter complaint.

www.rkmfiles.net
104
*********************************************************************
Vehicular accidents in which there are no physical injuries.

Prowler complaints.
Lost children complaints.
Report of mob activities.
Reports of domestic or tenant-landlord or neighbor conflicts.
EMERGENCY CALL In most cases, this category requires the use of the flashing light
and fluctuating siren although there are exceptions which include the attempt to surprise criminals
in the act. It is permissible in this case for the responding police car to violate traffic laws
provided that extreme care is exercised while driving at high speed. This includes when the
police responds to:
Investigate a crime in progress.

Investigate a traffic accident in which people are injured.
Rescue or assist another patroller in trouble.
Aids an injured person.
Pursue or apprehend suspected criminal/s.
Assist in firefighting.
Stop an ongoing fight in progress.
What are the two schools of thoughts regarding the best means of approaching any scene
where a crime is believed to be in progress?
First is to approach the scene with lights and siren flashing and to pull on directly at the
scene of the reported crime. The idea here is to frighten the criminal in order to prevent him from
completing his criminal act.
Second is to approach the crime scene as inconspicuously as possible in order to use the
advantage of surprise in apprehending the criminal or preventing his escape.
What are the factors to be considered by the patroller in choosing the manner by which an
approach to a crime in progress is to be made?
These are the factors of: time and day; condition of traffic; possibility of ongoing physical
assault; and the neighborhood characteristics.
Why is the police force organized along semi-military lines?

www.rkmfiles.net
105
*********************************************************************
It is due to the nature of work they perform, the manner in which they are expected to
perform their duties, and their close adherence to a rigid chain of command with specific
assignment of duties and responsibilities and functional job descriptions that distinguish between
line and staff authority.
What is the distinction between line and staff functions?
Line functions such as patrol and criminal investigation are those that are directly
responsible for accomplishing police goals and objectives.
On the other hand, staff, auxiliary or support functions are those that are designed solely
to support and enhance the operation of line units. They usually include records,
communications, personnel, training, property maintenance and the like.
THE INTEGRATED PATROL SYSTEM (IPS) OF THE PNP
The Integrated Patrol System (IPS) of the Philippine National Police is a concerted effort
of the whole PNP organization with other government agencies. The purpose is for the effective
performance of the general role of the PNP which is to deliver the basic public safety services to
the community.
What are the Three (3) Public Safety Bureaus?
In the Philippines, there are three separate line bureaus created under the Department of
Interior and Local Government. They are responsible in the protection of the community against
criminality, destructive fires and calamities and protection by confinement and correction of
convicted criminal perpetrators. The three bureaus are:
1. PNP Philippine National Police
2. BFP Bureau of Fire Protection
3. BJMP Bureau of Jail Management and Penology
What are the Basic PNP Functions?
As stated earlier, the basic functions of the PNP are: Crime Prevention including crime
suppression; Crime Solution covers investigation of crimes; and Traffic Management
covers direction and control, and traffic accident investigation.
Crime Prevention the basic police function; the technique of eliminating the desire of
the people to commit crime. It can be done through Police Visibility. Crime Deterrence is
actually the essence (real meaning) of Police Visibility because:

www.rkmfiles.net
106
*********************************************************************
1. In crime prevention, the psychological tool of the police is VISIBILITY and
OMNIPRESENCE; and
2. Visibility and omnipresence is applied by the police for the purpose of:
a. making their presence felt;
b. giving a feeling of security to law abiding citizens; and
c. providing a feeling of fear to would be offenders.
What is the General Objective of Patrol Activity?
The general objective of patrol activity is to prevent the commission of crime by
destroying the opportunity of potential offenders thru constant and alert patrolling.
With these, patrol officers should have a detailed understanding of the anatomy of crime
or what makes up a criminal act. The anatomy of crime states that: crime takes place if the three
(3) elements or ingredients are present at the same time and place which are: Instrumentalities,
Motive and Opportunity. To explain further:
1. Instrumentality the means or instrument used in the commission of crime such as:
firearm; fan knife; poison (or any obnoxious substance); Hammer; motor vehicle; a
document, etc.
2. Motive the reason or cause why a person or group of persons will perpetrate a
crime or the purpose or aim of doing something. Examples are: economic gain;
jealousy; covetousness/greediness; revenge; gratify desire; and win a competition.
3. Opportunity It refers to the chance or twist of fate; consist of the acts (whether by
omission or commission) by a person (the victim) that enables another person or
group of persons (the offenders) to perpetrate the crime. Opportunity is synonyms
with carelessness, acts of indiscretion, and lack of crime prevention or lack of
consciousness on the part of the victim. Illustrative examples are:
a. Leaving ones home or car unattended for a long time
b. Walking all alone in a well-known crime prone alley
c. Wearing expensive jewelries in slum area
d. Readily admitting a stranger to ones residence and the like.
Further, once crime took place, it can be further explained by using the interaction of
these three (3) factors: Criminal Tendency, Total Situation, and Resistance to temptation.
Criminal tendency is innate to every human being. Total situation speaks of the environmental
circumstances. Resistance to temptation could also be innate to a person which could be
attributed to his cultural and educational upbringing.

www.rkmfiles.net
107
*********************************************************************
What is a Freak Crime Accident?
There are situations when all the three elements of the crime are present and merged at
the same time and the same place; however the victim is not the intended one due to error in
persona (mistaken identity). This is called a freak crime accident. Similarly, the public still need
to be protected against these kinds of crimes.
How Police Visibility is attained?
Police visibility can be done in three (3) ways: physical presence by being visible as
police and easy to locate police units; patrolling scheme through mobile, integrated, and
widespread, supportive, and redundant coverage; and response which should be proper,
adequate and timely (ideal is 5 minutes response time).
Further, the Police Visibility Program of the PNP can be accomplished thru the use of the
Integrated Patrol System (PNP-IPS). The PNP-IPS has the following features:
Pre-emptive
Widespread and Forward Deployment
Force Mixture (complementary & supportive)
Cross checking of Deployment
Force Multiplier
Supports the COPS
What are the Components of the IPS?

A. Fixed Components These include the following: Police Station HQ; Police Community
Precincts (PCP); Traffic Posts; and Visibility Posts police outposts
1. Station Desk (SD) plays the most important role in the implementation of the police
mission to serve end protect the community. Further, it serves as the 3 Cs of the police
force: communication; coordinating; and center/command post. Being the 3 Cs of
the police force, the SD serves as:
a. Nerve center of the IPS
b. Transmitter of the police station
c. Police stations administrative nerve center
d. Disaster Coordinating Council (DCC)
e. Showcase of the Stations efficient operational capabilities.
f. Monitoring assistance center during elections and other political events

www.rkmfiles.net
108
*********************************************************************
To ensure proper response to calls, the Police Station should equip the SD with
the following communication facilities:
a. Mobile radio base set at least 3 sets
b. Telephone line landlines and cell phone lines
c. Fax Machines
d. On line computer system
e. Several television sets
Situation/Locator Map (w/ magnetic equipment) also called spot map; the key-point in
the Police Station Desk; capable of providing a visual IPS situation because it shows the:
area of responsibility (AOR); Real Time Current Situation; and Real time Status of the IPS.
The importances of the Situation/Locator Map (S/LM) are: for OTS (on the spot) assessment
of the situation; and for OTS shifting of patrol forces to deal w/ a situation
2. PCP Led by a police commissioned officer with a rank of Chief Inspector or
Superintendent with a minimum of 30 personnel including the PCP Commander divided
in 3 shifts of 8-hours duty. More often, it is headed by Senior Police Officers (SPOs) due
to lack of commissioned officers.
B. Patrol Components The patrol components of the IPS are: Air Patrol; Line Beat Patrol;
Mobile Patrols; Motorcycle Patrol; Bicycle Patrol; Reaction Unit Patrol (SWAT); and Detective
Repressive Patrol.
1. Police Beats (PBs) These are consist of any contiguous or adjacent area defined by
identifiable boundaries within the AOR of a PCP where an officer can effectively patrol
during his tour of duty; it is an area that can be effectively patrolled on foot and police
officers can respond to calls for police assistance within a matter of minutes. PBs have
the following identifications (ID):
a. PBs for the NCR Police Offices:
Identifiable by a 5-digit number; the 1st digit refers to the numerical number
assigned to the district.
2nd refer to the number assigned to each of the cities/municipalities/stations within
the district.
3rd digit refers to the number assigned to particular PCP.
4th and 5th digits refer to the numbers assigned to a particular beat.
b. PBs for Regional Offices:
Identifiable by a 7-digit number
First 2 digits refer to the number of the region
3rd digit refer to the # assigned to a particular province within the region

www.rkmfiles.net
109
*********************************************************************
4th digit refer to the PCPs

5th and 6th referring to the beat
2. Mobile Patrol (MP) The SOPs are similar to the earlier discussions under the
AUTOMOBILE TYPE of patrol. In cases where a vehicle is stopped, the following 10
Rules in Stopping Vehicles should be applied:
a. During daytime, select the widest portion of the road where to stop a motorist.
b. Signal the motorist to pull closer to the right side of the curb with the patrol car parked
behind the violators vehicle.
c. Observe flow if traffic coming from behind before opening the door and alighting from
the patrol car.
d. In issuing a citation, occupy the right side of the vehicle using the hood to accomplish
the citation.
e. At nighttime, select a well-lighted place to stop a motorist.
f. Never stand to do anything in front of a stopped vehicle with its engine running and its
driver still at the vehicle.
g. Never stand to do anything between the stopped vehicle and the patrol car if the driver
of the stopped vehicle is at the wheel.
h. Never stand on the way of the door of the stopped vehicle especially if he is ordering a
suspicious driver to get out of the vehicle.
i. Never allow a person being interrogated to stand on the firearm side.
j. Never allow an apprehended suspect to sit inside the patrol car on the side where the
policemans f/a is tucked.
3. Detective Beat (DB) or Detective Beat System (DBS) - DB is a contiguous area where
a team of police investigators is assigned with a specific task of conducting follow-up
investigation to all complaints, reports, referrals, and other requests with the end-in-view
of full compliance and/or the filling of a case.
The Purpose of DBS is to provide the police organizational and operational framework in
truly effecting mechanisms towards enhancing the efficiency and effectiveness of the PNPs
investigation capability.
Nature of DBS:
a. DB is concerned with the crime solution angle while the PB has the primary role of
crime prevention and control.
b. DB maybe different from PB but the former complements the latter in serving and
protecting the community.
c. PB occupy a particular AOR while the detectives have the primary responsibility of 1 st
response in all cases reported for investigation purposes.

www.rkmfiles.net
110
*********************************************************************
Composition of DBT (detective beat team) in area is of 2 officers:
a. Detective In-Charge (DIC)
b. Investigator/Detective the principal character
Duties and Responsibilities of the DBT:
a. Assume primary responsibility or jurisdiction in conducting CSO within their AOR
unless otherwise directed by competent authorities for special cases requiring
intervention of specialized PNP units.
b. Investigator/Detective is responsible for case build-up, filing criminal charges, arrest of
offender, monitoring/tracking of cases and court appearance.
c. Perform all other duties and function to accomplish their assigned tasks.
Operational Guidelines for the conduct of Patrol
The following are the guidelines normally observed by the PNP in the conduct of
patrolling not necessary under the IPS:
1. Pre-patrol (Pre-deployment phase)
a. Fall-in- information in ranks
b. Roll-call- accounting of patrol elements by the patrol commander (PC)
c. Inspection of uniform, appearance & equipment by the PC
d. TI & E (Troop Information and Education) and dissemination of instructions/orders by
PC
e. Reading of assignment of PBs by Sarhento de Mesa or field duty officer (FDO)
f. Issuance of equipment to POs (Patrol Officers) and PTs (Patrol Teams)
g. Report to higher headquarters (HQ) by FDO
2. Deployment Phase:
a. Report to SD by the POs (Patrollers)
b. POs make patrol plan and follow patrol procedures
c. Adopt the buddy-buddy system
d. Make situation report on an hourly basis or upon reaching the end of their line beat
e. Report and/or record in the PSR (patrol sheet report) all unusual incidents.
3. Post-Patrol (Post-deployment Phase):
a. Regrouping and formation
b. Accounting
c. Inspection
d. Debriefing/submission of DPR (daily patrol report)

www.rkmfiles.net
111
*********************************************************************
e. Recall of equipment issued
f. Dismissal by the PC
After which, the patrol commander collects the DPR and submits it to the HQ for
consolidation and reference.
C. Auxiliary Components - In the Philippines, the police are the members of the PNP with two
(2) statutory characteristics:
1. National in scope and
2. Civilian in character
Who are the members of the Auxiliary Police (or Auxiliary Components of the IPS?
1. Private Security Guards
2. Traffic Enforcers and Aides
3. Junior Police
4. Law Enforcement Services Cadets
5. Barangay Chairman and Tanods (Barangay Public Safety Officers (BPSO))
6. Civilian Volunteer Organizations (CVOs) such as civilian volunteer radio communications,
and volunteer public utility vehicles (PUV) drivers and Non-Government Organizations
(NGOs) like Bantay Bayan, Bayan Muna, etc.
POLICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
What is the significance of Communication in Police Management and
Administration?
Effective communication is essential in all organizations in which people deal with
one another. It is very difficult to imagine any kind of activity that does not depend on
communication in one form or another. Todays police managers are aware that the
efficiency of their personnel depends to a great extent on how well the efforts of individual
members can be coordinated. Because coordination does not simply happen, managers
must realize that communication is necessary if their subordinates are to obtain the
understanding and cooperation required to achieve organizational and individual goals.
(Charles Swanson et. al. 1998)
What is Communication? Communication could mean:

1. The exchange of information between individuals, for example, by means of speaking,
writing, or using a common system of signs or behavior.

www.rkmfiles.net
112
*********************************************************************
2. The act of giving or sending information.
3. A means of access or communication, for example, a connecting door.
Generally speaking, communication refers to the transfer of thought or idea from
one person to another. It simply means the process of sharing ideas, information, and
messages with others in a particular time and place. Technically, it refers to the means or
equipment used to exchange a thought or idea.
What is the scope of Communication? Communication includes:
1. talking
2. writing
3. nonverbal communication - such as: facial expressions; body language; and
gestures
4. visual communication - use of images or pictures, such as: painting;
photography; video; and film
5. electronic communication such as: telephone calls; electronic mail; cable
television; and satellite broadcasts.
EVOLUTION OF COMMUNICATION
Communication between two people is an outgrowth of methods developed over
centuries of expression. Gestures, the development of language, and the necessity to
engage in joint action all played a part.
Communication among animals
Humans are not the only creatures that communicate; many other animals
exchange signals and signs that help them find food, migrate, or reproduce. The 19thcentury biologist Charles Darwin showed that the ability of species to exchange
information or signals about its environment is an important factor in its biological
survival.
Language
While other animals use limited range of sounds or signals to communicate,
humans have developed complex systems of language that are used to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ensure survival;
express ideas and emotions;
tell stories and remember the past; and
negotiate with one another.

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Oral (spoken) language is a feature of every human society or culture.
Anthropologists studying ancient cultures have several theories about how human
language began and developed. The earliest language systems probably combined
vocal sounds with hand or body signals to express messages. Some words may be
imitative of natural sounds. Others may have come from expressions of emotion, such
as laughter or crying. Language, some theorists believe, is an outgrowth of group
activities, such as working together or dancing.
Over 6000 languages and major dialects are spoken in the world today. As
some languages grow, others disappear. Languages that grow also evolve and change
due to class, gender, profession, age group, and other social forces. The Latin
language is no longer spoken but survives in written form. Hebrew is an ancient
language that became extinct, but has now been brought back to life and is spoken
today. Others such as the ancient languages of native peoples in Central and South
America, the Pacific Islands, and some of the Native American peoples of North
America, which had no written form, have been lost as the speakers died.
Today anthropologists are trying to record and preserve ancient languages that
are still spoken in remote areas or by the last remaining people in a culture.
Symbols and Alphabets
Most languages also have a written form. The oldest records of written
language are about 5000 years old. However, written communication began much
earlier in the form of drawings or marks made to indicate meaningful information about
the natural world. The earliest artificially created visual images that have been
discovered to date are paintings of bears, mammoths, woolly rhinos, and other Ice Age
animals on cave walls near Avignon, France.
Perhaps the earliest forerunner of writing is a system of clay counting tokens
used in the ancient Middle East. The tokens date from 8000 to 3000 BC and are shaped
like disks, cones, spheres and other shapes. They were stored in clay containers
marked with an early version of cuneiform writing, to indicate what tokens were inside.
Cuneiform was one of the first forms of writing and was pictographic, with
symbols representing objects. It developed as a written language in Assyria (an ancient
Asian country in present-day Iraq) from 3000 to 1000 BC . Cuneiform eventually acquired
ideographic elementsthat is, the symbol came to represent not only the object but
also ideas and qualities associated with it.
113

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
The oldest known examples of script-style writing date from about 3000 BC .
Papyrus sheets (a kind of early paper made from reeds) from about 2700 to 2500 BC
have been found in the Nile Delta in Egypt bearing written hieroglyphs, another
pictographic-ideographic form of writing.
Chinese began as a pictographic-ideographic written language perhaps as early
as the 15th century BC . Today written Chinese includes some phonetic elements
(symbols indicating pronunciation) as well. The Chinese writing system is called
logographic because the full symbols, or characters, each represent a word. Cuneiform
and Egyptian hieroglyph eventually incorporated phonetic elements.
In syllabic systems, such as Japanese and Korean, written symbols stand for
spoken syllable sounds. The alphabet, invented in the Middle East, was carried by the
Phoenicians (people from a territory on the eastern coast of the Mediterranean, located
largely in modern Lebanon) to Greece, where vowel sounds were added to it. Alphabet
characters stand for phonetic sounds and can be combined in an almost infinite variety
of words. Many modern languages, such as English, German, French, and Russian, are
alphabetic languages.
The DYAD
The most basic form of interpersonal communication is a dyad (an encounter or
conversation between two people). Some dyads exist over a long period of time, as in
a marriage or partnership. Communicating well in a dyad requires good conversational
skills.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Communicators must know how to:

start and end the conversation
make themselves understood
respond to the partner's statements
be sensitive to their partner's concerns
take turns, and how to listen
Group Communication
Communication may also occur in small groups, such as families, clubs,
religious groups, friendship groups, or work groups. Most small-group interaction
involves fewer than ten people, and the communicators need the same communication
skills as in a dyadic conversation. However, additional factors called group dynamics
come into play in a small group. A group may try to work toward a consensus, a
general sense of understanding or agreement with others in the group. Groupthink may
114

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
occur, in which a group reaches consensus so quickly that its members mistakenly
ignore other good ideas. Small-group members may experience disagreement or even
conflict. Some members may be more persuasive than others and form sides, or
cliques, within the group.
Public Speaking
Interpersonal communication occurs with larger groups as well, such as when a
speaker gives a talk to a large crowd (a political candidate giving a speech at a
campaign rally, or a teacher lecturing to a large class). However, the audience can
respond in only limited ways (such as with applause, nodding, whistles, boos, or
silence). The speaker usually wants to be persuasive or informative, so the words
chosen and the style of delivery or performance are very important. A speaker who
wants to reach an even larger audience than the people who can physically hear the
speech in one place must use communication technology or media to get the message
across distance and even time.
ANCIENT METHODS OF COMMUNICATION
From the earliest times, people have needed to communicate across distance or
over time. Since the beginnings of writing, communication media have allowed
messages to travel over distance and time. A communication medium is a means for
recording and transporting a message or information. The word medium comes from the
Latin word medius, meaning middle or between. It is a channel or path for sending a
message between communicators. A single channelsuch as radio, or a book, or the
telephone is called a medium; media is plural, meaning more than one medium.
Semaphore systems (visual codes) of flags or flashing lights were employed to
send messages over relatively short but difficult-to-cross distances, such as from hilltop
to hilltop, or between ships at sea. In the early 1790s the French scientist and engineer
Claude Chappe persuaded the French government to install a system of towers that
used semaphore signals to send visual telegraphs along approved routes throughout
the country. The system was copied in Great Britain and the United States.
Some ancient societies, such as the Roman or Byzantine empires, expanded
their territorial control far beyond their original boundaries, and traded with distant
neighbors. To hold on to their far-flung territories, they needed two technologies that
have remained closely tied ever since:
1. transportation; and
115

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
2. the ability to record information.
Recorded messages had to be carried easily. Therefore, lightweight forms of
recording (such as papyrus or animal skins) were desirable.
EVOLUTION OF MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Paper and Printing
The first lightweight medium was papyrus, an early form of paper used by the
Egyptians that was made from grasses called reeds. Later, in the 2nd century AD , the
Chinese wrote on silk fabric instead of wood, and developed paper made from silk
fibers. (Today paper made from cotton or linen fibers is still called rag paper.)
From as early as the 2nd century BC , Europeans wrote on thin layers of tanned
and scraped animal skins called parchment or vellum, with quill pens made from bird
feathers. Parchment is not as light as papyrus but is very durable; many parchment
manuscripts and books from the Middle Ages still exist. The Arabs brought papermaking
to Europe from China in the 11th century AD . Paper gave European merchants, who
traveled across the continent, a portable and inexpensive way to keep records.
Until the 1400s in Europe, all documents were handwritten. Copyists and
editors called scribes recorded commercial transactions, legal decisions and
pronouncements, and manuscript copies of religious booksmany scribes were monks
working in monasteries. By the 15th century, however, the need arose for an easier way
to duplicate documents. In Asia, block printing had already been developed by Buddhist
monks in China in about the 8th century. A similar technique was later used in the 15th
century by Europeans to make illustrations for printed books.
An early version of movable type of printing was first developed in China around
1045, and was independently developed by Koreans in the 13th century AD . In 1450,
the German printer Johannes Gutenberg perfected movable metal type and introduced
the first reliable system of typesetting, a key invention in the development of printing.
As more books became available, more people learned to read. Books were
printed in the local, or vernacular, languages as well as classical Greek and Latin. With
literacy came exposure to new ideas. Some historians believe that the 16th-century
Protestant Reformation (a revolution in the Christian church that divided it into factions)
might not have occurred if European thought had not been prepared by ideas
introduced and circulated in printed books. Printers published other things besides
116

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
books, including newspapers, pamphlets, and broadsides (sheets of paper printed on
one or both sides). These cheaper works helped spread news throughout Europe and,
in the 17th and 18th centuries, throughout the British colonies in America.
During the Industrial Revolution of the late 18th and early 19th centuries,
printing technologies evolved rapidly. The steam-powered press was invented in
Germany in the 19th century, and the rotary press, which prints images onto a
continuous sheet of paper from a rotating drum, was introduced in the United States in
1846. The Linotype typesetting machine was patented by the German-born American
inventor Ottmar Mergenthaler in 1884. It permitted typesetters to set text by typing on a
keyboard rather than hand-setting each letter individually. Together, the Linotype
machine and the rotary press transformed the speed of printing. These so-called hotmetal or letterpress printing technologies dominated the industry until the 1950s, when
phototypesetting and photo-offset printing were introduced.
Photocopying was another technology that made document duplication easier.
Invented by American physicist and inventor Edwin Land in the 1950s, photocopying
transfers an image from one sheet of paper to another very rapidly.
A more recent advance is computer typesetting and printing. Computers and
word-processing and graphics software are used today to set type and compose pages
on the screen just as they will look in the final print, in either black and white or color.
Page layouts can also be transmitted digitally (numerically coded into electronic pulses)
via fax machines, computer modems, telephone networks, and satellite systems to
other locations for editing, redesign, or printing.
The spread of computer-based word processing and graphic design has led to
the growth of desktop publishing. Today almost anyone can publish newsletters,
newspapers, or magazines for medium-sized audiences. Business communication has
been transformed by computer and information technologies. Letters, memos, reports,
or other documents can be transmitted almost anywhere at the speed of light.
Early advocates of business computers predicted the paperless office, an office
where paper would be made obsolete by computer technology. Experience, however, has
shown that the ease of copying, printing, and document transmission made possible by
computer technology has produced more demand for paper, not less.
Postal Services
Different societies have devised systems for transporting messages from place
to place and from person to person. The earliest were courier-type services whereby
117

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
messengers carried memorized or written messages from one person to another, and
returned with the reply. The Persian and Roman empires and some Asian societies sent
couriers regularly along planned routes to retrieve reliable and timely information about
trade and military affairs from distant areas.
In the United States, the postal service was established by the government in
1789, and the postmaster general's office was created to supervise the mail service.
The first postmaster general of the United States was Samuel Osgood. In the late 19th
century, as the United States expanded its territory west beyond reliable roads or rail
lines, the U.S. Post Office started the Pony Express, reviving courier-style services in
the new territories. Pony Express riders carried sacks of mail through rugged and
remote territory, relaying their loads from one rider to the next. The Pony Express
quickly became renowned for its speed of delivery.
Over time, the U.S. Post Office took advantage of new transportation systems.
Huge volumes of mail were sent across the country on trains, and the Post Office
started its own postal security force to prevent the mail from being stolen in railroad
holdups. They were also the first postal service to hire pilots to fly mail to distant or
rural locations within the United States and overseas. By the 1930s every small town
and rural route had carrier service; in many places, deliveries were made twice a day.
As demand for postal services grew, the U.S. Post Office developed systems for coding
and sorting the mail more quickly, notably the neighborhood ZIP Code system in the
1960s.
The Telegraphy
The first truly electronic medium was the telegraph, which sent and received
electrical signals over long-distance wires. The first practical commercial systems were
developed by:
1. Sir Charles Wheatstone (physicist, Great Britain);
2. Sir William F. Cooke (inventor, Great Britain); and
3. Samuel F. B. Morse (artist and inventor, United States).
Morse demonstrated the first telegraph system in New York in 1837. But regular
telegraph service, relaying Morse code (system of code using on and off signals), was
not established until 1844. Telegraphers would translate the letters of the alphabet into
Morse code, tapping on an electrical switch, or key. The telegrapher at the other end of
the line would decode the tapping as it came in, write down the message, and send it to
the recipient by messenger.
118

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Telegraph systems were immediately useful for businesses that needed to
transmit messages quickly over long distances, such as newspapers and railroads. A
telegraph room installed in the United States Capitol in 1844 was the center of a
sensation when news of the nomination of James K. Polk as the Democratic
presidential candidate was conveyed by telegraph between the convention in Baltimore,
Maryland, and the Capitol Building in Washington, D.C. In cities, thousands of telegraph
lines suspended on poles webbed the streets by the latter half of the 1800s. Telegraph
cable was first laid under the Atlantic Ocean in 1858, and regular transatlantic telegraph
service began in 1866.
The telegraph made it possible for many companies to conduct their business
globally for the first time. Because price changes could be communicated almost
instantaneously, the telegraph also prompted the reorganization of American
commodities markets. Prices became uniform from city to city, and futures (agreements
to buy a commodity at a fixed price on a fixed date in the future) markets were
established. In addition, standard time zones across the United States were established
so that railroads could set regular and consistent schedules as trains moved across the
country, enabling the railroads to check on schedules, passengers, and freight via
telegraph.
Telegraph technology became more sophisticated, especially after its
competitor, the telephone, was introduced in the 1890s. Telegraph systems evolved into
telex systems, in which machines eliminated the need for coding and decoding the
messages. Users could type in a message, and the identical message would appear at
the recipient's end, carried over telegraph and telephone lines (and eventually satellite
systems) to telex machines anywhere in the world. In remote areas where long-distance
telephone service was unavailable or impractical, telex machines were widely used
(much like an early version of electronic mail). Telegraph and telephone lines were also
used to transmit pictures via an early version of facsimile called telefacsimile or
Wirephoto service. Newspapers used Wirephoto to transmit photographs as early as
the 1930s.
The Telephone
In 1876, Scottish-born American inventor Alexander Graham Bell was the first to
patent and produce a telephone. His patent was titled Improvement in Telegraphy, and
contained the design of a device that would transmit the human voice over wires
instead of electrical clicks or other signals, like the telegraph. Originally, Bell thought
that the telephone would be used to transmit musical concerts, lectures, or sermons.
The American inventor Elisha Gray filed an intention to patent at the same time, but
after many court battles, Bell was given the rights to the invention.
119

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
Bell and his financial backers established the Bell Telephone Company. In an
extraordinary business move, Bell decided to lease telephones rather than sell them.
His next step would be to build the connecting networks and sell services on those
networks to customers. Bell began by leasing pairs of telephones that would connect
two locations, such as a businessman's home and office, or between two partners'
offices. However, the real appeal of telephone service emerged with the opening of the
first telephone exchangea switchboard connecting any member of a group of
subscribers to any other memberin 1878.
After Bell's patents expired in 1893 and 1894, other companies began
manufacturing telephones, wiring new networks, and installing exchanges. The new
exchanges connected people in rural communities and residential households. Some
were rural cooperatives owned and operated by the customers. The American
Telephone and Telegraph Company (AT&T), which bought the Bell Telephone Company
in 1900, developed switching systems to connect calls between exchanges, and
eventually began experimenting with long-distance connections.
Between the 1880s and the 1980s the telephone system in the United States
had an enormous effect on the quality of life and work. In rural communities, telephone
service meant an end to the isolation and loneliness experienced by many farm and
ranch families. Families whose members moved away to school or new jobs could stay
in contact with each other over the phone. For ill or disabled people, the telephone
became an indispensable link to the outside world. Telephone service also enabled
immediate contact with emergency services, such as the police, fire department, or
emergency medical services. By the 1960s the telephone was considered so essential
that telephone companies provided basic services at reduced rates to elderly and
disabled people.
The telephone network has also provided the electronic network for new
computer-based systems like the:
1. Internet
2. Facsimile transmissions
3. World Wide Web
The relationship today between computers and the telephone system is
inseparable.
The Radio
120

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
The telegraph and telephone were systems for distance communication that
sent electrical signals through wires. The earliest system for sending electrical signals
through the air via electromagnetic waves was called wireless, and later radio. Radio
technology was based on the discoveries of James Clerk Maxwell.
The Italian electrical engineer Guglielmo Marconi was the first person to invent
a true wireless radio. In 1895, he built a system that could send and receive a signal at
a distance of close to 3 km. (close to 2 miles). He moved to England, and by 1899 the
British Marconi Company had sent signals across the English Channel. In 1901,
Marconi received the Morse code signal for the letter S sent across the Atlantic Ocean
to Canada.
Marconi's radio system used a spark-gap technology that could transmit only
simple on-off signalsso radio signaling used an on-off system like Morse code. This
type of radio technology is called radiotelegraphy. Wireless was especially valuable for
ships in distress, so that other ships could be dispatched to save their passengers and
crews in times of emergency.
In 1901, the Canadian-born American physicist Reginald Fessenden patented
an alternator that would use continuous waves instead of on-off spark-gap signals. This
system could also send signals much farther and with much less background noise, so
it could carry the sound of the human voice. This new approach to radio was called
radiotelephony. On Christmas Eve and New Year's Eve in 1906, Fessenden produced
the first radio broadcasts from Brant Rock, Massachusetts, which were picked up as far
away as New York and by ships in the Atlantic.
Radio technology improved rapidly throughout the 20th century. The first
breakthrough was the invention of the cat's-whisker receiver, or crystal set, which used
a silicon crystal and a small metal wire to detect radio waves clearly. Later
improvements were made in the valves, or tubes, such as De Forest's Audion, which
amplified the signal once it was received. Radio transmissions initially used amplitude
modulation (AM) to superimpose audio signals onto radio waves. The invention of
frequency modulation (FM) radio provided much more sensitive and clear radio
transmission and reception. Tuners became more sensitive, and more broadcast
signals were sent over the air at different frequencies. In the 1950s and 1960s radio
manufacturers began replacing the bulky and heat-generating vacuum tubes in radios
with transistors, and radios became smaller.
Eventually the radio industry asked the federal government to intervene in their
disputes over frequencies and signal power. The Federal Radio Commission (FRC) was
121

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
created in 1927 and was given the task of allocating frequencies to different users.
However, the FRC was a somewhat ineffective body until the Communications Act of
1934, when it was renamed the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and given
a budget and a staff. FCC rulings had the power of law, and the agency was
responsible for issuing licenses to radio broadcasters for particular bandwidths,
frequencies, and signal powers. License holders had to demonstrate that they operated
their radio stations in the public interest, convenience, and necessity.
The Television (TV)
Two pioneers independently created the first workable television systems
American inventor Philo T. Farnsworth and Russian-born American engineer Vladimir K.
Zworykin. Farnsworth used an electronic camera he called an image dissector to
transmit a picture of a dollar sign in 1927. He patented aspects of his system, and
developed his television further in the 1930s, but lost his financial backing when World
War II (1939-1945) began.
In 1923, Zworykin first demonstrated an electronic television camera he called
the iconoscope. At the time, he was working for Westinghouse Electronic Corporation,
but Zworykin moved to RCA when David Sarnoff, vice president of RCA, became
interested in his invention. Sarnoff supported the development of the iconoscope when
RCA obtained the rights to Westinghouse's radio research projects in 1930.
Since the 1950s many improvements have been made in television technology,
particularly the introduction of color television in the 1960s. Image reception has
become clearer, and screens have become larger. Most televisions can now receive
stereo sound. The widespread growth of cable television since the 1960s has
introduced many new channels and types of programming into American homes. And
today direct-broadcast-satellite (DBS) services allow individual households to receive
hundreds of channels carried by satellites directly into their homes.
There is no doubt that television has been one of the most important
communication technologies in history. Televisions are switched on an average of
seven hours a day in American households. Debates continue about the medium's
effects on children, culture, education, politics, and community life. Critics say that
television feeds a constant stream of simplified ideas and sensationalistic images, that
it has a negative effect on political campaigns and voting patterns, that it destroys local
cultures in favor of a bland national culture, and that it has encouraged the growth of an
uncritical and passive audience. Defenders say that television provides a great deal of
high-quality educational and cultural programming, and that it is the major source of
122

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
national and international news and information for most U.S. citizens. Television can
be a very effective teaching tool in the classroom and at home. And, as the Canadian
writer Marshall McLuhan pointed out, perhaps nothing has been more responsible for
creating the global villagethe sense that we can see and hear events anywhere in the
world as they happen and so can feel more connected to other places.
The Computers
The earliest computers were machines built to make repetitive numerical
calculations that had previously been done by hand. By the 1890s, calculating
machines were used to tabulate the U.S. Census with a punched-card system invented
by Herman Hollerith. Electromechanical calculators were being built by the 1930s,
especially by a new company called the International Business Machines Company
(IBM). The first truly electronic memory and processors were built by John Vincent
Atanasoff in 1939 at the Iowa State College, and the first fully functioning electronic
computers, a series of ten called Colossus, were built by the British Secret Service
during World War II to help them crack the Germans' secret military codes.
The first general-purpose electronic computer in America, called the Electronic
Numerical Integrator and Computer (ENIAC), was built at the University of
Pennsylvania in 1946. Two of its inventors, American engineers John Presper Eckert,
Jr., and John Mauchly, moved on to build the first electronic computer for commercial
use, the UNIVAC, at the Remington Rand Corporation.
In 1975 the first microcomputer was introduced, which had the power of many
larger machines but could fit onto a desktop. This miniaturization was accomplished by
using new microprocessor technologies, which compressed the memory and processing
power of many hundreds and then thousands of circuits onto tiny chips of materials
called semiconductors. The invention was soon followed by the introduction of the first
word-processing software in 1978, which enabled people to use the computer to write
and change text and graphics.
Today the Internet is the foundation of computer networks in the United States
and allied countries. It is interconnected by both wire and over-the-air microwave and
satellite telephone lines. Commercial online service providers such as America
Online, CompuServe, and the Microsoft Network sell Internet access to individual
computer users and companies. Smaller networks of computers, called Local Area
Networks (LANs), can be installed in a single building or for a whole organization. Wide
Area Networks (WANs) can be used to span a large geographical area. LANs and
WANs use telephone lines, computer cables, and microwave and laser beams to carry
123

www.rkmfiles.net
124
*********************************************************************
digital information around a smaller area, such as a single college campus. In turn, they
can interconnect to the Internet. Computer networks can carry any digital signals,
including video images, sounds, graphics, animations, and text.
Since the 1970s, personal computers have transformed business, education,
and entertainment. The typical home or business computer today has many times the
computing power of a single early mainframe. People can use computers to design
graphics and full-motion video, compose music, send electronic mail, make airline or
hotel reservations, or search the Library of Congress over the World Wide Web. They
can play games and even visit electronic rooms or parties to talk to other people. These
activities are made possible by multimedia computer programs that employ still and
motion pictures, sounds, graphics, and text together.
Computers are used in all aspects of business and education. Self-instructional
computer programs help people learn new information or skills through computer-aided
instruction. Some programs are simulations, which imitate tasks that require the learner
to perform in certain ways, and give the learner feedback about that performance. For
example, airline pilots sharpen their flying skills in computer-generated flight simulators,
which exactly duplicate the experience of flying in different types of aircraft.
Mobile Phone
This is a very recent mode of communication which is already utilized by private
and commercial entities. The Police and the military are also using this as one of the
major alternatives of communication.
Mobile (cellular) phones have become invaluable for people who need to stay in
touch while on the move. Cellular telephone systems combine radio and television
technology with computer systems. As a caller moves from one geographical cell (the
name given to a specific part of the area being covered by the system) to another,
computers in switching offices transfer calls among variously located antenna
transmitters without interrupting service (Microsoft Encarta).
Text Messaging also known as Short Message System (SMS). It is a method of
communication allowing cellular, or mobile, phone users to exchange brief notes, typically up to
160 characters in length. Now, you can send as much as 450 characters.
The huge popularity of text messaging is remarkable considering that the service was
developed by mobile operators in the early 1990s as something of an afterthought and was never
expected to take off.

www.rkmfiles.net
125
*********************************************************************
The main reason for its success is that younger phone users have adopted text
messages as their preferred means of communication. Early concerns over the clumsy means of
entering text and the limited length of messages have been overcome partly by familiarity and
partly by a shorthand language; for instance c u l8r is an abbreviated way of saying See you
later. A major factor in the uptake of text messaging was that it was free when pre-pay phones
were first introduced. Even with messages now charged for, they are still considerably cheaper
than mobile phone calls (Microsoft Encarta).
Many police officers are using this communication technology as an alternative to the
traditional means of communications. The PNP and other law enforcement related agencies are
using hotlines as and easy access to crime reports by the populace.
POLICE COMMUNICATIONS
Police communications are the backbone of police tactics.
communications, the modern police department would be lost.
Without proper
Historical Development of Police Communications

In primitive times, the pounding of hollow logs or the beating of animal skin drums was
used to convey a message. Later man discovered that when he cut the tip from the horn of an
animal and blew through it, the sound carried for quite a distance. We find its use mentioned
throughout the Bible, and it was certainly the main warning instrument used in the Hue and Cry
even into the twelfth century. In the orient, the brass gong and finally the bell became the warning
instrument.
In western civilization, until very recently, the church bell, high in the steeple, not only
called the people to church services but also warned the town or village of imminent dangers. The
American Indian used smoke signals, bird calls and drums in his effort to communicate and send
out warnings.
In the history of Anglo-American police patrol, we find the horn replaced by the hand-bell
and rattle, and then finally by the metal whistle.
When police vehicles were first used, there was no radio communications as we know it
today. The system of notifying patrol vehicles of emergencies and calls for service was handled
by the installation of red lights at the major intersections of the town or city. When headquarters
wanted to contact a police car, they would pull a switch that would send power to the red lights at
the intersections. The next time the patrol car passed the intersection and saw the red light on, he

www.rkmfiles.net
126
*********************************************************************
would drive to headquarters for the assignment. When telephones become more common, the
officer would call headquarters when he observed the light signal.
When radios were first installed in police vehicles, they were just usually receivers and
did not have transmitters for answering calls. The radio operators would broadcast the calls and
hoped that it was received.
The police have always been keenly aware of the importance of communications and
because of this they, along with the military, have been leaders in the development and adoption
of new methods of communications. In the early days of electronic communication the
departments themselves had to develop their own communications equipment because there was
little or no commercial equipment available to suit the police needs. Today the situation is
different. Because of military and space development programs, the police are able to readily
adapt existing commercial equipment to their needs. This has the great advantage of eliminating
the many years of costly and time consuming experiments and failures that the early police
departments had to suffer in their development of police communications.
Significant dates and events in the development of Police Communications
1877- The Albany New York Police Department installed five telephones in the mayors
office connected to precinct stations.
1880 The Chicago Police Department installed the first Police Call Box on City Street.
Only officers and reputable citizens were given keys to the booth. Before this time a signal box
was used that would signal the emergency without voice communications. Detroit made such
installations in 1884 and Indianapolis in 1895.
1883 The Detroit, Michigan Police Department installed one police telephone. This was
significant when one considers the fact that there were only seven telephones in the whole city at
that time. In 1889, the department established a new division to handle communications. It was
called the Police Signal Bureau.
A code wheel was installed in the box so that when the beat man called in for his time
check, it would register at headquarters with the proper signal for that call box. This insured that
the beat officer was in fact at the location from which he claimed to be calling.
1916 The New York Harbor Police installed spark transmitters so they could
communicate with their police boats while they were patrolling the harbor.

www.rkmfiles.net
127
*********************************************************************
1923 The Pennsylvania State Police installed point-to-point radiotelegraph between
their headquarters and various posts throughout the state.
1928 On April 7, 1928, the worlds first workable police radio system went on the air.
The Detroit Police Department went on the air as station W8FS. The transmitter was installed on
Belle Isle in the Detroit River, and the receiver was installed in cruiser No. 5
By 1927 the prohibition era had sent he development of big time crime and gangsters
were making wide use of automobiles as get-away cars. The police were under great pressure
to control the situation, but always arrived at the scene too late. Commissioner Rutledge then
persuaded Robert L. Batts, a young radio technician and student at Purdue University, to come to
Detroit and work on a radio receiver that would operate in a police car. It was through this effort
that the first workable police radio setup was developed.
1929 In September 1929, the Cleveland Police Department went on the air with a few
cars, and in December of the same year, Indianapolis became the third police department in the
world to set up a workable police radio system.
1930 The Michigan State Police became the first state police organization to go on the
air in October of 1930. It proved very effective in apprehending bank robbers and other
gangsters.
1931 The first police motorcycle was equipped with a radio by the Indianapolis Police
Department in September 1931.
1933 In March 1933, the Bayonne New Jersey Police Department went on the air with
the first two-way, mobile police radio system.
1934 By 1934, so many police departments have police radio systems that they were
being as inter-city communications for all types of general police messages. The Federal
Communications Commission had to intervene and establish strict control on police radio
communications, restricting non-emergency messages to wire communications.
1935 Because the police departments did not understand the government restrictions,
they (at first) refused to obey them and police radiomen from all over the country banded together
to form the APCO (Association of Police Communications Officers). (It was later changed to the
Association of Public-Safety Communications Officers).

www.rkmfiles.net
128
*********************************************************************
1939 Daniel E. Noble, of Connecticut State College, developed the first FM mobile twoway transmitters and receivers for the Connecticut State Police. This was to bring about a change
in the whole mobile radio picture. (FM means Frequency Modulation)
1940 Motorola President, Paul Galvin, saw, the value of FM over AM for mobile police
communications, and hired Dan Noble to develop two-way FM for Motorola Police Radio Sales.
One of Nobles first developments was the remarkable Differential Squelch Circuit, which
demonstrated greatly increased range in fringe areas.
1945 The Federal communications Commission allocated frequencies for FM, and it
became the established system for police radio communications.
Today most departments have three-way radios where the patrol car in the field may not
only carry on a two-way conversation with the base radio, but may also carry on the same type of
conversation with other police vehicles in the field.
Recent developments by the military, in the area of field communications, indicate that
law enforcement communications will have much more to look forward to.
PLANNING A POLICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Planning a Police Communication System (PCS) is not that complicated, especially if the
system is for small municipal police station. The planner must of course have technical
knowledge and skill in radio operation and installation. The technical requirement can be
translated into simple laymans language easily understood by the Chief of Police (COP),
members of the peace and order council, and the Mayor.
A good plan is always written. It should determine, by survey, what is existing and what is
needed. Before the recommendations, analysis of the survey should be made. Here the financial
status of the local government should be determined. For the implementation, a responsible
police officer should be appointed with corresponding authority and responsibility.
STEPS in planning a Police Communication System
1. Determine the Basic Need - Is there a need for a. portable two-way radio
b. radio tranceivers in mobile patrol cars
c. radios tranceivers for police officers on foot patrol
d. telephone system
manual telephone exchange

www.rkmfiles.net
129
*********************************************************************
semi-automatic telephone exchange
National Direct Dial (NDD)
International Direct Dial (IDD)
Standard Modern Police Communication System requirements: Modern communication
systems require OPERATION CENTER or BASE and the communication room at the base
contains the following:
radio transceivers with control panels and mikes
telephone trunklines and switchboards
monitor receivers
inter-city radio controls
paging and recall systems
fax machines
alarm and indicator systems
intercoms
closed circuit TV
traffic control panel
computer with Land Area Network (LAN) and modem (for internet access)
2. Conduct a Survey - The survey must be done by a TECHNICAL TEAM
a. Conduct pre-survey conference with the COP and city/municipal officials to
determine the:
funding
type of system desired and
kind of support the system will need

b. The Technical Survey should be conducted to reveal:
location of the precincts
limits/boundaries of areas to be patrolled
obstructions of radio and telephone transmission interferences, frequency drifts and
harmonics
availability of local facilities such as electric power, telephone system, fax, etc.
Questions that must be answered during the technical survey include but not
limited to:
a. Is the radio and/or telephone traffic light or heavy?
b. Are 2-way radios needed?

www.rkmfiles.net
130
*********************************************************************
c. Is duplex needed or simplex is enough?
d. What is the degree of maintenance needed for the equipment?
c. Analysis of the Survey
Compatibility of the equipment and system
Cost of the equipment:
Is there available fund to support the quality of system that is needed?
Is there an alternative if the first option cannot be realized?
3. Draft the PCS and Propose the Plan - The Technical Team prepares an output (summary
report) of their survey and submits this to the local government. The report is actually a
project proposal or feasibility study which includes the recommendations of the technical
team such as:
a. training of operators
b. maintenance program
c. appointment of a Communication Officer
4. Choice and Acceptance - The report of the Surveying Team (Technical Team) is then
transformed into a feasibility study. The feasibility study is submitted to the Reviewing Team,
which is composed of the Local Chief Executive (LCE), the COP and other concerned
authorities in the locality, for evaluation and decision making. After evaluation, the reviewing
team must accept the proposal or choose an alternative from the options recommended by
the surveying team.
5. Implementive Action and Checklist - If the proposal or a corresponding alternative has been
chosen and accepted by the reviewing team, the technical team must then set priorities and
prepare a checklist of tasks to be performed.
6. Appointment of Action Official - In the checklist of priorities, among the first tasks to be
performed is determining the person who will be appointed as the Action Official the
coordinator of the project of installing the planned PCS.
7. Procurement of Equipment - In the procurement of equipment that will be used for the PCS,
bidding must be conducted as a standard operating procedure (SOP). In bidding, the
proposed equipment to be bought and used is advertised. At least 3 dealers or suppliers of
such needed articles respond by furnishing a quotation (itemized price list) and then submits
it to the action official. The action official has the discretion to choose the dealer or supplier
who offers the lowest quotation. Procurement of needed equipment is then awarded to the
dealer chosen by the action official.

www.rkmfiles.net
131
*********************************************************************
8. Training of Technicians, Dispatchers, and other Users - Training of Technicians and Users of
the system to be installed may be done thru formal schooling or thru on-the-job (OJT).
Technicians and Dispatchers should be trained with the standard radio, telephone and other
communication procedures. They must also be updated with the laws, rules and regulations
for public communication.
9. Coordinating Center and Service Shop: An office for the action official and communication
engineers who will supervise the installation of the communication system must be
established. This is important in order to have a formal setting of decision making while the
system is about to be installed or is already in the actual process of installation.
10. Checking, Alignment and Installation of Equipment
POLICE RADIO COMMUNICATION
Radio is the system of communication employing electromagnetic waves propagated
through space. Because of their varying characteristics, radio waves of different lengths are used
for different purposes and are usually identified by their frequency.
1. The shortest waves have the highest frequency, or number of cycles per second;
2. The longest waves have the lowest frequency, or fewest cycles per second.
A. RADIO WAVES
Radio waves range from a few kilohertz to several gigahertz. Waves of visible light are
much shorter. In a vacuum, all electromagnetic waves travel at a uniform speed of about 300,000
km (about 186,000 mi) per second.
Radio Frequency
3-30 kHz
30-300 kHz
300-3,000 kHz
3-30 MHz
Designation
Very low frequency
Abbr.
VLF
Wavelength
100,000-10,000 m
Low frequency
LF
10,000-1,000 m
Medium frequency
MF
1,000-100 m
High frequency (short wave)
HF
100-1 m
30-3000 MHz
Very high frequency
VHF
10 -1 m
300-3,000 MHz
Ultrahigh frequency
UHF
1 m-10 cm
3-30 GHz
Superhigh frequency
SHF
10 -1 cm

www.rkmfiles.net
132
*********************************************************************
30-300 GHz
Extremely high frequency
EHF
1 cm-1 mm
kHz = 1 kilohertz = 1,000 Hz

MHz = 1 megahertz = 1,000 kHz
GHz = 1 gigahertz = 1,000 MHz
A typical radio communication system has two main components, a transmitter and a
receiver. The transmitter generates electrical oscillations at a radio frequency called the carrier
frequency. Either the amplitude or the frequency itself may be modulated to vary the carrier wave.
An amplitude-modulated signal consists of the carrier frequency plus two sidebands resulting
from the modulation. Frequency modulation produces more than one pair of sidebands for each
modulation frequency. These produce the complex variations that emerge as speech or other
sound in radio broadcasting, and in the alterations of light and darkness in television
broadcasting.
B. RADIO TRANSMITTER - Essential components of a radio transmitter include the ff:
1. An oscillation generator for converting commercial electric power into oscillations of a
predetermined radio frequency;
2. Amplifiers for increasing the intensity of these oscillations while retaining the desired
frequency; and
3. A transducer for converting the information to be transmitted into a varying electrical
voltage proportional to each successive instantaneous intensity. For sound transmission,
a microphone is the transducer; for picture transmission the transducer is a photoelectric
device.
Radio Modulators
Other important components of the radio transmitter are the modulator, which uses these
proportionate voltages to control the variations in the oscillation intensity or the instantaneous
frequency of the carrier, and the antenna, which radiates a similarly modulated carrier wave.
Every antenna has some directional properties, that is, it radiates more energy in some directions
than in others, but the antenna can be modified so that the radiation pattern varies from a
comparatively narrow beam to a comparatively even distribution in all directions; the latter type of
radiation is employed in broadcasting.
Modulation of the carrier wave so that it may carry impulses is performed either at low
level or high level. In the former case the audio-frequency signal from the microphone, with little
or no amplification, is used to modulate the output of the oscillator, and the modulated carrier
frequency is then amplified before it is passed to the antenna. In the latter case, the radiofrequency oscillations and the audio-frequency signal are independently amplified, and

www.rkmfiles.net
133
*********************************************************************
modulation takes place immediately before the oscillations are passed to the antenna. The signal
may be impressed on the carrier either by frequency modulation (FM) or amplitude modulation
(AM).
Radio Antennas
The antenna of a transmitter need not be close to the transmitter itself. Commercial
broadcasting at medium frequencies generally requires a very large antenna, which is best
located at an isolated point far from cities, whereas the broadcasting studio is usually in the heart
of the city. FM, television, and other very-high-frequency broadcasts must have very high
antennas if appreciably long range is to be achieved, and it may not be convenient to locate such
a high antenna near the broadcasting studio. In all such cases, the signals may be transmitted by
wires. Ordinary telephone lines are satisfactory for most commercial radio broadcasts; if high
fidelity or very high frequencies are required, coaxial cables are used.
C. RADIO RECEIVER - The essential components of a radio receiver are:
1. An antenna for receiving the electromagnetic waves and converting them into electrical
oscillations;
2. Amplifiers for increasing the intensity of these oscillations;
3. Demodulator or detection equipment for demodulating;
4. A speaker for converting the impulses into sound waves audible by the human ear (and in
television a picture tube for converting the signal into visible light waves); and
5. In most radio receivers, oscillators to generate radio-frequency waves that can be
mixed with the incoming waves.
D. THE CONVENTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS AND COMMAND CENTER

Most police communication centers operate in a two-stage manual process. The following
is the SOP when a call is made to the police department:
1. The officer at a complaint desk position, first determines the need for police action, and
then records the details on a card.
2. The card is then routed to dispatch console where the operator has control of one or
more radio channels.
a. In the smaller organizations, this usually accomplished by handing the card from one
person to another.
b. In larger departments it is customary to use a conveyer belt system between the two
positions.
3. The operator at the dispatch console then establishes radio contact with the patrol unit
and relays the details of the complaint.

www.rkmfiles.net
134
*********************************************************************
4. The dispatcher also has the duty of maintaining a record of the status of the police
vehicles under his control. If information is needed from the records division or from some
computer source, the operator must then phone for this information.
E. THE POLICE RADIO DISPATCHER
The radio dispatcher is the personnel in a police communication center or coordinating
center tasked to receive and transmit radio messages. Before a policeman or civilian can become
a radio dispatcher, he must be trained formally or through an OJT. The dispatcher is also called
radio coordinator and radio operator.
Benefits of employing a trained radio dispatcher:
1. Easy of understanding radio messages
2. Elimination of errors
3. Minimum communication time
4. Development of professional attitude in sending and receiving messages
5. Inter-service cooperation
6. Conservation of equipment
Basic Qualifications of a Radio Dispatcher or Operator
1. Ability to speak clearly and distinctly at all times
2. Ability to reduce rambling and disconnected material into concise and accurate
messages
3. Ability to think and act promptly in emergencies
4. Ability to analyze the situation accurately and to take an effective course of action
5. Thorough understanding of the capacities of the communication system
6. Adequate understanding of the technical operation of his own system to allow intelligent
reporting of equipment failures
7. Physical and mental ability to work effectively under all conditions encountered
8. Knowledge of the rules and regulations applying to dispatchers responsibilities
Voice Qualities of Effective Radio Dispatcher The three characteristics of a persons
voice are:
1. Loudness or volume - depends on the size of the human voice box
2. Pitch or voice frequency the level of the voice which depends on the number of cycles
per second emitted by the speaker (high pitched is not pleasant and clear in talking
through a mike)
3. Timbre - the quality of a speech sound that comes from its tone rather than its pitch or
volume

www.rkmfiles.net
135
*********************************************************************
F. POLICE RADIO (AND TELEPHONE) LANGUAGE
Even though your primary duties are those of an investigator, patrolman, or traffic officer,
you may be called upon to pick up a radio to pass some valuable information to one of the police
units or offices. This section provides you with basic knowledge of correct radio and
telephone procedures so you can operate the voice radio equipment in an ordinary police station.
The following are key terms that help you understand and observe proper radio and telephone
procedures:
1. TRANSMISSION: A communication (formal message) sent by one police unit and
intended for reception by another police unit.
2. ANSWER or FEEDBACK: A transmission made by a station called in response to the call
received.
3. CALL SIGN: A call sign is a word, or a combination of words, intended for
transmission by voice means, and it identifies the command, unit, or authority of
the radio station.
4. NET CALL SIGN: The collective call sign that represents all the radio stations operating
together on a particular radio net (ROTACOM, DELTACOM, etc.).
5. NET CONTROL STATION: A radio station appointed by higher authority to direct and
control the operation and flow of all traffic handled on the radio net.
6. PROWORD: A pronounceable word or phrase that has been assigned a meaning to
speed up message handling on radio nets that use radio and telephone.
7. ABBREVIATED PLAINDRESS MESSAGE: A message that has certain elements of the
message heading omitted for speed of handling. Anyone or all of the following may be
omitted: precedence, date, date-time group, and group count.
8. RECEIPT: A communication sent by the receiving operator indicating that the message
or other transmission has been satisfactorily received.
9. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: A separate message originated by the addressee to inform the
originator that his message has been received and is understood.
G. RADIO PHONETIC ALPHABETS
When necessary to identify a letter of the alphabet, the standard phonetic alphabet
should be used. This helps to prevent the receiving operator from copying your words or groups
of words incorrectly. Bs, Ps, Ts, and other letters that sound alike can be confusing when heard
on radio telephone nets.

www.rkmfiles.net
*********************************************************************
LETTER
PHONETIC
EQUIVALENT
PRONOUNCED AS
ALPHA
AL fah
BRAVO
BRAH voh
CHAR lee or SHAR lee
CHARLIE
DELTA
ECHO
ECK oh
FOXTROT
FOKS trot
GOLF
GOLF
HOTEL
hoh TELL
INDIA
IN dee ah
JULIET
JEW lee et
KILO
KEY loh
LIMA
LEE mah
MIKE
MIKE
NOVEMBER
no VEM ber
OSCAR
OSS cah
PAPA
pah PAH
QUEBEC
keh BECK
ROMEO
ROW me oh
SIERRA
see AIR rah
TANGO
TANG go
UNIFORM
YOU nee form
VICTOR
VIK tah
WHISKEY
WISS key
XRAY
ECKS ray
YANKEE
YANG key
ZULU
ZOO loo
DELL tah
136

www.rkmfiles.net
137
*********************************************************************
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND COMMUNICATION

NATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION COMMISSION
TEN CODES
(Some are given the corresponding Q Codes)
10-0 Caution/Safe
tracking
10.1
Hard copy
10.2
Clear copy
10.3
Slow down
10.4
Roger/Positive/QS
L
10.5
Relay message
10.6
Busy/QRL
10.7
Stop
transmitting/QRT
10.8
Monitor/QRX
10.9
Repeat/One more
time
10.10 Over and out
10.11 Inquire
10.12 Stand by
10.13 Road & weather
condition
10.14 To pick up
10.15 Answer/Reply
10.16 Problem
10.17 Request/Please/Ki
ndly
10.18 Record/Log
10.19 Come back/Go
back
10.20 Location/QTH
10.21 Call by telephone
10.22 Disregard/Cancel
10.23 Arrived at scene
10.24
10.25
10.26
10.27
10.28
10.29
10.30
10.31
10.32
10.33
10.34
10.35
10.36
10.37
10.38
10.39
10.40
10.41
10.42
Follow-up/Make a
report
Meeting/Eyeball
Subject/Victim/Cas
ualty
Change
frequency/Drivers
license
Plate no. of
vehicle
Verify/Observe/Ch
eck record
Water supply/H2o
Approval/Result
Armed/Man with
gun
Emergency/Urgent
Crime in
progress/Riot
Red alert
Correct time/QRT
Eat
food./Reload/Fill fuel
Local
police/Military
Hurry up/Use lightsiren
Roving/Silent
monitoring/QRU
Operatives/Memb
ers
Disengage/Cancel
10.43
10.44
10.45
10.46
10.47
10.48
10.49
10.50
10.51
10.52
10.53
10.54
10.55
10.56
10.57
10.58
10.59
10.60
10.61
10.62
10.63
Information
Regards
Vehicle/Mobile
Assist motorist
Crew needed
Excavation/Road
repairs
Traffic situation
State complete
details
Wrecker needed
Ambulance
needed
Heavy traffic/Road
block
Investigation/Tor
needed
Electric power
Intoxicated
person/ Alcoholic
behavior
Hit and run
To direct road
traffic
Convoy/Companio
n
Hospital
Doctors/Medical
team
Medicines
Assignment
completed

www.rkmfiles.net
138
*********************************************************************
10.64
10.65
10.66
Message
Assignment/tasks
Necessary/Neede
d
10.67
10.68
10.69
Male/YM
Deliver/Dispatch
Received
message
10.70 Fire alarm
10.71 Nature of fire
10.72 Demo/Rally
10.73 Fire trucks
10.74 Negative
10.75 Permission
10.76 Proceed to
10.77 Time of arrival
10.78 Assistance
needed
10.79 Dead person
10.80 Kidnapping case
10.81 Carnapping case
10.82 Reservation
prepare
10.83 Vehicle found
10.84 Estimated time of
departure
10.85 Will be late
10.86 Missing person
10.87 Female/YL
10.88 Limaline No.
10.89 Person found
10.90 Robbery/Theft
10.91 Unnecessary use of
radio
10.92 Anti-narcotics
case
10.93 Address
10.94 Drug racing
10.95 Operation
10.96
Visitor/Jammer/Q
RM
10.97 Radio check/QSA
10.98 Call sign/QRA
10.99 Home/House
10.100 Office
10.101 Statement of
account
10.102 Treasurer/Collecti
on
10.103 Money
10.104 Change
frequency/QSY
10.105 Reactivated/Mech
anic
10.106 Modulation
10.107 Antenna
10.108 Radio license
10.109 Uniform/Attire
10.110 Equipment
10.111 Radio (portable)
10.112 Base Radio
10.113 Booster
10.114 Power supply
10.115 Battery pack
10.116 Repeater/Phone
patch
10.117 Computer
10.118 Rotator
10.119 Coax cable
10.120 Gun shot/Stab
wound
10.121 Heart attack
10.122 CVA (stroke)
10.123 Fracture
10.124 OB Emergency
10.125 Hypertension
10.126 IN patient
10.127 OUT Patient
10.128 Operator
10.129 Son/Daughter
10.130 Secretary
10.131 Extension
10.132 Driver
10.133 Wife/XYL
10.134 National officer
10.135 Regional officer/
Group
10.136 NTC
10.137 NBI Clearance
10.138 Police clearance
10.139 Necessary
papers
10.140 I.D.
10.141 Organization
base
10.142 Thank you/TNX
10.143 I Love You/QLY
10.144 Welcome
139
H. WALKIE-TALKIES
The slang term for the two-way radio systems developed by Motorola in the 1930s
designed for home and police radios. Today, it is known as two-way hand held radio (HHR) or
radio transceiver.
Features and advantages of walkie-talkies:
1. Portable and easy to operate;
2. The foot patrolman can both send and receive messages quite easily; and
3. Enables patrol officers to call for immediate assistance.
I. TECHNIQUES IN RADIO COMMUNICATION
Though radio communication is not complex, there are still problems that usually
encountered by police operatives. One problem is the massive use of the airwave by both police
and civilian communication groups. To reduce or eliminate these problems, basically, police
operatives should be familiar with proper use of the equipment, and to adhere to the basic rules
of radio procedure.
One of the best ways to insure the proper use of air time is to follow the ABCs of radio
transmission stated by Payton.
THE ABCS OF RADIO TRANSMISSION
A. Accuracy It is the correctness and truthfulness of what is being communicated.
Inaccuracy oftentimes causes miscommunication. The major cause of inaccuracy is
haste and impatience. The old saying that haste makes waste certainly applies to police
communications.
B. Brevity This means using few words. Due to the expanding volume of radio traffic, it is
essential that there be no unnecessary or repetitious words in the transmission.
C. Courtesy Courtesy refers to politeness of the words being used in communication. As
the old adage points out, Courtesy begets courtesy. Anger begets anger. The practice
of courtesy is actually a practice of good human relations. In radio communication,
courtesy can be shown:
1. by saying thank you (but this may take very valuable air time);
2. in the tone of voice;
3. by avoiding humorous comments over the air when somebody goofs up or commits
error in transmitting or understanding the message; and
4. by avoiding jamming up when police officers are on the air.
Clarity, the Second C
C in radio communications also stands for Clarity which is often mentioned in report
writing and note taking but it is also an essential in police communications.
Clarity can be best obtained through two main areas:
1. Semantics - What is semantics? Webster lists it as: significant meaning, the science of
meanings as contrasted with phonetics, the science of sound.
Proper semantics would be the transference of thoughts or ideas between people
through communication without a loss or perversion of the original meaning or intent.
a. Two ways to improve semantics. Learn through experience what the most
common errors are. If an officer tries to communicate with someone and finds that he
is misunderstood or has trouble getting the idea over to him, he can give the problem
some thought with the intent of finding a better way of expressing it next time. He can
talk to others and find out how they would express this thought, or just listen to others
when they try to communicate in the same or similar situations.
b. Think before Talking. An officer should always put his mind in gear before releasing
the clutch on his tongue. Too many officers grab for the mike, press the transmitter
button then think of what they want to say. This is quite easy to do when the situation
involves an urgent matter. The important thing to remember is that the message be
received and UNDERSTOOD, or the time made precious by the emergency would be
wasted.
140
2. Phonetics - Phonetics is the science of sounds - the understanding of a communication

through the proper sounding of words. There are three main areas of phonetics that
hinder good police communications.
a. Radio interference and distortion. This can be corrected to some extent by the
proper adjusting of the Squelch control. Changing position and having the message
relayed by other units can also help.
b. Poor Pronunciation. An officer should not transmit over the air if he has gum in his
mouth or is eating his lunch. If it is an emergency, he should spit them out for the
sake of clarity. He should face the mike at all times, and talk about two inches from
the mike. If he is speeding with the siren going, he may cut out the noise by placing
the mike on the side of his throat and then transmitting his message.
c. Similar sounding words and letters. There are many words in the English
language that have similar sound. There are also many letters that sound the same:
e.g.
BCDEGPTVZ
AJK
IY
MN
QU
141
POLICE COMMUNITY RELATIONS

Terms to Ponder in this Study
Police - a civil organization whose members are given special legal powers by the
government and whose task is to maintain public order and to solve and prevent crimes; or group
of persons established, maintained and organized for keeping order, safety, protection of lives
and properties and for prevention and detection of crimes.
Community - the public or society in general; it refers to the civilian populace in cities,
municipalities or public in general, and shall be used interchangeably with public, citizenry,
society, or private sector.
Police Ideal it refers to the expected standard of perfection or excellence in the
personal, and professional conduct of every member of the police; or the expected essence of
perfection, sympathetic, courteous intelligent, honest, and in control of his emotions and temper,
at all times. It also includes courage and highest sense of dedication to duty.
Personal Media it is the means of communication used by the police as it deals with
the community such as the use of rallies, meetings, speeches and house to house visits to the
community.
Barangay - is the basic political unit of the Filipino nation that implements the policies of
the national and local governments (1987 Phil. Constitution); sometimes referred to as the local
community.
Propaganda any information or publicity put out by an organization (i.e., police) or
government to spread and promote a policy, idea, doctrine, or cause.
Police Community Relation - the sum total of dealings between the police and the
people it serve and whose goodwill and cooperation it craves for the greatest possible efficiency
in the service.
What is Community Relation?
In the police, community relations may mean the total dealings of the police organization
as it immerses itself to the community it serves. On the other hand, Agas in his handbook, Notes
on Police Community Relation, stated that community relation is like a three-legged stool, each
leg of an equal importance in holding the stool upright. One leg is public relations in its traditional
sense. Another leg is community service. The third leg is community participation, and this is the
facet of the total community relations job that is being emphasized today in police and community
relations program.
The Bases of Police Community Relation
In the democratic concept of policing the police is the people and the people is the
police, which means that every police officer is mandated to protect lives and properties, preserve
peace and order and prevent crimes and other civil disturbances. However, his performance of
duty is governed by the Constitution and other laws and statutes such as the preservation of the
basic human rights and observance of the due process of law.
In addition, every police officer is a public servant and his office is a public trust.
Therefore, the police officer is obliged to conduct himself in the community according to the
standards of conducts and ethics of his organization, the police organization. Furthermore, he
should bear in mind that his authority to enforce the law comes from the peoples mandate.
What are the Principles of Community Relation? The principles of community relation are the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Community Support must be maintained

Community Resentment must be avoided
Community Goodwill must be developed
Community must be kept informed
What are the Objectives of Police Community Relation? From the viewpoint of the police,
Police Community Relation aims to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Maintain and develop the goodwill and confidence of the community for the police.
Obtain cooperation and assistance.
Develop public understanding, and support and appreciation for the service of the police.
Create broader understanding and sympathy with the problems and needs of the public.
Facilitate law enforcement and compliance.
Build public opinion in favor of the Police.
142
7. Achieve the Police purpose or preserving the peace, protection of life and property, and
the prevention of crime.
Police Relations - Reviving the idea of The peoples police
In the performance of duty, oftentimes a police officer is confronted by complex problems
brought about by the varied cultures and practices of the people in the community. Since a police
officer is dealing with humans, he should have interest in human life. Hence, he is obliged to
build up positive relations or rapport towards the people he serves.
What are the Types of Police Community Relations? The basic elements of police community
relation include the following:
1. Public Information Program This is designed to bridge any communication gap
between the police and public. This is the basic among the first four programs of
community relation.
2. Public Relation Program This is designed to maintain harmony and mutual support
between the police and the community.
3. Civic Action Program - This is designed to maintain and encourage community
development
4. Psychological Program - This is designed to condition both friendly and hostile public
thereby insuring and facilitating the attainment of police objectives. This program is
designed to influence the opinions, emotions attitude and behavior of the community so
that they will behave in a manner beneficial to the police, either directly or indirectly.
STRUCTURE COMPONENTS OF POLICE COMMUNITY RELATION (PCR)

What is Police Information and Education?
These are communication activities utilizing the various forms of media. These geared
towards creating consciousness and awareness among target audience on facts and issues vital
to the development of an efficient, respected, and supported police force. The two major
components are:
1. Community Information - these are activities utilizing the various forms of media
directed towards the public at large. These are designed to increase the publics
consciousness and knowledge of facts and issues for purpose of enhancing law
enforcement, counter insurgency and crime prevention efforts, increasing crime solution
efficiency to include weakening of the will of the criminal elements and insurgents and
enlightening other groups of individual critical to the government in general and the police
organization in particular.
2. Institutional Information - These are activities utilizing the various forms of Media
directed towards the public at large designed to generate trust, confidence and popular
support for the police organization or simply enhancing public perception and knowledge
about the police as an institution of the government.
What does it mean by Police Community Affairs?
These are activities outside law enforcement but which necessitates PNP support and or
participation. The end result ultimately contributes to better appreciation and an enhanced
support to the police organization in whole in part by the populace. The three major subcomponents are:
1. Community Assistance and Development these are under taken upon the initiative
of the police unit or personnel for the purpose of enhancing life as a means of drawing
the support, appreciation and support of the public to wards the police organization.
Examples are:
a. Skills, Livelihood, and Cooperative Development.
b. Sports and Socio-Cultural development.
c. Medical, and Dental Outreach Services.
d. Tree Planting.
2. Community Inter-Relations - these are under taken upon the initiative of other
government agencies, non governmental organization, and or individual citizens
whereby a police organization or personnel actively contributes time, money and or
143
service as a means of drawing the support, appreciation, and cooperation of the public
towards the police organization in whole in or part.
3. Community Organization and Mobilization - these are activities revolving around the
accreditation of existing groups or creation of new ones with the end in view of having
allies within various sectors in the community who could be tapped to assist in the
conduct of law services, community works and the like.
Comprehensive PCR Plans
The two major components of the plan are Internal Reform and Gaining of
Institutional Support. Both aims to improve the image of the PNP and re-assure the general
public that they can depend on the police organization to be their protector and guardian in order
to hasten and facilitate community mobilization for anti-crime efforts.
The following institutions shall be the priority target in internal reform:
1. Congress - Being the law making body, it is one of the vital governmental institutions that
can support the police organization. The police organization must muster enough support
from Congress so that laws needed to enhance its capabilities to safeguard peace and
order of the community and ensure public safety as well as laws on organizational
development and modernization maybe enacted.
2. Liaison Office
a. Organization Level Liaison: The Directorate for PCR. shall maintain a liaison office
with Congress whose main task is monitor, get the pulse, actively interact and
possibly influence lawmakers on matters affecting the police office. Since relationship
with this institution must be symbiotic then this office shall also be responsible in
giving general, special, technical assistance to Congress as pertains to the police
office.
b. Top Hierarchy Level Liaison: Top leadership of the command shall conduct regular
FACE to FACE dialogues with key members of the Congress as well as different
Congressional Committees handling police affairs in order to present for their
appreciation and support on matters affecting the police office.
c. Special Individual Liaison: Monitoring and Assessment of activities and special
activities of general liaison.
3. The Media - This is unquestionably most powerful instrument in forming public opinion.
Specific activities to be taken with respect to this institution include:
a. Development of guidelines on MediaPolice relationship. This guideline shall form
the basis of the organization as well as of its individual personnel dealing with the
media.
b. Providing timely and accurate information through press releases, regular
conference, daily bulletins, and attendance to talk show and similar programs.
c. Giving the media reasonable accessibility to source of information in accordance with
the existing security regulations.
d. Improvement of rapport with media through non- law enforcement activities such as
sports, outing parties and the like.
e. Giving of special awards by the police office to deserving media personalities.
4. The Church - The opinion of church leaders carries much weight among the religious. It
need not underscore that a pastoral letter read through out the country carries great
impact.
a. Liaison with important church personalities.
b. Monitoring and assessment
c. Special activities
5. The Students and the School one of the potent allies of the PNP when properly
exploited through:
a. Effective liaison with key school authorities
b. Monitoring and assessment
c. Involvement and support in different school activities such drug education program,
crime prevention program, immunization and vaccination program, organization of
Junior Police, and medical or dental outreach program in coordination with
Commission on Higher Education (CHED), Department of Education (DEPED, and
Department of Health (DOH).
144
6. The Non-Government Organizations These are socio-civic organizations involved in

the uplifting the welfare of the public through varied programs and activities that support
the endeavors of the government. They could also help in the building of the image of
the police.
a. Identification/assessment of existing NGO.
b. Liaison with the NGO.
c. Mobilization of NGO in support of police programs and projects.
What are the Public Information and Propaganda Operations?
1. On Internal Security - There shall be intensified information on evils of the ideology and
actual terrorist operations through regular issuance of press releases.
2. On Crime Prevention and law Enforcement - There shall be sustained information
drive on how the public can reach public assistance and the utilization of the tri-media on
modus operandi safety and the like.
3. On Public Safety these are:
a. Intensified information drive on pre disaster preparedness;
b. Support information drive on how to get government assistance when affected by
calamity or disaster; and
c. Intensified information campaign to generate awareness and sympathy for the victims
of calamities and disasters with the aim of gaining relief and other support to them.
PUBLIC RELATION
This is a program designed to make the public aware of what the agency is doing, why is
it doing, and how it contributes to the welfare of the community.
What are the Types of Public Relation?
1. Public Awareness Programs - familiarizing the public with the true nature of police
operations. This includes:
a. Mobile Vans - Variety of displays and exhibits of police equipment, which help to
explain to the public, what the police do and how they do it.
b. Displays and Exhibits - Set up in department stores, shopping centers, and other
public locations are popular ways in which the police can bring their messages to the
public.
c. Informative Materials - Distribution of pamphlets or brochures designed to explain
their services to the public.
d. Open House - Public tours of facility conducted during certain times of the year such
as police week, or law observance week.
e. Public Speakers - Providing speakers for various types of public gatherings such as
civic clubs, businessmen, associations and social groups.
f. Ride Along - Permits number of the community, to ride in a police car with an officer
and observed field operations.
2. Informational Programs - providing the public with information which is directly related
to the interest and needs of the community. This includes:
a.
New Arrivals - Making some members of the community feel at home in their new
surroundings.
b.
Traffic Advisory Reports - Coordinate with the media in announcing important
traffic matters such as road accidents, highway construction and traffic congestion.
c.
Informational Bureaus - Information about such things as renewal of drivers
license, payments of utility bills, availability of legal services and other items.
d.
Informational Brochures - Provide the public with booklets, pamphlets, and other
types of publications, which contain information of community interest.
3. Image Building Programs - promoting programs which are designated to create a more
favorable public image of the police. This can be achieved through:
a. Citizens awards
b. Police Color Guard
c. Police Citizens Luncheons
d. Operational Handshake
e. Recruit Visitation Programs
145
f. Community Events
g. Gifts Packages
What are the duties of the Public Relations Officer?
1. To evaluate public opinion and attitudes with respect to the policies, methods, and
personnel of the police station.
2. To advice the police station commander with regard to the public relations aspects of new
or revised department programs, policies, procedures and activities.
3. To plan and to carry out programs aimed at keeping the public informed on police
activities
4. To provide staff supervision of all police activities that may influence public support.
Foundation of Public Relations - They are basically founded on the GOLDEN RULE: Do not
do onto others what you do not want others unto you. In addition, public relations are founded
on the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Give before you seek to get

Give what is due to others.
See the other persons side
Respect, so you would be respected.
INDIVIDUAL PUBLIC RELATIONS

As individuals, police officers shall also develop personal relationship with the public
which is divided into the following categories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Domestic Relations - This consist of a persons dealing with his family, parents
and immediate relatives, with whom he has to have good relationship in order to develop
a respectable family prestige as well as cordial community relations.
Neighborhood Relations - This consist of a persons dealing with neighbor who
constitute a vital link to good reputation in the community
Community Relations - This is made up of a persons dealing with the citizens
of the community, city or town where a person likes. These also include his membership
or contributions to civil undertakings and his membership or contribution to the civic
organization or community associations in the locality.
Church Relation - This consists of a persons dealing with religious affiliation
that is necessary for the stability of moral principles.
Government Relations - This is made up of the dealings, which a person has
with the government and its various instrumentalities. The recognition of government
authorities, its laws and ordinance, as well as other public responsibilities, are significant
phases of an individuals public relations.
PROFESSIONAL PUBLIC RELATION

In the practice of his profession, a police officer shall observe a professional conduct
which is divided into the following categories:
1. Inter-Departmental Relation - This is made up of the peace officers relations with the
officers and men of his own department, his supervisor, the station commander, as well
as the city/municipal mayor where he is assigned.
2. Citizens Relation - This includes all dealings or contact with the citizens in relations to
the enforcement of the law and the maintenance of peace and order, together with the
giving of information to the public on criminal and non-criminal activities.
3. Complainant Relations - This includes how officer deals with complainants, the
techniques of interview he uses, the manner of approach he adopts, and the treatment of
witnesses and informers.
4. Relations with Accused Persons This covers the proper treatment of suspects,
the recognition of their constitutional rights during custodial investigation and the handling
of accused persons during confinement.
5. Relations with Prosecutor - This includes a police officers duty to cooperate during
preliminary investigations and the gathering of further pieces of evidence once the fiscal
files the case.
6. Judicial Relations This consists of the peace officers duties toward the courts
when appearing as a witness and the honesty of his testimony.
146
GENERAL RULES ON OFFICIAL CONDUCT All police officers shall adhere to the following in
the performance of their duties:
1. Policeman shall be habitually courteous. They shall recognize their responsibilities as
public servants and shall be particularly attentive to citizens who seek assistance or
information or who desire to register complaints or give evidence.
2. They shall accept their responsibility to the public by being punctual in their engagements
and expeditions in the performance of their duties.
3. They shall regard their office as a public trust, and in the discharge of their duties, be
constantly mindful of their primary obligation to serve the public efficiently and effectively.
4. They shall administer the law in a just, impartial and reasonable manner; and not accord
to some, more reasonable manner; and shall not accord to some, more treatment than to
others. They shall recognize the limitations of their authority and at no time use the power
of their office for their own personal advantage.
5. They shall be true to their obligation as custodian of public property and shall bear in mind
that the misuse and waste of money from the public treasury is bad.
6. They shall not limit their effectiveness in the administration of their office by accepting
tokens of gratitude, or by giving preferential treatment to certain corporations with whom
they may have official dealings.
7. They shall cooperate fully with all other public officials to the end that the safety and
general welfare of the public will be assured. They shall not permit jealousies or personal
differences to influence their cooperation with other agencies.
8. They shall add to their effectiveness by diligent study and sincere attention to
improvement. They shall welcome the opportunity to disseminate practical and useful
information relating to matters of the publics safety and welfare.
9. They shall so conduct their public and private life that the public will regard them as
examples of stability, fidelity and morality.
10. They shall bear faithful allegiance to their government, and be loyal to their profession.
They shall accept, as a sacred obligation their responsibility as citizens to support the
Constitution of the Philippines; and as public officials, consider the privilege of defending
the principles of Liberty as defined in our Constitution and law. This is the greatest honor
that may be bestowed upon any man.
COMMUNITIES IN COMMUNITY RELATIONS
In PCR, the police is not actually dealing with a single community but rather to various
communities with distinct characteristics. These communities could be categorized into External
and Internal Communities.
The External Communities
1. Justice Community - Other police agencies, courts, and correctional departments
existing at many levels of government are a part of the justice community with which
police must interact. The nature of the relationship between police and members of the
justice community has a direct impact on police effectiveness in achieving their goals.
2. The Human Services Community - The human services umbrella includes many public
and private and social service resources, mental and health general services, media civic
and religious groups and educational services.
3. Citizens and the Police - Peels principles state the police must secure the willing
cooperation of the public in voluntary observance of the law to be able to secure and
maintain public respect. Part of the police community relations is the understanding of
the public the police serve and having the public understands the police. That is no easy
task. The public is many people with many varying needs and hopes, who live in a
changing society and bring to that society conflicting values and cultural rules. The police
agency is relatively closed, somewhat secretive, and vague as to what the police role and
the citizen role should be.
Internal Communities
1. Personal Support Community - The officers support groups, both in the sense of family
system and close personal relationships, affect the officers perspective and
effectiveness. The officer has an impact on the support group as well. This relationship
may be one of the most critical in determining the officers ability to cope with the human
experience of being a cop. It may also determine to a large degree how the individual
officer will relate with other communities
147
2. Police Community - The police officer as a member of the police structure must also
be considered. It is this community that can determine whether police community
relations outside the agency will be supported or undermined both as a matter of policy
and practice. The first positive relationship that must be formed effective community
relations in a larger sense is to be accomplished within the agency itself.
MAINTAINING TRUST AND PUBLIC CONFIDENCE
The police should be people oriented to recognize the divergence of people and yet
capable to working together with them of a common good. Being good is not enough. A police
officer must show it by the way he performs his job and by the state of discipline of every officer
and men in the police station or similar unit.
Police Character
The police program of growth includes the development of the essential attribution of all
its members. Every police thus:
Shall be loyal to the service, which he belong and is proud of.

Shall be sympathetic and display the ability to feel the suffering of other people.
Shall be confident in his ability to know the job and do it well.
Shall disposed of and act on all cases correctly.
Shall guard himself against rash judgment from opinion in advance.
Shall be courteous to the community at any place and on any occasion.
Shall demonstrate strong faith in what he is doing.
Shall not sulk in the face of danger but with his mental conviction and physical strength.
Shall maintain an attitude of enthusiasm, dedication, zeal and pride in his work.
Shall be tactful in his dealing with people of the community.
Shall be firm and unyielding but not officious in dealing with people.
Shall be serious and purposeful but not officious in dealing with people.
Shall genuinely be interested to his task.
Shall avoid unwarranted practice or situation that will endanger him.
Shall be patient when the situation demands.
Police Moral and Esprit de Corps

The police build their reputation upon favorable community relationship and express by
community confidence and the continued constructive accomplishment is only possible when the
internal strength of the organization is assure.
When the members of the police organization show pride of belongingness to their
organization (or esprit de corps) consequently, their morale is high. It follows also that they
manifest genuine loyalty and noble faith in the policies and objective of their organization.
Exemplary Conduct
Exemplary conduct or conduct worthy of emulation is another way of maintaining public
trust especially so that the community demands more than the ordinary acts. A police as a public
officer loses his private life because whether he is on or off duty, he will be under unrelenting
scrutiny and critical analysis by the community.
Police Officers Compassion and Understanding
In the performance of his duty, a police officer looks no requirements. He should fairly
serve regardless of the personality of the person whom he deals with. Further, even the
seriousness of the problem should not be a factor whether to serve or not to serve. Sometimes, a
person with personal problems approaches police officers. And in dealing with personal
problems, it is imperative that matters of such of vital personal importance be approached with
understanding, compassion and magnanimity
Police Influence over the Community
The community looks upon policeman as representative of the authority of law. It is
obvious therefore, that influence of the policeman over the community is increased by reason of
the authority they personify.
148
Police Practice of Courtesy

Practicing courtesy involves much more than friendliness. To appreciate sincerity and
habitually performed acts of courtesy requires cultivation of appearance, voice, manner,
intelligence humor, temperament and unselfishness that are easily appreciated by the people. All
of these factors co-mingle in the production of a gentleman in principle and in conduct.
Compassionate but firm and earnestly interested without being over solicitous.
Proper Treatment of Law Violator
Numerous contacts with anti-social persons are likely to cause the policeman to assume
an attitude of veneer hardness. They often entertain erroneous belief that courteous treatment of
law violators is an indication of weakness, cringing or servilely.
Police Leadership
True leadership is personal and it is a psychological balance showing a well-integrated
personality. There are no characteristics that combine in the personality of a true leader, because
individuals differ in their viewpoints and reaction. However, the qualities that seem most common
on persons who command public respect and confidence are those that rate highly in influencing
positive character of his men. It goes with these qualities the maxim, true leadership is
influencing others to perform well.
Police Practice of Self Confidence
Self-confidence is faith to oneself, and it is predicated upon knowledge, still in applying
knowledge, and in the ability and willingness to pass ones knowledge for the benefits of the
others. Self-confidence is in fact a state of mental satisfaction that arises from being able to put
the possession of knowledge to constructive use.
Police Practice of Self Sacrifice
Self-sacrifice is a fundamental trait to true leadership. It is inescapable fact that to
contemplate a situation without bias requires first a complete subordination of self. Effective
police work requires the utmost self sacrifice; policemen who are selfishly impressed with their
authority cannot succeed as leader.
Paternalism
Paternalism as a quality is found in policeman who is mindful of the welfare of other. It is
basic to police leadership because community welfare is the primordial responsibility of the
police. Harmonious relationship between the police and the community depends, to a great
degree, upon paternalistic influence that enters in the shaping of community policies.
Fairness and Honesty
Fairness and honesty are qualities that have universal appeals. Preponderance of
community criticism against police authority is occasioned by reason or partiality and unfairness
in exercising police function. Impartial application of laws and regulations, fairness and honesty in
exercising the police authority are powerful force in insuring community respect for Police service.
Decisiveness
Initiative and decisiveness are characteristics traits of man who acts correctly and at the
proper time. The ability to act decisively and correctly is a manifestation or thorough preparation
and interest in the appreciation of the task at hand. The policemans knowledge, mental alertness
and judgment all enter in the development of this very desirable trait.
Personal Dignity
Personal dignity is indicative of a policemans appreciation of the honor of his position. It
is an excellent manifestation of his esprit de corps and is a powerful factor in creating
community respect.
149
Physical and Moral Courage

The community assumes that policemen are physically courage, yet true courage is not
thoroughly understood by most citizens. It is a common misapprehension to consider reckless
disregard of danger as a manifestation or courage and bravery.
Moral Ascendancy
Moral ascendancy is the influence that one-person exercise over a group of persons by
reason of exemplary nature of his character. It arises out of withstanding the hardship and
difficulty of the work, sincerity of purpose that manifest in willingness to personally adhere without
equivocation, and to the same standards of conduct that he is duty bound to enforce upon other.
Dependability and Punctuality
The public has the right to demand the same guarantees in the manner of its safety as all
exacts for the protection of public health. The public is concerned with emergency situations that
require immediate attention and effective treatment. Police service if it is to be of any value must
be dependable.
POLICE APPEARANCE AND THE COMMUNITY
Police Personal Appearance
A police officers personal appearance speaks well of his department. To ensure positive
opinion to his department or organization, he should observe the following:
He shall be properly attired and equipped whenever he appears before the

public.
He carries with him only the prescribed regulation weapons and other related
items.
He shall dress moderately and of good taste if and when they must wear civilian
clothes.
He must maintain good posture and grooming.
He must see to it that his uniform is clean and properly maintained.

Police Satisfactory Uniform
A satisfactory uniform, comfortable for the officer and pleasant to the eye is important.
Attractive snappy uniforms influence the moral of the policeman as well as the Esprit de Corps
of the entire police force.
Police Personal Cleanliness
Personal cleanliness is very important in dealing with the community.
policeman should:
Be required to shave daily and to have their hair cut regularly.
Have frequent bath.
Have clean fingernails and other parts of the body.
Hence, a
Periodic Inspection
These factors of personal appearance and their effect on the community justify among
others, the periodic inspections of the force. Attention should be given in such inspections not
only to hearing, address and equipment, but also on the aspect of personal cleanliness just
mentioned.
Policemen Mental Attitude
The attitude of police officer is quite important as his physical condition and appearance
because it determines his conduct and reaction to the community. His attitude is reflected in his
facial expression, voice, word used and actions. Therefore:
He must be friendly and show willingness to serve.
He must not forget that he is a Public servant, appointed for the role purpose of
serving the community.
150
He must not give an impression of haughtiness, aloofness, officiousness or

condescension.
He must refrain from sarcasm and flippancy.
He must develop pride in his organization
Policemen Habits and Conversation

Police officer must avoid subjects of smutty or questionable nature.
Police officer must establish habits of conversation, which are pleasing to the listener
and avoid giving offence by the subject matter or the method of presentation.
He must watch his diction and his English; he should test the falls of sloppy habits of
speech. The attitude of Police officer is quite important as his physical.
Should keep his hands out of his pockets, whether engaged in conversation or
otherwise.
Although these items may seem of little consequence, and perhaps in more fundamental
analysis may be relatively unimportant but most policemen are judged by their language and
conversation.
Policemen Personal Habits
The personal habits of the individual police officer strongly influence the attitude of the
community towards the police. Thus:
He should avoid restless habits such as tapping his finger or feet, whittling or other
evidence of nervousness.
He should not permit himself to develop such unpleasant personal habits such as,
hawking and spitting, smoking while on duty in public place.
He should not smoke when speaking to a citizen. Smoking habits that are offensive
to the public should not be permitted whether on the street or headquarters.
POLICE HEADQUARTERS AND THE COMMUNITY
It was mentioned that the appearances of a police station/headquarters influence the
attitude of both the police and the community. This can be further attained by the observance of
the following guidelines.
Appearance of Police Station
The station/headquarter must have a business like appearance, unsightly trash
eliminated; thus, the police station/ headquarter must have the following appearance:
Must have presentable view inside or outside.
Must possess a well keep office that is worthy of the discipline of its force, honor ideal
of Law enforcers.
Must be strict in anti-littering /smoking campaign in the building or grounds and police
equipment shall be maintained properly.
Trashcan shall be available and comfort room shall be clean and free from foul odors.
Must be identifiable and the desk shall bear the name of the policemen for public
convenience and information.
Policemen at Station/Headquarters
The police station/headquarter should not only maintain a high standard of efficiency, but
it should give an appearance of efficiency. This is created by a business like attitude and conduct
on the part of the policemen. Thus, the policemen must avoid the following attitude:
Policeman should not roughhouse among themselves in public view.
They should restrict their activities to the assembly room or those sections of the
station reserved for their rest of reaction. Otherwise the public may conclude that
they are lofting while on duty.
He shall not in the station/office or elsewhere while on duty, drink any intoxicating
liquor or take prohibited drugs or report to duty under the Influence of liquor or
prohibited drugs; or habitual drunkard to the prejudice of his duty.
Police should not indulge in loud, boisterous talk that can be heard by the public.
They should avoid an appearance of idleness and create an impression of business
like efficiency.
Police Telephone and the Citizen
151
Telephone to the police station/office is very important since a persons life, property and
liberty may be at state because the telephone operator is the first contact with the police
department, it is important that the conversation is pleasant and satisfactory as possible.
Police Telephone Greeting

It is important too, that the police operator gives attention to his manner of speaking over
the telephone. His greeting should be crisp and business like, to manifest alertness and
willingness to serve, rather than show indifference.
Immediate and Courteous Reply
Incoming telephone calls to a police headquarters/station deserve immediate and
courteous reply. Promptness is important in the police service.
Clear Enunciation/Diction
A policeman should meet the following criteria for efficient telephone conversation:
Policeman should speak with deliberate care and clearances into the transmitted.
Policeman should have a good diction and expression of courtesy.
Attitude in Receiving Calls
The complainants shall be given a feeling of importance regardless of the triviality of
the complaint. Acts of kindness like giving the complaint a seat would be long
remembered and appreciated though it may seem unimportant.
The police interview should be quick to detect where the real problem lies and allow
the complainant enough time to narrate his grievances.
Good police poise with pleasant voice should be adopted in order to gain confidence.
After complying with and directing all necessary actions on the complaint, the
policeman shall thank the citizen in a spirit of appreciation for his cooperation in
bringing the matter to their attention.
152
POLICE INTELLIGENCE AND SECRET SERVICE

HISTORICAL SETTING
MOSES
One of the first recorded formalized intelligence efforts, with format, can also be found in
the Holy Bible Numbers 13:17
And Moses sent them to spy out the land of Canaan and said unto them, get you up this
way southward, and go up into the mountain; and see the lands, what it is; and the people
that dwell therein, whether they are strong or weak, few or many; and what the land they
dwelt in, whether in tents, or in strongholds; and what land is; whether it be fat or lean,
whether there be wood therein, or not. And be of good courage and bring of the fruit of the
land. The scriptures also named the twelve intelligence agents whom the Lord directed
Moses to sent into the land of Canaan and records that all those men were heads of the
children of Israel.
RAHAB
The Harlot of Jericho (Joshua 2:1-21) who sheltered and concealed the agents of Israel,
made a covenant with the agents and duped their pursuers. She was not only an impromptu
confederate of immense value for the Jewish leader of that far distant day, but also established a
plot-pattern which is still of periodic relief to motion picture producers.
DELILAH
The Philistine used her when she allowed Philistine spies to hide in her house (Judges
16). Delilah was an impromptu intelligence agent. Apart from her tonsorial specialty, she
also allowed sex to gain intelligence from a powerful enemy. She achieved the largest
effective force of her employers adversaries and contriving the stroke which put that
force out of action.
EVENTS AND PERSONALITIES
IN THE WORLD OF INTELLIGENCE
Sun Tzu
Know thy enemy and know yourself, you need not fear the results of a hundred battles
If you know yourself and not the enemy, for every victory, you are a fool who will meet defeat in
every battle.
Alexander the Great
When Alexander the Great was marching to Asia, were rumors of disaffection growing
among his allies and mercenaries, he sought the truth, and got it by simplest expedient by
devising the first letter sorting and opening to obtain information.
Sertorius
He was the Roman Commander in Spain who possessed a White Fawn and allowed it to
become widely known - that he derived secrets and guidance from the fawn. His intelligence
agents credited their information to the supernatural power of animals.
Akbar
He was known to be the sagacious master of the Hindustan. He employed more than
4,000 agents for the sole purpose of bringing him the truth that his throne might rest upon it.
Genghis Khan
153
He was known The Great Mongol, who used intelligence to conquer China and invade
Cathay. He instructed his Generals to send out spies and used prisoners as sources of
information. The leader of the so-called MONGOL CONQUERORS - made use of effective
propaganda machine by spreading rumors of Mongol Terror, they collected information on
weaknesses and rivalries of Europe. The leaders usually disguised as merchants.
RENAISSANCE PERIOD
With the rise of Nationalism and development of modern armies, intelligence became
apparent to large states. In England, Sir Francis Walsingham, under Queen Elizabeth,
organized the first National Intelligence Service. He employed spies on the staff of the Admiral in
Command of the Spanish Army and able to obtain information regarding Spanish Army as to their
ships, equipment, forces and stores. He protected Queen Elizabeth I from countless assassins.
In France, Richlieu introduced the network of covert collectors who transmitted prompt and
accurate information to Paris regarding the activities of the rebels and dissidents of the kingdom.
Louis XIV systematized political policy, continuous surveillance, postal censorship and military
intelligence organization were his contributions.
The French Intelligence System continued since 15th Century.
Napoleon Bonaparte once said, One Spy in the right place is worth 20,000 men in the
field. He organized two Bureaus of Interest: Bureau of Intelligence which consolidate all
incoming information regarding the enemy for presentation to the emperor and to obtain
information as desired, and Topographic Bureau which maintains a large map which covers the
latest information regarding both enemy and friendly forces. He maintained Military Intelligence
and Secret Political Police Service all over Europe. His main arm was Spy against spy concept.
Frederick the Great
He was known as the Father of Organized Military Espionage. He has divided his
agents into four classes:
Common spies those recruited among poor folk, glad to earn a small sum or to
accommodate as military officer.
Double spies are unreliable renegades, chiefly involved in spreading false information
to the enemy.
Spies of Consequences couriers and noblemen, staff officers, and kindred conspirators,
requiring a substantial bribe or bait,
Persons who were forced to undertake espionage against their own will.
Hannibal
He was considered one of the brilliant military strategists in the history of military
intelligence. He had developed an effective intelligence system for 15 years in Rome. He usually
roam around the city often disguise himself as a beggar to gather first hand information.
George Washington
Conspirator under oath abounds in the history of every nation. George Washington was
grand master in intelligence. He mobilized the Free Masons of the colonies at the outbreak of the
American war of Independence.
Karl Schulmeister
Karl Schulmeister was Napoleons eye, Napoleons military secret, born on August 5,
1770. He began his career in offensive espionage under a cover role. He was able to infiltrate the
Austrian General Staff.
Wilhelm Stieber
He incorporated intelligence in the General Staff Support System. He further device
military censorship and organized military propaganda. He introduced military censorship and
organized military propaganda. He works as a census taker and developed informal gathering of
data.
154
Alfred Redl
He was one of the most brilliant intelligent agents. Though a homosexual, he became
Chief of the Austro Hungarian Secret Service. He became a double agent of Russia. In 1913,
his treason was discovered and he was forced to commit suicide. His treason also led to the
death of almost 500,000 agents and soldiers combined in his 13 years espionage episode.
Maj. General Donovan
He was the organizer of the OSS, builder of a central intelligence system - OSS whose
exploits become legendary in World War II.
Battle of Midway
In June 1442, the turning point of the Naval in the Pacific, the victory gained by the
Americans was due to the disrupted messages from the Imperial Japanese Navy.
Admiral Isoroku Yamamoto
April 1943, He was the crypto analyst of the U.S. Navy Communications Intelligence
intercepted a top-secret signal relaying the travel of the Admiral. En route, he was intercepted and
crashed in the Jungles of Baungainville.
State Informer
Edward I, King of England in 1725 organized a systematic police system so called Witch
and Ward. By Royal proclamation, the profession State Informer was created in 1734 enjoining
all informers to expose criminal activities and be compensated.
Fouche of France
A Frenchman born in 1759, rose to become the most feared and respected intelligence
director in French history. He created a network of agent. His assistance founded the modern
system of spying on spies, which later was known as counter espionage.
Joseph Petrosino
He was member of the New York Police Department in early 1900, he was the head of
the Italian Squad. Through extensive intelligence network, he was credited to smash and
neutralization of the Black Society.
Federal Bureau of Investigation
First established in 1908 as an investigative arm of the U.S. Department of Justice and
became what is known as the F.B.I. under its first director John Edgar Hoover in 1924. On
September 6, 1939 by a presidential directive, it came to its responsibility the task of a domestic
intelligence.
Central Intelligence Agency
The agency was created under the US National Security Act of 1947. It was the Central
Intelligence group established during the time of President Truman in January 1946. The CIA was
under the National Security Council.
Committee for State Security
Russia - The Intelligence agency known as the KGB - Komitet Gosudarstvennoy
Bezopasnosti (KGB)
British Secret Service Great Britain
Mossad Israel,
BND West Germany
KCIA Korean Central Intelligence Agency
Britain: Scotland Yard, London Metropolitan Police Force
It was established by Sir Robert Peel in 1829 which signaled the beginning of a colorful
legendary police force and considered one of the most efficient in the world today.
155
ESSENTIAL INTERESTS IN INTELLIGENCE

Intelligence Defined
According to Government - Commission Task Force - It means the collection, processing,
collation, interpretation, evaluation and dissemination of information, with references to national
security. In certain context, it may also mean the network or the system for the collection,
collation, interpretation, evaluation, processing, and dissemination of information. The term as
used here doesnt include any police powers or authorities, any investigative function other than
those involve in the collection of information nor any function involved in the enforcement of laws,
orders, or regulation.
According to Military Terminologies - Intelligence is the end product resulting from the
collection, evaluation, analysis, integration and interpretation of all available information which my
have immediate or potential significance to the development and execution of plans, policies and
programs of the users.
According to Police Parlance - The end product resulting from the collection, evaluation,
analysis, integration and interpretation of al available information regarding the activities of
criminal and other law violators for the purpose of affecting criminals and other law violators for
the purpose of affecting their arrest, obtaining evidence, and forestalling plan to commit crime.
Functions of Intelligence in General
Today all counties have their intelligence services. They maybe different in their
organization, efficiency and method but they all have the basic functions such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
the collection or procurement of information

the evaluation of the information which then become intelligence
the dissemination of intelligence to those who need it.
counter intelligence or negative intelligence, which is dedicated to the concealment
and protection of ones own information from the adversary intelligence operation. It is a
defensive function of intelligence.
Principles of Intelligence
Criteria
a. Universality of application - it should apply to as many phases and aspects of intelligence
as possible. It should guide not only the production of intelligence but also the
concomitant activities essential to the process as well as the organization and the thought
and actions of the individual composing it.
b. It must be broad - it should form the basis for a formulation of corollary and subsidiary
guides.
c. It must be important, indeed essential, to intelligence- if a guide is truly important and
essential, then its violations should bring its own immediate penalties.
Doctrines
a. There exists an essential unity between knowledge and action; that knowledge enhances
the effectiveness of action and minimizes the chances of error.
b. The knowledge requirements of decision-making are complex and beyond the capacities
of anyone necessary to meet there requirements.
Principles
Objectivity - in intelligence, only the well guided succeed. It is a basic intelligence
concept that there must be unity between knowledge and action. It follows therefore that
intelligence should interact and condition the decision. Intelligence must be adapted to the
156
needs of the decision; it is both giver and taker. Action or decision is planned by knowledge
and guided by it at every step.
Interdependence - Intelligence is artificially subdivided into component elements to
insure complete coverage, eliminate duplication and to reduce the overall task or manageable
sizes. Nevertheless, each subdivision remains as essential part of unity; contributes
proportionately to the end result; possesses a precise interrelationship; and interacts with
each other so as to achieve a balanced and harmonious whole.
Continuity - Intelligence must be continuous. It is necessary that coverage be
continuous so that the shape of what happens today could be studied in the light of what
happened before, which in turn would enable us to predict the shape of things to come.
Communication - Intelligence adequate to their needs must be communicated to all the
decision makers in manner that they will understand and form that will permit its most
effective use.
Usefulness - Intelligence is useless if it remains in the minds, or in the files of its
collectors or its producers. The story must be told and it must be told well. The story must be
convincing and to be convincing it must not only be plausible or factual but its significance
must be shown.
Selection - Intelligence should be essential and pertinent to the purpose at hand.
Intelligence involves the plowing through a maze of information, considering innumerable
number of means or of picking the most promising of a multitude of leads. The requirement of
decision-making covers very nearly the entire span of human knowledge. Unless there is
selection of only the most essential and the pertinent, intelligence will go off in all directions in
one monumental waste of effort.
Timeliness - Intelligence must be communicated to the decision maker at the
appropriate time to permit its most effective use. This is one of the most important and most
obvious, for Intelligence that is too soon or too late are equally useless. Timeliness is one
principle that complements all the others.
Security - Security is achieved by the measures which intelligence takes to protect and
preserve the integrity of its activities. If intelligence has no security, it might be as well being
run like a newspaper to which it is similar.
General Activities in Police Intelligence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Strategic Intelligence it is an intelligence activity which is primarily long range in nature

with little practical immediate operation value.
Line Intelligence it is an intelligence activity that has the immediate nature and value
necessary for more effective police planning and operation.
National Intelligence - it is the integrated product of intelligence developed by all the
governmental branches, departments concerning the broad aspect of national security
and policy. It is concerned to more than one department or agency and it is not produced
by single entity. It is used to coordinate all the activities of the government in developing
and executing integrated and national policies and plans.
Counter-Intelligence phase of intelligence covering the activity devoted in destroying
the effectiveness of hostile foreign activities and to the protection of info against
espionage, subversion and sabotage.
Undercover Work is an investigative process in which disguises and pretext cover and
deception are used to gain the confidence of criminal suspects for the purpose of
determining the nature and extent of any criminal activities that maybe contemplating or
perpetuating.
Functional Classification of Police Intelligence

1. Criminal Intelligence refers to the knowledge essential to the prevention of crimes and
the investigation, arrest, and prosecution of criminal offenders.
2. Internal Security Intelligence refers to the knowledge essential to the maintenance of
peace and order.
3. Public Safety Intelligence refers to the knowledge essential to ensure the protection
of lives and properties.
Forms of Intelligence
1. Sociological Intelligence deals with the demographic and psychological aspects of
groups of people. It includes the population and manpower and the characteristics of the
people, public opinion attitude of the majority of the people towards matter of public
policy and education.
2. Biographical Intelligence deals with individuals personalities who have actual
possession of power.
157
3. Armed Force Intelligence deals with the armed forces of the nation. It includes the
position of the armed forces, the constitutional and legal basis of its creation and actual
role, the organizational structure and territorial disposition, and the military manpower
recruitment and Order of Battle
4. Geographical Intelligence deals with the progress of research and development as it
affects the economic and military potential of a nation.
KINDS OF INTELLIGENCE
A. Strategic Intelligence as defined earlier, it is an intelligence data that are not of an
immediate value. It is usually descriptive in nature, accumulation of physical description of
personalities, modus operandi. It does not have immediate operational value but rather long
range that may become relevant to future police operations.
B. Line Intelligence It is the kind of intelligence required by the commander to provide
for planning and conduct tactical and administrative operation in counter insurgency. This pertains
to knowledge of People, Weather, Enemy and Terrain (PWET) used in planning and conducting
tactical and administrative operation in a counter insurgency.
Intelligence information to be determined in Line Intelligence are:
People - living condition of the people, sources of income, education of the people,
government livelihood projects, extent of enemy influence to the people
Weather visibility, cloudy, temperature, precipitation (rain), wind
Enemy - location of the enemy, strength of the enemy, disposition, tactical capability,
enemy vulnerability
Terrain - relief and drainage system, vegetation, surface material, man made features.
There are military aspects of terrain which includes cover and concealment, obstacle,
critical key terrain features, observation and fields of fire, and avenues of approach.
C. Counter Intelligence (CI) - this kind of intelligence covers the activity devoted in
destroying the effectiveness of hostile foreign activities and to the protection of info against
espionage, subversion and sabotage. Hence, the three activities of CI are: protection of
information against espionage; protection of personnel against subversion; and protection of
installations and material against sabotage.
Counter Intelligence is also known as Negative Intelligence - a generic term meaning
three different things;
Security Intelligence means that the total sum of efforts to counsel the national
policies, diplomatic decisions, military data, and any other information of a secret nature affecting
the security of the nation form unauthorized persons. It is an effort to deny information to
unauthorized persons by restricting to those who are explicitly authorized to possess it.
Counter-Intelligence - counter intelligence is the organized effort to protect specific data
that might be of value to the opponents own intelligence organization. Some of its functions are:
Censorship of the following: correspondence, broadcast, telecast, telephone conversations,
telegrams and cables, etc., prevention of the dissemination of any information that might aid an
opponent; maintenance of files of suspect; surveillance of suspects; mail reading, wire tapping
and recording; infiltration of the enemy intelligence organized to procure information about its
method, personal, specific operations and interest.
Counter-Espionage - In counter-espionage, negative intelligence becomes a dynamic
and active effort. Its purpose is to investigate actual or theoretical violation of espionage laws, to
enforce those laws and to apprehend any violators.
Five Categories of CI Operation
1. Military Security it encompasses the measures taken by a command to protect itself
against espionage, enemy operation, sabotage, subversion or surprise.
2. Port Frontier and Travel Security has to do with the application of both military and
civil security measures for CI control at point of entry and departure, international borders
or boundaries.
3. Civil Security it encompasses active and passive CI measures affecting the nonmilitary nationals permanently or temporarily residing in an area under military
jurisdiction.
4.
Censorship it is the control and examination of the civil, national, armed
forces, field press, and POWs.
158
5.
Special Operations counter subversion, sabotage and espionage
Counter Intelligence (CI) Operation

1. Counter Human Intel (HUMINT) seeks to overcome enemy attempts to use human
sources to collect information or to conduct sabotage and subversion which includes CI
special operations, liaison, counter security, and CI screening.
2. Counter Imagery Intel (IMINT) - includes action taken to determine enemy SIGINT and
related enemy weaknesses, capabilities and activities. These actions include surveillance
radar, photo thermal and infrared systems. Successful counter IMINT operations rely
heavily on pattern and movement analysis and evaluation of the enemy.
3. Counter Signal Intel (SIGINT) determine enemy SIGINT and related enemy
weaknesses, capabilities and activities, assess friendly operations to identify patterns,
profiles and develop, recommend and analyze counter measures.
THE INTELLIGENCE CYCLE
The single most important part of intelligence activity is the understanding the intelligence
cycle because MISSION, which is the core of the cycle, serves as the foundation of all
intelligence operations. Every operative must therefore place into mind the following phases of
the cycle:
PHASE 1
PLANNING THE COLLECTION
EFFORT
PHASE 2
COLLECTION OF
INFORMATION
PHASE 4
MISSION
DISSEMINATION AND USE

OF INFORMATION
PHASE 3
PROCESSING THE
COLLECTED INFORMATION
PHASE 1 - Planning the Collection Effort

This phase of the cycle involve the determination of the requirements of intelligence. It is
concerned with identifying the so called Essential Element of Information (EEI) - an item of
intelligence or information of the characteristics of the area of operations and the enemy, which
the commander feels he needs before he needs before he can reasonably arrive at a decision.
With this, the intelligence officer must have a thorough knowledge of the available
sources of information, the collecting agencies and type of info the latter can provide. He must
understand the operations of the command in order to provide the particular Intel required for
159
success. He must have a thorough knowledge of the tactics, organizations, and characteristics of
the enemy and be especially competent in the fields of acquisition of operations.
Categories of Intelligence Requirements

In relation to use
a.
Executive are those information required by executive, governmental and

military commanders; the executive requirements are the basis for decisions and national
policy making.
b.
Contributory information required to complete the staff process make staff
plans and estimates that contribute to the decision and policy making.
c.
Operational additional intelligence required in planning and carrying out
effectively the decision or policy announced. Decisions and policy require
implementation.
d.
Collateral higher or adjacent echelons of the government or military
establishment may require info.
In relation to type
a.
Basic are general reference materials for use in the planning regarding the
enemies, area of operations, capabilities static comprehensive.
b.
Current are information which are temporary in nature and narrower in scope.
c.
Estimative are those that determine the future courses of action; required by the
executives to plan future military operations and policies.
PHASE 2 - Collection of information
This phase of the cycle is concerned with identification of the collecting agency, the
formulation of procedures on the manner of collecting the information in conjunction with the
plans as achieved in phase one.
Selection of Collecting Agencies
1.
2.
3.
List all available sources; exploit the collecting agencies.

Collection will be assigned in accordance with capabilities;
Collection directives prepared once the proper collecting agency has been
selected to exploit a particular source;
4.
Collection directives do not limit the activities of the collecting agency;
5.
Criteria for the selection of collecting agency; suitability, capability,
confirmation, timeliness and balance.
Purpose of the Collection Plan
1.
2.
To insure logical and orderly analysis of the intelligence requirements.

To establish a workable collection scheme based on the analysis of the
intelligence requirement.
3.
To provide definite and precise directives to collecting agencies.
4.
To avoid possibility of omission, conflict or unnecessary duplication of
collection effort.
Steps in Developing a Collection Plan
1.
2.
List the requirements in the order of priority

Break the requirements into indication any evidence of actual or potential
enemy activity or characteristic of an area of operation enemy activity or characteristic of
an area of operation, habitual activities need experience.
3.
Fit those indications into existing situations critical clues, security
measures, attack, defense, etc.
4.
Basis for development for specific collection directive - designed to exploit to
the fullest the collection directive; guide doesnt limit.
160
5.
Selection of Collecting Agencies criteria for selection suitability, capability,

confirmation, timeliness and balance. Designation of particular time and place that the
required information is to be reported.
Factors in choosing Collection Agent

In choosing collection agents, they must be selected according to their capability agents
placements or access to the target; multiplicity more agents; and balance the number of
agents needed per operation.
Methods of Collection collection of information can be done through overt method (open
system) or covert method (secret/clandestine).
Collecting Agencies depending on the type of operation, the collecting agency could be
Government Agencies, Intelligence units, or Organizations
Trade Crafts includes the use of photography, investigations / elicitation / interrogation,
surveillance, sound equipment, surreptitious entry keys and locks, use of an artist,
communication
PHASE 3 - Processing the Collected Information
This phase of the cycle is concerned with the examination and collation of all collected
information.
Steps in Processing Raw Information
1.
Collection organization of raw data and information into

usable form; grouping similar items of information so that they will be readily accessible.
Recording is the reduction of info into writing or some other form of graphical
representation and the arranging or this info into writing or some form of graphical
representation and the arranging of this into groups of related items.
Police log book and Journal
Intel-work Sheet - Intel Files
Situation Maps - Rouges Gallery
Modus Operandi Files
2.
Evaluation examination of raw information to determine

intelligence value, pertinence of the information, reliability of the source and agency, and its
credibility or truth of information. Evaluation is the determination of the pertinence of the info
to the operation, reliability of the source of or agency and the accuracy of the info. Evaluation
determines the following:
Pertinence - does it hold some value to current operation?
Is it needed
immediately?
Reliability judging the source of info of agency
Credibility truth of info. Is it possible for the reported fact or event to have taken
place? Is the report consistent within itself? Is the report confirmed or corroborated by
info from different sources or agencies? If the report does not agree with info from
other sources which one is more likely to be true?
The Evaluation Guide
ACCURACY OF
INFORMATION
RELIABILITY OF
INFORMATION
1- CONFIRMED by other
sources
2- PROBABLY TRUE
A- COMPLETE RELIABLE
3- POSSIBLY TRUE
4- DOUBTFULLY TRUE
C- FAIRLY RELIABLE
D- NOT USUALLY RELIABLE
5- IMPROBABLE
E- UNRELIABLE
6- TRUTH can not be judged
F- REALIBILITY cannot be
B- USUALLY RELIABLE
SOURCE OF INFORMATION
T- Direct Observation by
Comdr/Chf of Unit
U- Report by DPA or Resident
Agent
V- Report by PNP/AFP Troops
W- Interrogation of Captured
Enemy
X- Observation of govt/civilian
employee
Y/Z- Documentary
161
judged
3.
Interpretation it is establishing the meaning and significance

of the information. It involves the following activities:
Analysis shifting and isolating those elements that have significance in light of the
mission or national objective.
Integration combining the elements isolated in analysis and known information to form
a logical picture or theory.
Deduction the formulation of conclusions from the theory developed, tested and
considered valid determination of effort and meaning of the information.
PHASE 4 - Dissemination and Use of Information

This phase of the cycle refers to the activities of transferring the processed information to
the proper users, most particularly the authority that requires the activity. Processed information
can be disseminated through annexes, estimates, briefing, message, reports, overlays, and or
summaries.
The criteria that must be observed in dissemination are:
Timeless must reach the users on time to be of value. It must be disseminated in
accordance with the urgency and must reach the user in sufficient time to be use.
Propriety the message must be clear, concise and complete, as well as in the proper
form for the receiver to readily understand its contents. It must be disseminated to the correct
user, presented in a form that lends itself to immediate use and distributed by the most effective
means appropriate to both time and security requirements.
Methods of Dissemination
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fragmentary orders from top to bottom of the command

Memorandum, circulars, special orders
Operations order, oral or written
Conference staff members
Other report and intelligence documents
Personal Contact
Who are the users of intelligence?

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
National leaders and military commanders formulation of national policies.

Advisors and Staff preparations of plans and estimates
Friendly nations or other branches of the armed forces.
Processor basis for evaluation and interpretation.
Head / chairman of an organization
Any person with authority for purposes of planning.
INFORMATION AND ITS SOURCES

Information
Information refers to all evaluated materials of every description including those derived
from observation, reports, rumors, imagery, and other sources from which intelligence in
produced. Information is a communicated knowledge by others obtaining by personal study,
investigation, research, analysis, observation.
Two General classifications of sources of information:
1. Open Sources 99% of the information collected are coming from open sources.
2. Close Sources 1% of information are collected from close sources.
Overt Intelligence is the gathering of information or documents procured openly without regard
as to whether the subject or target become knowledgeable of the purpose
Open Sources: Includes information taken from
Enemy activity
POW and Civilians
Captured documents
Map - Weather, forecast, studies, report - Agencies
162
Covert Intelligence is the secret procurement of information, which is obtained without the
knowledge of the person or persons safeguarding vital intelligence interest.
Close Sources: Include information which maybe taken through:
Surveillance
Casing and
Elicitation
Surreptitious entry
Employment of technical means (Bugging and Tapping device)
Tactical Interrogation - Observation and Description (ODEX)
PERSONS AS SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Informant Net It is a controlled group of people who worked through the direction of
the agent handler. The informants, principal or cutouts supply the agent handler directly or
indirectly with Intel information
Informants (Asset) people selected as sources of information, which could be
voluntary, or in consideration of a price.
Informant refers to a person who gives information to the police voluntarily or
involuntarily with out any consideration
Informer those who give information to the police for price or reward
Types of Informants
1. Criminal Informant an informant who give information to the police pertaining to the
underworld about organized criminals with the understanding that his identity will be
protected
2. Confidential Informant is similar to the former but he gives information violate of the
law to includes crimes and criminals
3. Voluntary Informant a type of informant who give information freely and willfully as a
witness to a certain act
4. Special Informant those who gives information concerning specialized cases only and
it is regarded a special treatment by the operatives (ex. teachers, businessmen)
5. Anonymous Informant those who gives information through telephone with the hope
that the informant can not be identified
Sub-type of Informant
1. Incidental Informant a person who casually imparts information to an officer with no
intention of providing subsequent information
2. Recruited Informant A person who is selected cultivated and developed into a
continuous source of info
Categories of Recruited Informants:
1. Spontaneous or Automatic Informant Informants who by the nature of their work or
position in society have a certain legal, moral or ethical responsibilities to report info to
the police
2. Ordinary (out-of-their-will) Informants Informants that are under the compulsion to
report info to the police
3. Special Employee informants who are of a specific operational nature
Other Classification of Informant
Other terms related to people who gives information are Automatic Informant,
Penetrating Agent , Infiltrating Agent , Full time Informant , Rival Elimination Informant, False
Informant, Frightened Informant, Self- aggrandizing Informant, Mercenary Informant , Double
Crosser Informant , Woman Informant , Legitimate Informant.
Common Motives of Informants
People give information to the police due to various reasons. Their motives include
reward, revenge, fear and avoidance of punishment, friendship, patriotism, vanity, civicmindedness, repentance, competition, and other motives.
163
INFROMANT RECRUITMENT
Phases
1.
Selection it is particularly desirable to be able to identity and recruit an informant

who has access to many criminal in-group or subversive organization. Wide access is
probably the single most important feature in the consideration of recruiting the potential
informant
2.
Investigation the investigation of the potential informants that has tentatively

identified as a probable must be as thorough as possible. It must establish possible
existing motives as to this person might assist the police Intel community. Failure to do so
will deny this office who must perform the approach and persuasion phase with little more
that a guess. If necessary, conduct complete background investigation (CBI)
3.
Approach approach must be done in a setting from which might include pleasant
surroundings, perhaps a confidential apartment, completely free form any probability of
compromise, preferably in an adjacent city or a remote area foreign to the informants
living pattern.
4.
Testing the testing program should begin, of course, with the limited assignment,
with a gradual integration into the more important areas. The occasional testing of an
informant should continue through the entire affiliation
INTELLIGENCE OPERATIONS
Intelligence Operations is the result of intelligence planning, planning is always ahead of
operation although an operation can be made without a plan, it is usually due to sudden and
inevitable situations but definitely this is poor intelligence management.
THE 14 OPERATIONAL CYCLES
1. Mission and Target
Infiltration the insertion of action agent inside the target organization
Penetration recruitment of action agent inside the target organization
2. Planning
3. Spotting
4. Partial Background Investigation (PBI) or Complete Background Investigation
5. Recruitment - the only qualification of an agent is to have an access to the target
6. Training
7. Briefing
8. Dispatch
9. Communication - technical method like telephone/radio, non-technical method like
personal meeting, live drop or dead drop
10. Debriefing
11. Payments depends upon the motivation of informant
Regulatory - pay no bonuses
Supplemental - income that is enough to ease his financial worries
12. Disposition involve activity on rerouting, retraining, retesting, termination
13. Reporting
14. Operational Testing
COVER AND UNDERCOVER ACTIVITIES
Cover - the means by which an individual group of organization conceals the true nature
of its acts and or existence from the observer.
Cover story a biographical data through fictional that will portray the personality of the
agent he assumed, a scenario to cover up the operation
Cover Support an agent assigned in target areas with the primary mission of
supporting the cover story.
Types of Cover
1.
2.
3.
4.
Natural Cover using actual or true background

Artificial using biographical data adopted for the purpose
Cover with in a Cover justification of existence
Multiple Cover any cover you wish.
164
Organizational Cover is an account consisting of biographical which when adopted by an

individual will assume the personality he wants to adopt
Undercover Assignment is an investigative technique in which agent conceal his official
identity an obtain information from that organization
THE UNDECOVER AGENT

Special qualifications include knowledge of the language, area background regarding
events, knowledge about the custom and habits, physical appearance, and must be an artist.
Factors considered in Selecting Cover Story
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mutual Point of Interest

Justification of presents
Previous and permanent address
Efficiency of role and freedom from the movement
Means of communication
Social and financial status
Optional alternate plan
Safe departure
Selecting Action Agents

1. Placement location of prospective agent with respect to the target
2. Access it is the capability of a prospective agent to obtain the desired info for the Intel
organization or to perform to Intel collection mission in the area.
Primary Access it is the access to the desired info
Secondary Access it is the access to the desired info through a principal source
where the latter has the direct access
Outside Access the agent is employed outside the target and merely monitor info
from a third person who is monitoring info n the area
AGENT CONTROL
CONTROL authority to direct the agent to carryout task or requirement on behalf of the
clandestine organization in an acceptable manner and security
Two Categories of Control
1. Positive Control is characterized by professionalism and rapport like:
Agent motivation
Psychological control
2. Negative Control characterized by threat and it include the following:
Disciplinary Action includes verbal reprimand for poor performance or insecure
actions withholding certain material rewards, reduction of agents salary or in extreme
situation the threat of terminating professional relationship
Escrow Account control of an agent by putting hi salary in a bank to be withdrawn
only after a fulfillment of a condition
Blackmail
METHODS OF COVERT INTELLIGENCE
Surveillance
Surveillance is a form of clandestine investigation which consists of keeping persons,
place or other targets under physical observation in order to obtain evidence or information
pertinent to an investigation. Surveillance of persons is called Tailing or Shadowing,
Surveillance of place is called Casing or Reconnaissance, and Surveillance of other things,
events, and activities is called Roping.
Considerations in Surveillance Planning
165
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Pre-Surveillance Conference a conference held among the team

members, the police intelligence unit before surveillance is conducted.
Surveillance Plan a plan established the as required according to type
of personnel, and the general and specific instructions for surveillance.
Area Target Study refers to the area of operation of surveillance
activities.
Surveillant a person who conducts surveillance with includes only
observations.
Stakeout or Plant is the observation of places or areas from a fixed
point.
Tailing or Shadowing it is the observation of a persons movement.
Undercover Man it refers to a person trained to observe and penetrate
certain organization suspected of illegal activities and later reports the observation and
informations that proper operational action can be made
Liason Program the assignment of trained intelligence personnel to
other agencies in order to obtain information of police intelligence value. (Agencies like
the press, credit agencies, labor unions, telephone companies)
Safehouse is a place, building, enclosed mobile, or an apartment,
where police undercover men meet for debriefing or reporting purposes.
Drop any person is a convenient, secure and unsuspecting place where
police undercover men meet his action agent for debriefing or reporting purposes.
Convoy an accomplice or associate of the subject used to avoid or
elude surveillant.
Decoy a cover supporting the surveillant who can become a convoy
whenever surveillant is burned.
Contact any persons whom the subject picks or deals with while he is
under observation and identifies the observer.
Made when subject under surveillance becomes aware that he is under
observation and identifies the observer.
Lost when the surveillant does not know the whereabouts of his subject
or the subject had eluded the surveillance.
TYPES OF SURVEILLANCE
According to Intensity and Sensitivity
1.
Discreet subject person to be watch is unaware that he is under

observation
2.
Close subject is aware that he is under observation varied on each

occasions
3.
Loose applied frequently or infrequently, period of observation varied on

each occasion
According to Methods
1.
Stationary this is observation of place usually a bookie stall, a gambling, joint,

a residence where illegal activities are going on (fixed position)
2.
Moving surveillance follow the subject from the place to place to maintain
continuous watch of his activities
3.
Technical this is a surveillance by the use of communications and electronic
hardwares, gadgets, system and equipment
Special Equipment (Technical Supports)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Camera with telephoto lens

Moving Picture camera
Binoculars
Tape recording apparatus
Wire taping device
Other instrument miniaturized one-way radio
Methods available to employ in Surveillance

Ordinarily, the methods are surveillance of place, tailing or shadowing (1-2-3 man
shadow), undercover investigation, special methods includes: wire tapping - concealed
microphones - tape recorder -television - electric gadgets
Essential Requirements and Appearance in Surveillance
166
In the actual process of operation, the agent is advised to be of general appearance, has
no noticeable peculiarities in appearance. Agent should not wear inconspicuous jewelry or
clothing, nothing about him to attract attention. He must have perseverance and able to wait for
hours. Alertness, resourcefulness, and being versatile and quick-witted are his weapons.
Basic Preparations in Surveillance
Study the Subject name, address, description, family and relatives, associates,
character and temperament, vice, hobbies, education, others
Knowledge of the area and terrain maps, national and religious backgrounds,
transportation, public utilities
Subversive Organization - history and background, biography of the official, identity and
background of members and former members, method of identification employed by the
members, files and records, nature, location and accessibility, meeting
Cover Story the scenario must be appropriate to cover up operation and avoidance of
identification of mission.
Counter Surveillance the conduct of operation is coupled with counter intelligence
measures such as window shopping, use of convoys and decoys, stopping
immediately on blind corners, getting out immediately on public conveyances,
retracing, entering mobile housing
CASING OR RECONNAISSANCE
Casing is the term use in the police organization while reconnaissance is used in military
terms. Casing or reconnaissance is the surveillance of a building place or area to determine its
suitability for Intel use or its vulnerability in operations. It aids in the planning of an operation by
providing needed information. It assists the agent handler to install confidence in his agent during
briefing phase by being able to speak knowingly about the area of operation. Casing is also
considered a security measure because it offers some degree of protection for those operating in
an area unfamiliar to them.
Method of Casing
a.
Personal Reconnaissance the most effective method and will

produced the most info since you know just what youre looking for.
b.
Map Reconnaissance it may not sufficient but it can produce a
certain amount of usable information
c.
Research - much info can be acquired through research
d.
Prior Information your unit and of the unit will have file report that
they may provide you with info
e.
Hearsay info usually gain by the person operating in the area and
performing casing job
OBSERVATION AND DECRIPTION
A.K.A (ODEX)
Observation a complete and accurate observation by an individual of his surroundings
an encompasses the use of all the major sense to register and recognized its operational or Intel
significance
Description the actual and factual reporting of ones observation of he reported
sensory experience recounted by another
Psychologist estimate that approximately 85% of our knowledge is gathered through
sight, 13% from sense of hearing and only 2% through the three other senses
Psychological Processes for accurate observation
Attention consist of he psychological process involve in becoming aware of an
existence of fact
Perception involved in the understanding this fact of awareness
Report involved in identifying the name in one own mind and some fact which has been
perceive, narrated and identified
ELICITATION
167
It is a system or plan whereby information of intelligence value is obtained through the

process direct intercommunication in which one or more of he parties to the common is unaware
of the specific purpose of the conservation. The three phases are determination of the mission,
selection of the subject, and accomplishment of the mission.
Two Devices in the conduct of Elicitation
Approach process of setting people to start talking
Probe to keep the people taking incessantly
Types of Approach
1.
Flattery people are susceptible to praise so use this weakness as a way of

approaching the subject for elicitation.
Variants:
b. Teacher Pupil Approach the subject is treated as an authority then solicit his view
point and opinion on a subject matter.
c. Kindred Soul Approach the subject is placed in a pedestal having some
specialized quality then flatter him/her by showing enough concern for his/her
welfare to pay special attention to his enjoyment
d. Good Samaritan Approach is the sincere and valid offers of help and assistance
are made to the subject
e. Partial disagreement Approach seek to produce talking by the word Im sure if I
fully agree.
2. Provocative Approach discover a wide range of conventional gambits
Variants:
a. Teaser Bait Approach the elicitor accumulates the sources of knowledge about a
particular subject to tempt the subject to give his/her views.
b. Manhattan from Missouri Approach the elicitor adopts an unbelievable attitude
above anything. He questions all statements and oppositions.
c. Joe Blow Approach is I know the answer to everything approach. The elicitor
adopts the attitude of being approachable of any field.
d. National Pride Approach nature propensity of al persons to defend their country
and its policies.
Types to Probe
1. Competition Probe this is effective when used in connection with the teacher pupil
approach
2. Clarity Probe used to elicit additional information in an area which the response is clear
3. High Pressure Probe it serves to point out contradictions in what the subject has said
4. Hypothetical Probe presents a hypothetical situation and to get he subject to react to
the hypothetical situations
Purposes of Elicitation
1.
2.
3.
4.
To acquire info which is unbelievable through other channel

To obtain info which although unclassified in not publicity known
To provide source of info
To assist various individuals
PORTRAIT PARLE (P/P)

It is a means of using descriptive terms in relation to the personal features of an
individual and it can be briefly described as a world description or a spoken picture.
(Anthropometry - no two human beings has the same body measurement)
Identification Methods
1.
2.
Branding and mutilation

Parade system with portrait parle
168
3.
Fingerprint method
Several method of acquiring descriptive ability

1. Learns the meaning of the numerous words used in describing the various features of the
persons.
2. Study and practice the description of the features, such as the eyes, hair or the nose as
hey appear on several different persons.
3. Learning a definite order of proceeding from one picture to another
Methods of obtaining descriptive information
1. Close observation of the person and accurate recording of the terms describing the
features
2. Information describing through interviews of witnesses
3. Examination of observation of photographs and sketches
4. Examination of records
BACKGROUND CHECKS AND INVESTIGATION
Information needed:
1.
Domestic Background
2.
Personal Habit
3.
Business History
4.
Social or Business Associates
5.
Medical History
6.
Educational Background
7.
Family History
TACTICAL INTERROGATION
The need for obtaining information of the highest degree of credibility taken on the
minimum of time can be through interrogation which varies and dependent entirely on the
situation. In tactical interrogation, familiarization of the following is necessary:
Interrogation the systematic asking of questions to elicit information in the minimum of

time.
Interrogator - person who does the questioning.
Interrogee any person who is subjected to the interrogation process in any of its forms
and phases.
Suspect any person believed to be associated with prohibited activity
Source a person who for any reason submits information of intelligence interest usually
on a voluntary basis
Provocateur an individual from enemy forces who is deliberately introduce in our
custody with a specific mission of causing some unfavorable action or reaction on our
part.
Screening initial examination of an interrogee to determine the extent of his knowledge
of persons, places, things or events in which we are interested.
Formal Interrogation - the systematic attempt to exploit to an appropriate depth those
are of he interrogees knowledge which have been identified in the screening process
Debriefing the interrogation of a friendly interrogee who has information at the direction
of or under the control of the friendly intelligence service.
Interview Similar to a debriefing although it is less formal and the interrogee is not
necessarily under the control or employment of he respective intelligence service
Interrogation Report an oral or written statement of information by the questioning f an
interrogee
INTERROGATION TECHNIQUES:
Techniques of Approach the purpose is to gain the cooperation of the source and
induce him to answer questions which will follows.
1.
The Open Techniques the interrogator is open and direct in his approach and
makes no attempts to conceal the purpose of the interrogator. It is best employed when
the interrogee is cooperative. It is frequently used at the tactical level where time is a
major interrogator.
169
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The Common Interest Technique the interrogator must exert effort to impress
the interrogee of their common interest. The interrogator must look for he point out the
real advantages the interrogee will receive if he cooperates
Record File (we know all technique) the interrogator prepare a file on the source
listing all known information (record should be padded to make it appear to be very
extensive). The information must contain the life history of he interrogee to include his
activities and known associates (Party- bio-data of the interrogee is important). The we
know all s used in conjunction with the record file. During the approach, the interrogator
may ask the interrogee about a subject, if he refuses to cooperate, the interrogator may
provide the answer in order to impress him that the interrogator knows him very well (all
is known).
Exasperation Techniques (Harassment) effectively employed against hostile type
interrogee. The interrogator must be alert because the interrogee may fabricate
information to gain relief from irritation (monotype). Subject Interrogee is placed in a
longer period of interrogation without rest or sleep. The interrogator permits the source to
go to sleep and subsequently awaken for another series of questioning (this is done
repeatedly). After many repetitions, the interrogee will be exasperated and will finally
cooperate hoping that he can be allowed to rest or sleep. Ask a question, listen to a reply
and then ask the same question repeatedly (use a tape recorder if possible). The
purpose is to bore the interrogee thoroughly until he begins to answer questions freely to
end the harassment.
Opposite Personality Technique also known as Mutt and Jeff, Threat and
Rescue, Bud Guy God Guy, Sweet and Sour, Sugar and Vinegar, Devil and
Angel. Use of two (2) interrogators playing opposite roles.
Egotist Techniques (Pride and Ego) usually successful when employed against
an interrogee who has displayed a weakness or a feeling of insecurity. You may reverse
the technique by complimenting the interrogee in hopes of getting him to admit certain
information to gain credit. Described him as the best person, superior or comrade.
Silent Technique employed against nervous or the confident type of interrogee.
Look out the interrogee squarely in the eye with sarcastic smile (force him to break eye
contact first). He may ask questions but the interrogator must not answer. Patience is
needed until the interrogator is ready to break silence.
Question Barrage Technique (Rapid Fire Questioning) intended to confuse
the interrogee and put him into a defensive position. The interrogee become frustrated
and confused, he will likely reveal more than he intended, thus creating opening for
further questioning.
INTELLIGENCE IN NATIONAL SECURITY

Understanding National Security
National Interest - Each nation, regardless of creed or form, has their national interest to
protect and to advance. For national interests, people would willingly go to war to succeed of
perish. What then is national interest? National interest has been defined in many ways. But
for our purposes, we take the context of national interest to mean the general and continuing end
for which a nation acts. The term national interest is used to refer to the general concept of
national security and well-being. National are what the decision-making body in government
determines which beliefs, matters or dictates of conscience are important to the maintenance of
the nation. To secure or support national interest, certain objectives may be set by a nation.
And what are the Philippines national interests? Invariably, our national interest
includes self-preservation, freedom and independence, territorial integrity, political stability, and
socio-economic welfare. National Principles and Polices - From our national interests, national
principles and polices are derived. These are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
That our country shall be a Republican State

That the defense of the state shall be the concern of all citizens.
That we, as a people, renounce war to further our national interests.
That our government shall promote social justice.
That as a matter of concept, civilian authority is supreme at all times over the military.
This concept is actualized when the President assumes at the same time the position
of the Commander-in-Chief of the AFP.
National Strategy - In furtherance of our national principles and polices, the leaders of
our nation are then able to formulate our strategy.
National Power - How may a nation measures ones power? The elements of national
power are numerical strengths and character of population, cultural development and character of
170
government, geographical location, resources, economic development and military potential. The
degree to which a nation is strong or deficient in these elements is normally a measure of its
national power.
The components of National Power are: Political Strength, Economic Strength, Cultural
Strength, and Military Strength. Political strength stems from the character of the people and
from the type and stability of the government and the soundness of its foreign policy. Economic
strength stems from a combination of factor such as geographic location, climatic conditions,
supply of natural resources, industrial capacity, internal and external communication systems,
international trade, and the size, health and technical competence of the population. Cultural
strength stems from the national unity, the social and moral fiber of the people and the things
they believe in, and from the nature and vigor of national institutions-political, social, religious,
educational, scientific and cultural. Military strength is the ability of a nation to exert pressure by
armed force in furtherance of national policy. It consists of the strength of all the armed forces in
combination with other elements of national power, depending heavily on natural resources,
economic strength, a broad base of war industries and a vigorous population, military strength is
influenced by the number and quality of the nations military, economic, and political alliances.
SECURITY MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

CONCEPT OF SECURITY
Security is a state or condition of being secured; there is freedom from fear, harm,
danger, loss, destruction or damages. Basically, it was the action of man against man that led to
many unsecured and unsafe conditions. Reasons could be economic, revenge, or just plain greed
and avarice. Whatever the motives, the civilized man needs adequate protection.
Since security in general is very hard to comprehend, it can be divided into three major
areas:
1. Physical Security - this concern with the physical measures adopted to prevent
unauthorized access to equipment, facilities, material and document and to safeguard
them against espionage, sabotage, damage, loss and theft.
2. Personnel Security- this is as important as physical security. Personnel security starts
even before the hiring of an employee and remains to be maintained for as long as the
person is employed. Its purpose is to insure that a firm hires those best suited to assist
the firm in achieving its goals and objectives and once hired assist in providing necessary
security to the work force while carrying out their functions.
3. Document and Information Security- this involves the protection of documents and
classified papers from loss, access by unauthorized persons, damage, theft and
compromise through disclosure. Classified documents need special handling. Lack of
indoctrination and orientation among the personal handling them can result in the
leakage, loss, theft and unauthorized disclosure of the documents.
Physical security, personnel security, and document security cannot exist independentlythey are mutually supporting. They are in many respects overlapping. Physical security is
correlated to the other two parts, interwoven and one is essential to the other.
PROTECTIVE SECURITY SYSTEMS
Protective Security can be defined as those measures taken by an installation or unit to
protect itself against sabotage, espionage or subversion and at the same time provide freedom of
action in order to provide the installation of the unit with the necessary flexibility to accomplish its
mission.
The aspects of protective security can be seen with the application of the following:
1.
Industrial Security a type of security applied to business groups engaged in

industries like manufacturing, assembling, research and development, processing,
warehousing and even agriculture. It may also mean the business of providing security.
2.
Hotel Security - a type of security applied to hotels where its properties are
protected from pilferage, loss, damage and the function in the hotel restaurants are not
disturbed and troubled by outsiders or the guest themselves. This type of security
employs house detectives, uniforms guard and supervisor and insures that hotel guests
and their personal effects are safeguarded.
171
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bank security - this type of security is concern with bank operations. Its main
objective is the protection of bank cash and assets, its personnel and clientele. Security
personnel are trained to safeguard bank and assets while in storage, in transit and during
transactions.
VIP Security - a type of security applied for the protection of top-ranking officials of
the government or private entity, visiting persons of illustrious standing and foreign
dignitaries.
School Security - a type of security that is concern with the protection of students,
faculty members, and school properties. Security personnel are trained to protect the
school property from theft, vandals, handling campus riots and detecting the use of
intoxicated drugs and alcohol by the students.
Supermarket or Mall Security - a type of security which is concern with the
protection of the stores, warehouses, storage, its immediate premises and properties as
well as the supermarket personnel and customers. Security personnel are trained to
detect shoplifter, robbery, and bomb detection and customer relation.
Other types this include all other security matters not covered in the above
enumeration.
PHYSICAL SECURITY
Definition: Physical security measures are being used to define, protect, and monitor
property rights and assets. These measures consist of barriers and devices that would detect,
impede, and prevent unauthorized access to equipment, facilities, material and document and to
safeguard them against espionage, sabotage, damage and theft.
Physical security may be also defined as the safeguarding by physical means, such as
guard, fire protection measures, of plans, policies, programs, personnel, property, utilities,
information, facilities and installation against compromise, trespass, sabotage, pilferage,
embezzlement, fraud, or other dishonest criminal act.
What is a Barrier?
A barrier can be defined as any structure or physical device capable of restricting,
deterring, delaying, illegal access to an installation.
Generally, a barrier is use for the following purposes:
1.
2.
3.
Define the physical limits of an area.

Create a physical and psychological deterrent to unauthorized entry.
Prevent penetration therein or delay intrusion, thus, facilitating apprehension of
intruders.
4.
Assist in more efficient and economical employment of guards
5.
Facilitate and improve the control and vehicular traffic.
Types of Barriers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Natural barriers - it includes bodies of waters, mountains, marshes, ravines, deserts

or other terrain that are difficult to traverse.
Structural barriers - these are features constructed by man regardless of their
original intent that tends to delay the intruder. Examples are walls, doors, windows, locks,
fences, safe, cabinets or containers etc.
Human barriers - persons being used in providing a guarding system or by the
nature of their employment and location, fulfill security functions. Examples are guards,
office personnel, shop workers, etc.
Animal barriers - animals are used in partially providing a guarding system. Dogs
are usually trained and utilized to serve as guard dogs. German shepherds are best
suited for security functions. Goose and turkeys could also be included.
Energy barriers - it is the employment of mechanical, electrical, electronic energy
imposes a deterrent to entry by the potential intruder or to provide warning to guard
personnel. These are protective lighting, alarm system and any electronic devices used
as barriers.
Three Line of Physical Defense

1.
2.
First line of Defense- perimeter fences/ barriers

Second line of defense- doors, floors, windows, walls, roofs and grills and other
entries to the buildings
172
3.
Third line of defense- storage system like steel cabinets, safes, vaults and interior
files.
Principles of Physical Security

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The type of access necessary will depend upon a number of variable factors and
therefore may be achieved in a number of ways.
There is no impenetrable barrier
Defense-in depth is barriers after barriers
Delay is provided against surreptitious and non-surreptitious entry.
Each installation is different.
What is a Restricted Area?

A restricted area is any area in which personnel or vehicles are controlled for reasons of
security. Restricted area is established to provide security for installation or facilities and to
promote efficiency of security operations and economy in the use of security personnel.
Types of Restricted Areas
Two types of restricted areas may be established to permit different degrees of security
within the same installation or facility, and to provide efficient bases for the application of different
degrees of access, circulation and protection. These restricted areas are termed Exclusion areas
and Limited areas. Exclusion Area- an exclusion area is a restricted area which contains a
security interest to TOP SECRET importance, and which requires the highest degree of
protection. Limited Area Control- a limited area is a restricted area in which a lesser degree of
control is required than in an exclusion area but which the security interest would be
compromised by uncontrolled movement.
Limited Area Control includes the following:
a. Interior Area Control - Interior area control is generally affected in two ways. The first
method is the system which is initiated and terminated at the outer limits of the area
to determine the movements of a visitor within the area. A second somewhat less
means of accomplishing the same thing is time travel. This system provides for
checking the actual time used by the visitor against known time requirements for
what the visitor is to accomplish.
b. Visitor Identification and Movements Control - Processing and control of movements
of visitor shall be included in the PASS SYSTEM. The control of movements of visitor
will depend on the installation. A visitor register shall be maintained to include the
name of the visitor, date of visit, purpose of visit, which may be filed for the future
reference.
c. Key Control- A system of controlling keys shall be advised and regulations covering
the disposal, storage or withdrawals, shall be issued and imposed.
d. Fire Prevention- fire is so potentially destructive without human assistance, with
assistance it can be caused to devastate those things you are attempting to secure
and, professionally accomplished, often in a way that does not leave recognizable
evidence of sabotage.
What is Perimeter Security?
It is the protection of the installations inner and the immediate vicinity. The main purpose
of perimeter barrier is to deny or impede access or exit of unauthorized person. Basically, it is the
first line of defense of an installation. This is maybe in the form of fences, building walls or even
bodies of water.
The function and location of the facility itself usually determine the perimeter of the
installation. If the facility is located in a city whereby the facility is located in a city whereby the
building or enterprise occupies all the area where it is located, the perimeter may be the walls of
the building itself. Most of the Industrial companies, however, are required to have a wide space
for warehousing, manufacturing etc.
Types of Perimeter Barrier
Perimeter barriers includes fences, walls, bodies of water
Types of Fences
173
Solid fence -constructed in such away that visual access through the fence is denied. Its
advantage is that it denies the opportunity for the intruder to become familiar with the personnel,
activities and the time scheduled of the movements of the guards in the installation. On the other
hand, it prevents the guards from observing the area around the installation and it creates
shadow that may be used by the intruder for cover and concealment.
Full-view fence - it is constructed in such away that visual access is permitted through
the fence. Its advantages are that it allows the roving patrols and stationary guard to keep the
surrounding are of the installation under observation. On the other hand, it allows the intruder to
become familiar with the movements and time schedule of the guard patrols thereby allowing him
to pick the time that is advantageous on his part.
Types of Full-View Fence
1) Chain link fence
It must be constructed of 7 feet material excluding top guard.
It must be of 9 gauges or heavier.
The mesh openings are not to be larger than 2 inches per side.
It should be twisted and barbed selvage at top and bottom
It must be securely fastened to rigid metal or reinforced concrete.
It must reach within 2 inches of hard ground or paving.
On soft ground, it must reach below surface deep enough to compensate for shifting
soil or sand.
2) Barbed wire fence
Standard barbed wire is twisted, double-strand, 12-gauge wire with 4 point barbs
spaces in an equal distance apart.
Barbed wire fencing should not be less than 7 feet high excluding top guard.
Barbed wire fencing must be firmly affixed to posts not more than 6 feet apart.
As a standard, the distance between strands must not exceed 6 inches at least one wire
will be interlaced vertically and midway between posts.
3) Concertina wire fence
Standard concertina barbed wire is commercially manufactured wire coil of high
strength steel barbed wire clipped together at intervals to form a cylinder.
Opened concertina wire is 50 feet long and 3 feet in diameter.
Perimeter Barrier Opening
Gates and Doors - when not in use and controlled by guards, gates and doors in the
perimeter should be locked and frequently inspected by guards. Locks should be changed from
time to time and should be covered under protective locks and key control.
Side-walk-elevators - these provide access to areas within the perimeter barrier and
should be locked and guarded.
Utilities Opening - sewers, air intakes, exhaust tunnels and other utility openings which
penetrate the barrier and which have cross sectional areas of 96 square inches or more should
be protected by bars, grills, water filled traps or other structural means providing equivalent
protection to that portion of the perimeter barriers.
Clear Zones - an obstructed area or a clear zone should be maintained on both sides
of the perimeter barrier. A clear zone of 20 feet or more is desirable between the barriers and
exterior structures and natural covers that may provide concealment for assistance to a person
seeking unauthorized entry.
Additional Protective Measures
Top Guard - additional overhang of barbed wire placed on vertical perimeter fences
upward and outward with a 45 degree angle with 3 to 4 strands of barbed wires spaced 6 inches
apart. This increases the protective height and prevents easy access.
Guard Control stations - this is normally provided at main perimeter entrances to
secure areas located out-of-doors, and manned by guards on full-time basis. Sentry station
should be near a perimeter for surveillance at the entrance.
Tower Guard - this is a house-like structure above the perimeter barriers. The higher the
tower, the more visibility it provides. It gives a psychological unswerving effect to violators. By and
large guard towers, whether permanent or temporary, must have a corresponding support force in
the event of need. Towers as well as guard control stations should have telephones, intercoms,
174
and if possible two-way radios connected to security headquarters or office to call for reserves in
the event of need.
Barrier Maintenance - fencing barriers and protective walls should always be regularly
inspected by security. Any sign or attempts to break in should be reported for investigation.
Destruction of fence or sections thereof should be repaired immediately and guard vigilance
should be increased.
Protection in Depth - in large open areas or ground where fencing or walling is
impractical and expensive, warning signs should be conspicuously placed. The depth itself is
protection reduction of access roads, and sufficient notices to warn intruders should be done. Use
of animals, as guards and intrusion device, can also be good as barriers.
Signs and notices - Control signs should be erected where necessary in the
management of unauthorized ingress to preclude accidental entry. Signs should be plainly visible
and legible from any approach and in an understood language or dialect.
What is Protective Lighting?
The idea that lighting can provide improve protection for people and facilities is as old as
civilization. Protective lighting is the single most cost-effective deterrent to crime because it
creates a psychological deterrent to the intruders.
Types of Protective Lighting
1. Continuous lighting - the most familiar type of outdoor security lighting, this is designed
to provide two specific results: glare projection or controlled lighting. It consists of a series
of fixed luminaries at range to flood a given area continuously during the hours of
darkness.
Glare projection type- it is being used in prisons and correctional institutions to
illuminate walls and outside barriers.
Controlled lighting- it is generally employed where, due to surrounding property
owners, nearby highways or other limitations, it is necessary for the light to be more
precisely focused.
2. Standby lighting - it is designed for reserve or standby use or to supplement continuous
systems. A standby system can be most useful to selectively light a particular area in an
occasional basis.
3. Movable or Portable lighting - this system is manually operated and is usually made up
of movable search or floodlights that can be located in selected or special locations which
will require lighting only for short period of time.
4. Emergency lighting - this system is used in times of power failure or other emergencies
when other systems are inoperative.
General Types of Lighting Sources
Listed below are the general lighting sources that are mostly used in providing indoor or
outdoor lighting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Incandescent lamp - it is the least expensive in terms of energy consumed and has
the advantage of providing instant illumination when the switch is on.
Mercury vapor lamp - it is considered more efficient that the incandescent and used
widespread in exterior lighting. This emits a purplish-white color, caused by an electric
current passing through a tube of conducting and luminous gas.
Metal halide - it has similar physical appearance to mercury vapor but provides a
light source of higher luminous efficiency and better color rendition.
Fluorescent - this provides good color rendition, high lamp efficiency as well as long
life. However, it cannot project light over long distance and thus are not desirable as flood
type lights.
High-pressure sodium vapor - this has gained acceptance for exterior lighting of
parking areas, roadways, buildings and commercial interior installations. Constructed on
the same principle as mercury vapor lamps, they emit a golden white to light pink color
and this provide high lumen efficiency and relatively good color rendition.
Types of Lighting Equipment

Three types of lighting equipment are generally used or associated with security lighting.
These are:
175
1.
Floodlights - These can be used to accommodate most outdoor security lighting

needs, including the illumination of boundaries, fences and buildings and for the
emphasis of vital areas or particular buildings.
2.
Street lights - This lighting equipment received the most widespread notoriety for its
value in reducing crime.
3.
Search lights - These are highly focused incandescent lamp and are designed to
pinpoint potential trouble spots.
4.
Fresnel lights - These are wide beam units, primary used to extend the illumination
in long, horizontal strips to protect the approaches to the perimeter barrier. Fresnel
projects a narrow, horizontal beam that is approximately 180 degrees in the horizontal
and from 15 to 30 degrees in the vertical plane.
What are Protective Alarms?
Protective alarm is one of the important barriers in security. It assists the security in
detecting, impeding or deterring potential security threat in the installation. Basically, its function is
to alert the security personnel for any attempt of intrusion into a protected area, building or
compound. Once an intruder tampers the circuitry, the beam or radiated waves of the alarm
system, it will activate an alarm signal.
On the other hand, the use of communication equipment in the installation helps security
in upgrading its operational efficiency and effectiveness.
Three Basic Parts of Alarm System

1.
2.
3.
Sensor or trigger device - it emits the aural or visual signals or both.

Transmission line - a circuit which transmit the message to the signaling apparatus.
Enunciator/annunciator - it is the signaling system that activates the alarm.
Types of Protective Alarm System

1. Central Station System - a type of alarm where the control station is located outside the
plant or installation. When the alarm is sounded or actuated by subscriber, the central
station notifies the police and other public safety agencies.
2. Proprietary system - centralized monitor of the proprietary alarm system is located in
the industrial firm itself with a duty operator. In case of alarm, the duty operator calls
whatever is the primary need; firefighters, police, an ambulance or a bomb disposal unit.
3. Local Alarm This system consist of ringing up a visual or audible alarm near the object
to be protected. When an intruder tries to pry a window, the alarm thereat goes off.
4. Auxiliary alarm - company-owned alarm systems with a unit in the nearest police station
so that in case of need, direct call is possible. The company maintains the equipment and
lines both for the company and those in the police, fire and other emergency agencies by
special arrangement. Radio, landlines, or cell phones can avail of the auxiliary system.
Kinds of Alarms
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Audio Detection Device - it will detect any sound caused by attempted force entry. A
supersonic microphone speaker sensor is installed in walls, ceilings and floors of the
protected area.
Vibration Detection Device - it will detect any vibration caused by attempted force
entry. A vibration sensitive sensor is attached to walls, ceilings or floors of the protected
area.
Metallic foil or wire - it will detect any action that moves the foil or wire. An
electrically charge strips of tinfoil or wire is used in the doors, windows or glass surfaces
of the protected area.
Laser Beam Alarm - a laser emitter floods a wall or fencing with a beam so that
when this beam is disturbed by a physical object, an alarm is activated.
Photoelectric or Electric Eye Device - an invisible/visible beam is emitted and
when this is disturbed or when an intruder breaks contact with the beam, it will activate
the alarm.
What is Protective Lock and Key Control?
176
Lock is one of the most widely used physical security devices in the asset protection
program of an installation. It complements other physical safeguards of the installation against
any possible surreptitious entry. However, the owner of the installation or his security officer
needs to understand the weaknesses and strength of each type of lock including the door,
window or walls to be used to achieve maximum benefit from its application. This is because
highly skilled burglars more often concentrate on the lock and its surrounding mechanism in order
to make a forcible entry. It is for this obvious reasons that locks are considered as delaying
devices which can not really stop a determine intruder from destroying the lock just to launch an
attack. Hence, knowledge of the basic principles of locking systems will enable the installation
owner or the security officer to evaluate any lock and determine its quality and effectiveness in a
particular application.
What is a Lock?
A lock is defined as a mechanical, electrical, hydraulic or electronic device designed to
prevent entry into a building, room, container or hiding place.
Types of Locks
1. Key-operated mechanical lock - it uses some sort of arrangement of internal physical
barriers (wards tumblers) which prevent the lock from operating unless they are properly
aligned. The key is the device used to align these internal barriers so that the lock may be
operated.
Three (3) Types of Key-operated Lock
Disc or wafer tumbler mechanism
Pin tumbler mechanism
Lever tumbler mechanism
2. Padlock - a portable and detachable lock having a sliding hasp which passes through a
staple ring and is then made fasten or secured.
3. Combination lock - instead of using the key to align the tumblers, the combination
mechanism uses numbers, letters or other symbols as reference point which enables an
operator to align them manually.
4. Code-operated lock - a type of lock that can be opened by pressing a series of
numbered button in the proper sequence.
5. Electrical lock - a type of lock that can be opened and closed remotely by electrical
means.
6. Card-operated lock - a type of lock operated by a coded card.
Types of keys
1. Change key - a specific key, which operates the lock and has a particular combination of
cuts which match the arrangement of the tumblers in the lock.
2. Sub-master key - a key that will open all the lock within a particular area or grouping in a
given facility.
3. Master key - a special key capable of opening a series of lock.
4. Grand Master key - a key that will open everything in a system involving two or more
master key groups.
Key Control
Once an effective key control has been installed, positive control of all keys must be
gained and maintained. This can be accomplished only if it is established in conjunction with the
installation of new locking devices. The following methods can be used to maintain effective key
control;
1.
Key cabinet- a well-constructed cabinet will have to be procured. The cabinet will
have to be of sufficient size to hold the original key to every lock in the system. It should
be secured at all times.
2.
Key record- some administrative means must be set up to record code numbers and
indicates to whom keys to specific locks have been issued.
3.
Inventories- periodic inventories will have to be made of all duplicate and original
keys in the hands of the employees whom they have been issued.
4.
Audits- in addition to periodic inventory, an unannounced audit should be made of all
key control records and procedures by a member of management.
177
5.
Daily report- a daily report should be made to the person responsible for key control
from the personnel department indicating all persons who have left or will be leaving the
company. In the event that a key has been issued, steps should be initiated to insure that
the key is recovered.
What is a Security Cabinet?

The final line of defense at any facility is in the high security storage where papers,
records, plans or cashable instrument, precious metals or other especially valuable assets are
protected. These security containers will be of a size and quantity, which the nature of the
business dictates.
In protecting [property, it is essential to recognize that protective containers are designed
to secure against burglary or fire. Each type of equipment has a specialized function and it will
depend on the owner of the facility which type ha is going to use.
Three (3) Types of Security Cabinet
1.
Safe - a metallic container used for the safekeeping of documents or small items in
an office or installation. Safe can be classified as either robbery or burglary resistance
depending upon the use and need.
Its weight must be at least 750 lbs. And should be anchored to a building structure.
Its body should at least one inch thick steel.
2.
Vault - heavily constructed fire and burglar resistance container usually a part of the
building structure used to keep and protect cash, documents and negotiable instruments.
Vaults are bigger than safe but smaller than a file room.
The vault door should be made of steel at least 6 inches in thickness.
The vault walls, ceiling, floor reinforce concrete at least 12 inches in thickness.
The vault must be resistive up to 6 hours.
3.
File room - a cubicle in a building constructed a little lighter than a vault but of bigger
size to accommodate limited people to work on the records inside.
The file room should at most be 12 feet high.
It must have a watertight door and at least fire proof for one hour.
Control of Personnel in the Physical Facility

In every installation, the use of protective barriers, security lighting, communication and
electronic hardware provides physical safeguards but these are insufficient to maximize the effort
of the guard force. A control point must be established for positive personnel identification and
check system. This is to insure that only those persons who have the right and authority will be
given the necessary access to the area.
The most practical and generally accepted system of personnel identification is the use of
identification cards badges or passes. Generally speaking, this system designates when and
where and how identification cards should be displayed, and to whom. This helps security
personnel eliminate the risk of allowing the access of unauthorized personnel within the
establishments.
2 Types of Personnel Identification
1.
2.
Personal recognition
Artificial recognition- identification cards, passes, passwords, etc.
Use of Pass System

1.
Single pass system - the badge or pass coded for authorization to enter specific
areas is issued to an employee who keeps it in his possession until his authorization is
terminates.
2.
Pass exchange system - an exchange takes place at the entrance of each
controlled area. Upon leaving the personnel surrenders his badge or passes and retrieve
back his basic identification.
3.
Multiple pass system - this provides an extra measure of security by requiring that
an exchange take place at the entrance of each restricted area.
178
Visitors Movement Control

Security should establish proper methods of establishing the authority for admission of
visitors as well as the limitation thereat. This security measure would depend on the sensibility of
the installation, but could include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visitors logbook All visitors to any facility should be required to identify them
selves and should be given a visitors ID by the security. Visitors logbook should be filled
up with the named of visitors, nature and duration of visit.
Photograph - taking of photographs should also be considered. Extreme caution
must be exercised in areas where classified information is displayed to preclude
unauthorized taking of pictures of the installation. If a visitor has camera and it is
prohibited to take picture, said camera should be left in the care of security with
corresponding receipt.
Escort - If possible visitors should be escorted by the security to monitor their activity
within the establishment and guide them where to go.
Visitor entrances - separate access for visitors and employees of the establishment
should be provided.
Time- traveled - If there is a long delay or time lapse between the departure and
arrival, the visitors maybe required to show cause for the delay.
Package Movement Control

Every facility must establish a system for the control of package entering or leaving the
premises. However, desirable it might seem it is simply unrealistic to suppose that a blanket rule
forbidding packages either in or out would be workable. Such a rule would be damaging to the
employee morale and, in many cases, would actually work against the efficient operation in the
facility. Therefore, since the transporting of packages through the portals is a fact of life, they
must be dealt with in order to prevent theft and misappropriation of company properties. Thus;
1.
No packages shall be authorized to be brought inside the industrial installation,
offices and work area without proper authority. This basic precept help reduce if not
eliminate pilferage, industrial espionage or sabotage.
2.
Outgoing packages carried by personnel should be closely inspected and those in
vehicles should also be checked as many pilfered items are hidden in the surface of the
vehicles leaving the compound.
3.
Any personnel/visitor entering the installation with a package should deposit the
same to the security and in return receives a numbered tag, which he/she will use in
claiming his/her package upon departing.
Control of Vehicle in the Installation
Vehicular traffic within the boundaries of any facility must be carefully controlled for safety
as well as to control the transporting of pilfered goods from the premises. Thus
1.
Privately owned vehicle of personnel/visitor should be registered and are subject to
the identification and admittance procedure.
2.
Vehicles should be subjected for search at the entrance and exit of the installation.
3.
All visitors with vehicle should provide the security as to the complete details of their
duration of stay, person to be visited, and other information.
4.
All vehicles of visitors should be given a sign/sticker to be placed on the windshield.
5.
Traffic warning signs should be installed in all entrances in order to guide the visitors
in their destination as well to provide them with the necessary safety precautions while
they are inside the installation.
6.
Security personnel must constantly supervise parking areas and make frequent spots
searches of vehicles found there.
Building Access Control
At any physical barrier, a security system must posses the ability to distinguish among
authorized persons, unauthorized visitors, and other unauthorized persons. This is to assist the
security personnel protects sensitive are and information within the installation. Appropriate
warning signs should be posted at the building perimeter. Special restricted entry facilities to
public access should be provided. This will be dependent on the degree of security needed for
the protection of property, activity and other processes within the building. A clear-cut policy on
the access control should be disseminated to all personnel of the installation.
PERSONNEL SECURITY
179
Personnel Security includes all the security measures designed to prevent unsuitable
individuals or persons of doubtful loyalty to the government, from gaining access to classified
matter or to any security facility, and to prevent appointment, or retention as employees of such
individuals,
The Security Chain: Personnel Security is the weakest link in the security chain. This
weakness can best be minimized or eliminated by making init personnel security conscious
through good training program. Security depends upon the action of the individuals. The superior
must instruct his subordinates so that they will know exactly what security measures to take in
every instance, a safe will not lock itself. An individual must be properly instructed and must do
the locking.
Control of Personnel
Access to restricted Areas can be partially controlled by fences, gates and other
physical means, but the individual working in the area is the key to the bringing out of classified
matter to unauthorized personnel. Written information does not have the power of speech. Only
the individual has knowledge of this written information can pass it to an unauthorized personnel
if he unguardedly talks about information.
What is Personnel Security Investigation?
It is an inquiry into the character, reputation, discretion and loyalty of individual in order to
determine a persons suitability to be given security clearance.
Types of Personnel Security Investigation (PSI)

National Agency Check (NAC). This is an investigation of an individual made upon the
basis of written information supplied by him in response to official inquiry, and by reference to
appropriate national agencies. It is simply a check of the files and record of national agencies.
The national agencies checked under this type of investigation are the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
National Intelligence Coordinating Agency (NICA)

National Bureau of Investigation (NBI)
ISAAFP or J2 Division, GHQ AFP
CIDG PNP Camp Crame., etc.
Local Agency Check (LAC) This type of investigation consist of the first type plus
written inquiries sent to appropriate local government agencies, former employees, references
and schools listed by the person under investigation. The local agencies normally check besides
the past employment, schools and references are the following:
1. Place of the locality where the individual is a resident.
2. Mayor, Police, Fiscal, Judge of the locality where the individual is a resident.
Background Investigation (BI) This is more comprehensive investigation than the NAC
or the NAC and LAC. A through and complete investigation of all or some of the circumstances or
aspects of a persons life is conducted.
This type of personnel Security Investigation may either be a complete (CBI) or a partial
Background Investigation (PBI).
1. Complete Background Investigation Consist of the investigation of the background of
a person, particularly all the circumstances of his personal life.
2. Partial Background Investigation Consist of the investigation of the background of an
individual but limited only to some of the circumstances of his personal life which are
deemed pertinent to the investigation. Normally, the request for the investigation will
indicate the specific personal circumstances to be covered. This type of BI is also used to
further develop questionable information contained in another investigation report.
Factors considered in Background Investigation.
180
1. Loyalty faithful allegiance to the country, government and its duly constituted authority.
2. Integrity- uprightness in character, soundness of moral principles, freedom from moral
delinquencies, ore more simply stated-honesty.
3. Discretion- the ability of tendency to act or decide with prudence; the habit of wise
judgment or simply stated- good judgment
4. Moral- distinctive identifying qualities which serve as an index to the essential or intrinsic
nature of a person; his outward manifestation, personal traits or moral habits.
5. Character- the sum of the traits that serves as an index of the essential intrinsic nature of
a person. It is the aggregate of distinctive mental and moral qualities that have been
impressed by nature, education and habit upon the individual.
6. Reputation- opinion or estimation in which one is generally held. It is what one reported
to be, whereas character is what a person is.
Motives that cause people to be disloyal
1. Revenge- a real or fancied wrong can create a hatred which will stop at nothing to obtain
revenge of the offender. Hatred wraps the sense of moral values until the hater will go to
any lengths, even betrayal of his country, to avenge himself on the person or class of
people hated.
2. Material Gain- some people are so avid for material gain that they will stop at nothing to
achieve this end.
3. Personal Prestige- this motivation applies to those whose main desire is for powerpower over others-to prove to the world what leaders they are. However, their desire for
power makes them especially vulnerable to subversion.
4. Friendship through close attachment to another person, many people, otherwise of
high integrity, will do things inimical to their countrys interest.
5. Ideological Beliefs- If a person holds inimical to their country, they are of course
vulnerable to approach by subversive groups of agents.
THE GUARD FORCE AND GUARD SYSTEM
The security guard force is the key element in the overall security system of a plant or
installation. Its basic mission is to protect all the property within the limits of the facility boundaries
and protect employees and other persons on the installation.
Security Guard Defined
Sometimes called private security guard or watchman shall include any person who offers
or renders personal service to watch or secure either a residence or business establishment or
both for hire or compensation, and with a license to exercise profession.
Security Guard Force
It is a group of force selected men, trained or grouped into functional unit for the purpose
of protecting operational processes from those disruption which would impeded efficiency or halt
operation at a particular plant, facility, installation or special activity
Types of Security Guard Forces
1. Private Security Agency - any person, association, partnership, firm or private
corporation, who contracts, recruits, trains, furnishes or post any security guard, to do its
functions or solicit individual s, business firms, or private, public or government-owned or
controlled corporations to engage his/its service or those of his/its security guards, for
hire commission or compensation.
2. Company Security Force - A security force maintained and operated any private
company/ corporation for its own security requirements only.
3. Government Security Unit - a security unit maintained and operated by any government
entity other than military and/a police, which is established and maintained for the
purpose of securing the office or compound and/or extension such government entity.
Typical Structure of a Security Organization
The security force of any installation must be organized in accordance with the principles
of responsibility and authority. Each personnel must be assigned to a position that corresponds to
his experience, skills, training and knowledge. This is to carry out different functions efficiently
and effectively and thus insures smooth flow of the organization.
181
The security positions may be classified into the following:

1. Office of the General Manager/Security Director
The office of the General Manager/Security Director is vested the authority and
responsibility of running the security force by authority of the President of the
Company/Corporation.
The General Manager/Security Director is directly responsible to the President of
the Company/Corporation in the operations and administration of the security
force/
He is the principal adviser to the president on matters involving security
operations, administration of the security force.
He is the overall head of both various staff departments and field units where he
may delegate corresponding authority commensurate to their assigned
responsibility.
He implements policies promulgated by the policy making body and executed by
the President.
He directs controls and supervises all offices and field units of the force in their
respective assigned tasks.
He performs other functions as directed by the President of the
Company/Corporation.
2. Office of the Executive secretary of the General Manager
He is the principal administrative assistant to the General Manager/Security
Director.
He prepares communications initiated by the General Manager/Security Director.
He maintains records of scheduled conferences, appointments and other
engagements and advises the GM/SD of such activities.
He records and checks outgoing communications signed by the GM/SD as to its
completeness (attachments to be considered) as well as to ensure the timely
dispatch to the addressee through the administrative section.
To perform other duties as directed by the General Manager/Security Director.
3. Office of the Assistant General Manager/Security Executive Director
The Security Executive Director is the Assistant Manger of the Security Force
and takes the Operational and Administrative Management of the security force
in the absence of the GM/SD
He is directly responsible to the GM/SD
He performs other duties as directed by GM/SD
4. Office of the Human Resources and Administrative Manager/Staff Director for
Personnel and Administration
The principal staff assistant to the General Manager/Security Director for
planning and supervising matters or activities pertaining to personnel management and
miscellaneous administrative functions such as:
Personnel Strengths
Replacement
Discipline, Law and Order
Morale and Personnel Services
Personnel Procedures
Interior Management
Personnel Adviser
5. Office of the Operations Manager/Staff Director for Operations

This office is the principal staff on Operations, training, intelligence and
investigation.
6. Office of the Finance
This office is principally concerned with budgeting, finance, reports control and program
review and analysis. Exercises supervision over the management engineering activities
182
of the company and the accounting office. Renders advice, assistance and guidance to
GM/SD on financial management. Specific duties and functions of the Finance Office are:
Accounting
Credit and collection
Bookkeeping
Billing
Payroll
Disbursing
7. Office of the Logistic Manager

This office is in charge with the following:
Coordinates plan and supervise the implementation of directive and guidance
determines divisional responsibility and evaluates in logistical planning and
related planning programs.
Develops, administers, and coordinates research and development on logistical
matters.
Collects and computes statistical data on logistical matters.
Recommends logistics budget policy including budget planning.
Prepares estimates and/or requirements to ensure that logistical plans support
for corporate plans.
Performs necessary program and fiscal administration.
Supervise all matters pertaining to supply.
Determine the organization, allocation of service personnel
Plans for maintenance and repair of supplies and equipment.
8. Office of the Inspectorate and Special Projects (Special Staff)

This office assists the General Manger in inquiring into, and reports upon matters
pertaining to the performance of the different staff, units, towards the attainment
of corporate objectives. It also inquires on the state of discipline, efficiency and
economy of the company.
The Inspectorate Staff conducts inspections, investigations and submits reports
to the General Manager. In the performance of its duties and functions, the
General Manger is provided relevant information pertaining to meritorious
conduct and performance of a unit or individual.
This office is also tasked to conduct overt and covert inspections and
investigations and other related services.
9. Office of the Communications Officer
The Communications Officer who is a licensed radio operator is the principal
adviser of the General Manager on communication on matters pertaining to radio
communication.
10. The Detachment Commander/Officer-in-Charge
A Detachment Commander shall command and responsible for a certain detachment,
with fifteen (15) or more security personnel under him. He is directly responsible to the
Security Manager of the installation.
He prepares and executes the security plan of his Detachment in relation to the
security requirements of the establishment being guarded.
He is responsible for the enforcement and implementation of Rules and
Regulations/Policies.
He receives instructions from the Security Manager and implements the same as
required
He has full operational and administrative control of all his units to include his
assistant and shift-in-charge/supervisor.
183
He conducts inspection of his units and institutes corrective measures on the

spot on those problems he may detect or brought to his attention. If not possible,
he brings the problem to the Security Manager of the establishment.
11. Assistant Detachment Commander
Detachment with more than twenty (20) security personnel assigned may be
provided with an Assistant Detachment Commander who will be the principal
assistant of the Detachment Commander.
In the absence of the Detachment Commander, he performs the duties of the
Detachment Commander.
12. Shift-in-Charge
The Shift-in-Charge shall be responsible to the Detachment Commander as far
as his shift is concerned.
He forms his men at least 30 minute before posting time seeing that all are in
proper uniform and presentable.
He disseminates instructions coming form his Detachment Commander/OIC or
those relayed to him by his counter-part, the outgoing SIC.
He inspects the posts as often as he can to ensure that his men are on the alert
and performing their duties effectively.
He performs other duties as may be directed by the Detachment Commander or
by the ADC.
13. Security Guard on Duty/Post
The Security Guard (SG) on Duty/Post must always carry his license to practice
his profession, Xerox copy of the firearms license assigned to him, and his duty
detail order, authorizing him to carry his issued firearm within his area of
jurisdiction.
If the Security Guard is manning a fixed post especially entrance or exit points,
he must maintain a guards logbook and enters in the same logbook all
events/passages of VIPs vehicles and inspections or visits of Security
Manager/Director of the Client/Firm.
Guards must observe and apply religiously the provisions of the Code of Ethics,
Code of Conduct, and the General Orders of the Security Guard when on post.
He may perform special task as may be directed by his shift supervisor, DC and
or ADC like control of visitors, inspections of bags of persons coming in and
going out of the establishment, vehicle cargoes, or prevents the intrusion of
unauthorized person in a particular area, etc.
Security Guards Professional Conduct and Ethics
Security Guards Creed: As a Security Guard, my fundamental duty is to protect lives
and properties and maintained order within the vicinity or place of duty, protect the interest of my
employer and our clients and the security and stability of our government and country without
compromise and prejudice, honest in my action, words and thought, and do my best to uphold the
principle: MAKADIOS, MAKABAYAN AT MAKATAO.
Ethical Standard: As security guard/detective, his fundamental duty is to serve the
interest or mission of his agency in compliance with the contract entered into with the clients or
customers of the agency he is to serve thus,
1.
He shall be honest in thoughts and deeds both in his official actuation,

obeying the laws of the land and the regulations prescribed by his agency and those
establish by the company he is suppose to serve.
2.
He shall not reveal any confidential matter committed to him as a security
guard and such other matters imposed upon him by law.
3.
He shall act all times with decorum and shall not permit personal feelings,
prejudices and undue friendship to influence his actuation in the performance of his
official functions.
4.
He shall not compromise with criminal and other lawless elements to the
prejudice of the customers or clients and shall assist government relentless drive
against lawlessness and other forms of criminality.
184
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
He shall carry out his assigned duties as required by law to the best of his
ability and shall safeguard life and property of the establishment he is assigned to.
He shall wear his uniform, badge, patches and insignia properly as a symbol
of public trust and confidence as an honest and trustworthy security guard, watchman
and private detective.
He shall keep his allegiance first to the government he is assigned to serve
with loyalty and utmost dedication.
He shall diligently and progressively familiarize himself with the rules and
regulations lay down by his agency and those of the customers or clients.
He shall at all times be courteous, respectful and salute his superior officers,
government officials and officials of the establishment where he is assigned and the
company he is supposed to serve.
He shall report for duty always in proper uniform and neat in his appearance
He shall learn at heart and strictly observe the laws and regulations
governing the use of firearm.
Code of Conduct: The watchman should abide by the following code of conduct:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
He shall carry with him at all times during his tour of duty his license identification
card and duty detail order with an authority to carry firearms.
He shall not use his license and privileges to the prejudice of the public, the client
or customer and his agency.
He shall not engage in any unnecessary conversation with anybody except in the
discharge of his work and shall at all times keep himself alert during his tour of duty.
He shall not read newspapers, magazines, books, etc., while actually performing
his duties.
He shall not drink any intoxicating liquor immediately before and during his tour
of duty.
He shall know the location of the alarm box near his post and sound the alarm in
case of fire or disorder.
He shall know how to operate any fire extinguishers at his post.
He shall know the location of the telephone and/or telephone number of the
police precincts as well as the telephone number of the fire stations in the locality.
He shall immediately notify the police in case of any sign of disorder, strike, riot
or any serious violations of the law.
He or his group or guards shall not participate or integrate any disorder, strike,
riot or any serious violations of the law.
He shall assist the police in the preservation and maintenance of peace and
order and in the protection of life, property/having in mind that the nature of his
responsibilities is similar to that of the latter.
He shall familiarize himself with the Private Security Agency Law (RA5487) as
amended, and the PNP SAGSD implementing rules and regulations.
When issued a pass he should not lend his pass to anybody.
He shall always in proper uniform and shall always carry with him his basic
requirements, and equipment such as writing notebook, ball pen, nightstick (baton)
and/or radio. He shall endeavor at all times to merit and be worthy of the trust and
confidence of the agency he represents and the client he serves.
The 11 General Orders (GOs)

1. To take charge of this post and all companies property in view and protect/preserve
the same with utmost diligence.
2. To walk during tour of duty in military manner, keeping always in the alert and
observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing.
3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.
4. To repeat all calls from post more distant from the guardhouse where I am station.
5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.
6. T o receive, obey and pass out to the relieving guard all order from company officers
or officials, supervisors post in charge or shift leaders.
7. To talk to no one except in the line of duty
8. To sound or call the alarm in case of fire or disorder
9. To call the superior officer in any case not covered by instructions.
10. To salute all company officials, superiors in the agency, ranking public officials and
commission officer of the AFP and officers of the PNP.
11. To be especially watchful at night and during the time of challenging to challenge all
persons on or near my post and to allow no one to pass or loiter without proper
authority.
185
Selection of Guards
Republic Act Number 5487 and its implementing rules and regulations prescribed the
minimum requirements for guards to be able to secure a license to exercise profession as a
security guard, private detective, security officer and security consultant.
General Requisites in the Security Profession
a.
b.
c.
d.
Filipino Citizen
Physically and mentally fit
Good moral character
Must not posses any disqualification
General Disqualification
a.
Dishonorably discharge from the service in the PNP/AFP or any private government
entities.
b.
Physically or mentally unfit
c.
Conviction of a crime
d.
Addicted to drugs or alcohol dummy of a foreigner
e.
Elective or appointive government official
Basic Qualifications of an Agency Operator/Manager
In addition to the general qualifications, an operator should be:
1.
2.
At least 25 years of age

Commissioned officer, inactive or retired from AFP or PNP or a graduate of Industrial
Security Management with adequate training and experience in the security business.
Basic Qualification of a Security Consultant

In addition to the general qualifications, a consultant should be:
1.
Holder of Master Degree in Criminology, MPA, MNSA, Industrial Management or

LL.B.
2.
Must have at least ten (10) years experience in the operation and management of
security business.
Basic Qualifications of a Security Officer:
In addition to the general qualifications, a security officer, should be:
1.
2.
3.
At least graduated from Security Officers Training Course

A retired personnel in the PNP/AFP
Must not posses any of the disqualification.
Basic Qualifications of a Private Detective

In addition to the general qualification, a detective should posses any of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
BS Criminology Graduate
LL.B. holder
Graduate of a Criminal Investigation Course
Advance ROTC graduate
Basic Qualification of a Security Guard

In addition to the general qualifications , a security guard should1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Be at least high school graduate

Be at least 18 years of age but not more than 50 years old
Undergone pre-licensing training course
Passed a neuropsychiatry examination.
Be locally cleared with PNP or NBI
Desirable Qualities of Security Guards
186
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Alertness- A good guard must be alert in spotting violators. This can be attained by
being watchful, dedicated and diligence.
Judgment- sound and good judgment is more than the use of common sense. It is
the arriving at wise and timely decision.
Confidence- it is the state of being sure; a state of the mind free from doubt or
misgivings. This attribute includes faith in oneself and in his abilities, which is attained by
job knowledge. Thorough and proper training plus good supervision instills confidence.
Physical fitness- security work is strenuous and demanding. Physical conditioning is
essential if he is to be a dependable guard.
Tactfulness- ability of the guard to deal with others successfully without offending. In
short, he can be firm but pleasant.
Self-control- ability to take hold of oneself regardless of a provoking situation. With
self-control, the guard will do his work without being angry and the situation will be on
hand.
Interest, loyalty, responsible and trustworthy, is also important attributes of a
reliable guard.
Licenses in the Security Profession

1. License to Operate- before a Private Security Agency (PSA) can operate; it has to secure
a License to Operate (LTO) categorized as either temporary or regular. A temporary
license is issued by the PNP thru Civil Security Croup Directorate after the applicant
/licensee should have complied with all the requirements while it has less than two
hundred guards. A Regular license to operate is issued to the PSA once it is qualified of
having two hundred (200) or more license security guard in its employ duly posted.
Regular license is renewable every two (2) years.
2. Security Guard License- before a security guard can practice his profession; he shall
possess valid security license. The use of expired license is not allowed. In case of doubt,
licenses may be verified at the PNP SAGSD whether valid or fake.
3. Firearms license- all firearms of the security agency should be covered with firearms
license issued by the PNP through its Firearms Explosive Division under the Civil
Security Group, renewable every two years. No duplication of two or more firearms with
the same make and serial number shall be covered by one license.
Firearms and Weapons Authorized for Used of the Security Guard While on Duty
1.
Handguns/Low-powered (cal. 22 and cal.38) not exceeding one FA for every two
guards employed.
2.
Shotguns (not bigger than 12 gauge)
3.
High-powered- when the agency is operating in areas where there is upsurge of
lawlessness and criminality as determined by the Chief PNP.
Guards Uniforms, Equipment and Paraphernalia
1. Set of Uniforms for Security Personnel
Headgear- pershing cap for men and 2 ply cap for women
Service Bush Jacket- intended for Directorial and Staff officers
Service shirt
Service trouser
Service belt
Footwear
2. Color of Uniforms
Private Security Agency- navy blue (upper and lower)
Company Security Forces- light blue/light gray for upper and navy blue for lower
Government Security Forces- white for upper and navy blue for lower
3. Ornaments and Patches
National badge
Cap device
Regulation buckle
Collar device
Name cloth
Agency/unit name cloth
187
4. Equipment and Paraphernalia

Leather pistol belt with regulation buckle
Holster, black leather for pistol
Night stick with horizontal handle
Whistle with lanyard
Handheld radio
Pocket notebook and ball pens
DOCUMENT AND INFORMATION SECURTY
The leakage of document and information cost government, business and industry alike,
billion of pesos. A rival company or an enemy agent might use an illegally obtain document and
information for their own advantage. For this reason, a comprehensive and information security
program is very essential to the installation in order to focus freely on the attainment of its goals
and objectives.
Basis of Document, Information, and Communication Security
Security of documents and information is based on the premise that the government has
the right and duty to protect official papers from unwarranted and indiscriminate disclosure. In
answer to this problem, Malacanang, Manila dated August 14, 1964 entitled Promulgating rules
governing security of classified matters in Government Officers was promulgated in order to
safeguard our secrets as secrets.
There are various laws likewise effecting security of officials papers of the government,
namely, appropriate articles of the Revised Penal Code as amended and commonwealth Act 616
as amended. Any violations of the provisions of Memorandum Circular No. 78 shall be dealt
administrative proceedings without prejudice to offense under provisions soft the cited penal
statutes. The unauthorized publication of any classified information shall be deemed a violation of
Memorandum Circular No. 78 by the parties responsible thereof.
Standard Rules
The authority and responsibility for the preparation and classification of classified matter
rest exclusively with the originating office.
Classified matter should be classified according to their content and not to the file in
which they are held or of another document to which they refer, except radiograms or telegrams
referring to previously classified radiograms or telegram.
Classification should be made as soon as possible by placing the appropriate marks of
the matter to be classified.
Each individual whose duties allow access to classified matter, or each individual who
possesses knowledge of classified matter while it is in his possession and shall insure that
dissemination of such classified matter is on the need-to-know basis and to property cleared
persons only.
Document Security Systems
Documents Security is that aspect of security which involves the application of security
measures for the proper protection and safeguarding of classified information.
Classification Categories - Official matter which requires protection in the interest of
national security shall be limited to four categories of classification which in descending order of
importance shall carry one of the following designations:
TOP SECRET - SECRET
CONFIDENTIAL - RESTRICTED
In Document and Information Security, a matter includes everything, regardless of its
physical character, or in which information is recorded or embodied. Documents, equipment,
projects, books, reports, articles, notes, letters, drawings, drawings, sketches, plans,
photographs, recordings, machinery, models, apparatus, devices, and all other products or
substances fall within the general term matter. Information, which is transmitted orally, is
considered matter for purposes of security.
188
Security Clearance is the certification by a responsible authority that the person

described is cleared for access to classified matter the appropriate level. Need-to-know is the
principle whereby access to classified matter may only be only given to those persons to whom it
is necessary for the fulfillment of their duties. Persons are not entitled to have access to classified
matter solely by virtue of their status or office. It is a requirement that the dissemination of
classified matters be limited strictly to persons whose official duty requires knowledge or
possession thereof.
Certificated of Destruction is the certification by a witnessing officer that the classified
matters describe therein has been disposed of in his presence, approved destruction methods.
Classified refers to assign information by one of the four classification categories.
Security Clearance refers to the administrative determination that an individual is eligible for
access to classified matter. Compromise means lose of security, which results from an authorized
persons obtaining knowledge of classified matter. Compartmentation is the grant of access to
classified matter only to properly cleaved persons in the performance of their official duties.
Declassify is the removal of security classification from classified matter. Reclassify /
Re grading is the act of changing the assigned classification of matter. Up- grading is the act of
assigning to a matter of higher classification to a classified document.
What are Top Secret Matters?
These are information and material (matter), the unauthorized disclosure of which would
cause exceptionally grave damage to the nation, politically, economically or from a security
aspect. This category is reserve for the nations closest secrets and is to be used with great
reserve.
Classification Authority
The original classification authority for assignment of TOP SECRET classification
rests exclusively with the head of the department. This power may however, be
delegated to authorized offices in instances when the necessity for such arises.
Derivative classification authority for TOP SECRET classification (authority for) may be
granted those officers who are required to give comments or responses to a
communication that necessitates TOP-SECRETS response.
Examples of Top Secret Documents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Very important political documents regarding negotiation for major alliances.

Major governmental projects such as proposal to adjust the nations economy.
Military Police defense class/plans
Capabilities of major successes of Intel services.
Compilations of data individually classified as secret or lower but which collectively
should be in a higher grade.
6. Strategies plan documenting overall conduct of war.
7. Intel documents revealing major Intel production effort permitting an evaluation by
recipients of the success and capabilities of Intel agencies.
8. Major government project like drastic proposals.
What are Secret Matters?
These Information and material (matter), the unauthorized disclosure of which would
endanger national security, cause serious injury to the interest or prestige of the nation or of any
governmental activity or would be of great advantage to a foreign nation.
A secret grading is justified if:
1.
2.
3.
It materially influences a major aspect of military tactics;

It involves a novel principle applicable to existing important projects;
It is sufficiently revolutionary to result in a major advance in existing
techniques or in the performance of existing secret weapons;
4.
It is liable to compromise some other projects so already graded.
Classification Authority Same as TOP SECRET matter.
Examples of Secret Documents
189
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Those that jeopardize or endanger Intel relations of a nation.

Those that compromise defense plans, scientific or technological development.
Those that reveal important intelligence operations.
War plans or complete plans for future war operations not included in top secret.
Documents showing disposition of forces.
New designs of aircraft projections, tanks, radar and other devices.
Troop movement to operational areas.
Hotel plans and estimates
Order of battle info.
What are Confidential Matters?

These are information and material (matter) the unauthorized disclosure of which, while
not endangering the national security, would be prejudicial to the interest or prestige of the nation
or any governmental activity, or would cause administrative embarrassment or unwarranted injury
to an individual or would be of advantage to a foreign nation.
Confidential grading is justified if:
1.
It is a more than a routine modification or logical improvement of existing

materials and is sufficiently advanced to result in substantial improvement in the
performance of existing CONFIDENTIAL weapons.
2.
It is sufficiently important potentially to make it desirable to postpone
knowledge of its value reaching a foreign nation.
3.
It is liable to compromise some other project already so graded.
Classification Authority Any officer is authorized to assign confidential classification to
any matter in the performance of his duties.
Examples of Confidential Documents
1.
2.
3.
4.
Plans of government projects such as roads, bridges, building, etc.

Routine service reports like operations and exercise of foreign power.
Routine intelligence reports.
Certain Personnel records, Staff matters.
What are Restricted Matters?

These are information and material (matter), which requires special protection other than
that determined to be TOP SECRET, SECRET, or CONFIDENTIAL.
Authority to classify shall be the same as for CONFIDENTIAL matter. Reproduction is
authorized. Transmission shall be through the normal dissemination system.
Control of Classified Matters
Custody and accounting of classified matter Heads of departments handling
classified matter shall issue orders designating their respective custodians of classified matter.
Custodian shall:
1. Store all classified matter.
2. Maintain a registry of classified matter showing all classified matter received and to
whom transmitted.
3. Maintain current roster of persons authorized access to classified matter for each
classification in the office.
4. Insure physical security for classified matter.
5. Conduct an inventory of all TOP SECRET matter as specified in paragraph 7 (Memo
Cir Nr 78/196).
6. Upon his relief, account for all TOP SECRET and SECRET matter by inventory and
transmit the same to his successor.
Unauthorized keeping of private records All government personnel are prohibited
from keeping private records, diaries, or papers containing statement of facts or opinions, either
official or personal, concerning matters which are related to or which affects national interest or
security. Also prohibited are the collecting of souvenirs or obtaining for personal use whatsoever
any matter classified in the interest of national security.
190
Dissemination Dissemination of classified matter shall be restricted to

properly
cleared persons whose official duties required knowledge or possession thereof. Responsibility
for the determination of need-to-know rests upon both each individual, who has possession,
knowledge or command control of the information involve, and the recipient.
Disclosures to other departments of classified information originating
from another department
Classified matter originating from another department shall not be disseminated to other
departments without the consent of the originating department.
Release of classified matter outside a department
General Policy. No person in the government shall convey orally, visually or by written
communication any classified matter outside his own department unless such disclosures has
been processed and cleared by the department head or his authorized representative.
Release of classified matter to Congress
Government personnel, when giving oral testimony before Congressional Committee
involving classified matter, shall advice the committee of the classification thereof.
Government personnel called upon to testify shall obtain necessary and prior instruction
from his department head concerning disclosure.
When Congressional members visit government offices, department heads are
authorized to release classified matter which is deemed and adequate response to an
inquiry provided that it is required in the performance of official functions.
Disclosure to Foreign Government or Nationals
1. Its use shall be solely for the purpose for which the classified matter is requested.
2. It shall be treated or handled in accordance with the classified categories of the
originating office.
3. Handling shall be made by security-cleared personnel.
4. Reproduction and dissemination shall not be made without the consent of the department
head.
Disclosure of classified matter for publication
Classified matter shall be released for public consumption only upon the consent of the
department head or his authorized representative. However, in instances where there is a
demand or need for releasing classified information, extreme caution must be exercised to
analyze in detail contents of the classified matter before release. Normally all information are
released through Public Information Officers. Public Information Officers should be assisted in the
analysis of classified information by the Security Officer.
Purpose of Protecting Classified Materials
1.
2.
Deter and impede potential spy

Assist in security investigations by keeping accurate records of the moments of
classified materials.
3.
Enforce the use of Need to Know principle
Categories of Document for Security Purposes
1. Category A
Information which contains reportable time sensitive, order of battle and significant
information.
It should be given priority because it is critical information.
It must be forwarded without delay.
It is critical to friendly operations.
It requires immediate action.
2. Category B
Anything that contains communications, cryptographic documents, or systems that
should be classified as secret and requires special handling.
Higher authorities should declassify it.
191
3. Category C
Other information, which contains something that, could be an intelligence value.
Contains exploitable information regardless of its contents.
Unscreened materials/documents should be categorized as Category C.
4. Category D
No value, yet lower level will classify documents as category D.
No decision must be made at the lower echelon that document has no value. It is the
responsibility of the higher Headquarters.
Three (3) Security Concepts
1.
2.
Personnel are the weakest link in the security chain.

Training is important to make security personnel conscious and realize the value of
document.
3.
Training is necessary for the practice of Need to Know principle.
Rules for Classification of Documents
1.
2.
Documents shall be classified according to their content.

The overall classification of a file or of a group of physically connected therein.
Pages, paragraphs, sections or components thereof may bear different classifications.
Documents separated from file or group shall be handled in accordance with their
individual classification.
3.
Transmittal of documents or endorsements which do not contain classified
information or which contain information classified lower than that of the preceding
element or enclosure shall include a notation for automatic downgrading.
4.
Correspondence, Indexes, receipts, reports of possession transfer or destruction,
catalogs, or accession list shall not be classify if any reference to classified matter does
not disclosed classified information.
5.
Classified matter obtained from other department shall retain the same original
classification.
Protection of Sensitive Information

Proprietary information is information that in some special way relates to the status or
activities of the possessor and over which the possessor asserts ownership. In the business
community, proprietary information relates to the structure, products or business methods of the
organization. It is usually protected in some way against causal or general disclosure.
All proprietary information is confidential, but not all confidential information is proprietary.
For example, confidential personnel data in employee files is not considered as proprietary
although the company treats it as confidential.
Types of Proprietary Information
1. Trade Secrets- this consist of any formula, pattern, device or compilation of information
which is used in ones business and which gives him an opportunity to gain an advantage
over competitors who do not know or us e it. It may be a formula for a chemical
compound a process of manufacturing, treating or preserving materials, a pattern for
machine or device, or a list of customers. It differs from other secret information as to
single or ephemeral events. A trade secret is a process or device for continuous use in
the protection of the business.
2. Patents- this is a grant made by the government to an inventor, conveying or securing to
him the exclusive right to make, use, or sell his invention for term of years.
Primary Distinctions Between Patents
and Trade Secrets
1.
Requirements for obtaining a patent are specific. To qualify for a patent the invention
must be more than novel and useful. It must represent a positive contribution beyond the
skill of the average person.
192
2.
3.
A much lower of novelty is required of a trade secret.

A trade secret remains secret as long as it continues to meet trade secret tests while
the exclusive right to patent protection expires after 17 years.
Proprietary Information Protection Program

Realizing that the most serious threat to trade secrets is the employee, a measure of
protection is often realized through the use of employee agreements which restrict the
employees ability to disclose information without specific authorization to the company. The
following countermeasures may be adopted:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Policy and procedure statements regarding All sensitive information.

Pre and post employment screening and review.
Non-disclosure agreements from employees, vendors, contractors and visitors.
Non-competitive agreements with selected employees.
Awareness programs
Physical security measures
Informed monitoring of routine activities.
COMMUNICATION SECURITY
Communication Security is the protection resulting from the application of various
measures which prevent or delay the enemy or unauthorized persons in gaining information
through our communications. It includes Transmission, Cryptographic and Physical security.
Rules- governing communications security do not in guarantee security, and they do not
attempt to meet every conceivable situation. Communication security rules are a means, not an
ends.
Department heads- are responsible for the maintenance of communication security and
for the promulgation of additional directives as may be necessary to insure proper communication
security control within their jurisdiction.
All communication personnel should have an appreciation of the basic principles of
communication security may result in compromise.
Communication Security Officer - A properly trained and cleared Communication
Security Officer shall be appointed in every Department of the Government handling
cryptographic communication.
TRANSMISSION SECURITY:
Transmission Security is that component of communication security which results from all
measures designed to protect transmission from interception, traffic analysis and imitative
deception.
Communication personnel shall select the means most appropriate to accomplish the
delivery of message in accordance with the specified precedence and security requirements.
Radio Operators shall adhere to the use of correct procedures, circuit discipline and
authentication system as a security measures against traffic analysis, imitative deception and
radio direction finding.
CRYPTOGRAPHIC SECURITY
Cryptographic Security is that component of communication security which results from
the provisions of technically sound crypto-system and their proper use.
CODES AND CIPHERS
Code - a system which uses words as the smallest element like the one below.
Code word
Angel
Fox
Plaintext
we are ready
send additional
Cipher - a system that manipulate one, two, or three characters at a time like:
Cipher
B
C
Plaintext
1
2
193
J
D
3
4
Abbreviation
C: code or cipher
P: Plaintext
K: keyword/ key number
Note: Code and cipher may be used interchangeably to mean the same.
Categories of Cipher
Concealment is the simplest, which means to hide/hidden. For instance:
I WILL DO IT. IF NOT TODAY, THEN TRUST ME. SIGNED SMITH.
message: ( copy out every third word )
Decipher: DO NOT TRUST SMITH
EFDH GORA NQBO PETE YTDS RTOU ZESV ITVE SOWM XNIM CTLK HJEA
Same: copy of the third letter
decipher: DO NOT TRUST SMITH
Example
ADDE DAQD NPCR OOLL TMAT RLOC RATS TKCL MNRA KETI SSTU ARTF
THEE OSET ULCO JEOU TAKE BLFZ IAHF SQUI TIFC ANLL TMZX AEXE
DLGY ZZTI FLOO VWKA TTIM IFTT HATH EEFC ANND FLHA
(Read this by copying out a progressive cipher. Progress 1, 2, 3.)
Decipher: DO NOT TRUST SMITH
Note: The plaintext are concealed by nulls - are meaningless symbol to fill in and separate
plaintext.
Transposition System is another category of cipher. Below is an example.
C: NRUTE RAMOH ALKOL ECNAC
(Everything is written backward)
(Put into 5 letters)
Decipher: Return to base this is the plaintext
P: CANCEL LOKLA HOMAR ETURN
P: CANCEL OKLAHOMA RETURN which means
P: Return to base.
Example
RTRTBS
encipher by droppings every other letter
E U N OAE
C: RTRTBS EUNOAE
then put in four letter code group
C: RTRT BSEU NOAE
Decipher:
P: Return to base
Decipher:
194
P: Charlie will attack 2001

P: CHARLIE WILL ATTACK TWO ONE ZERO ONE
C: charliewillattacktwoonezero
C: char liew illa tack twoo nez roome
Substitution Method - original message elements, letters, numbers or other symbols are
replaced with alternate symbols.
Example 1 - symbols
number of times
j
4
I
)
*
Example 2 -
26
19
16
15
13
c: x y z a b c d e
p: ABCD EFGH
p: stop icebox
c: VWRS LFHERA
Example 3 - Using a keyword/phrase

c: FOURSCOREANDSEVENYEARSAGO
p: abcdexyz
RISK ANALYSIS AND SECURITY HAZARD

What is a Risk?
It is the potential damage or loss of an asset. The level of risk is a combination of two
factors: The value placed on that asset by its owner and the consequence, impact adverse effect
of the loss or damage to that asset and; the likelihood that a specific vulnerability will be exploited
by a particular threat.
What is Risk Management?
It is a process of selecting and implementing security countermeasures to achieve an
acceptable level of risk at an acceptable cost.
What is Risk Analysis?
It is the analysis of risk include examinations of the vulnerability, probability and criticality
of potential threats and include natural and man made risk
What is an Adversary?
An individual, group, organization, or government that conducts activities or has the
intention and capability to conduct activities detrimental to the individual, private or government
entity.
What is Asset?
Any information, facility, material, information, or activity which has a positive value to its
owner whether it is an individual, private or government entity.
What are Countermeasures?
195
An action taken or a physical entity used to reduce or eliminate one or more

vulnerabilities. The cost of possible countermeasures may be monetary, but may also include
non-monetary cost such as reduced operational efficiency, adverse publicity unfavorable working
conditions, and political consequences.
What is Probability?
It is the chance or likelihood that a loss will take place. Indicated by a mathematical
statement concerning the possibility of an event occurring
What is Criticality?
It is the impact of a loss as measured in financial terms. How important it is in terms of
the survival or existence of the organization.
Risk Management Alternatives and Strategies
1. Risk Avoidance- eliminating or removing the risk totally from the business, government,
or industrial environment for which the risk manager has responsibility
2. Risk Reduction- decreasing the risk by minimizing the probability of the potential loss.
The reduction of criminal opportunity is often accomplished by situational crime
[prevention strategies to discourage, deter, or deny criminal incidents.
3. Risk Spreading- spreading the risk through compartmentation or decentralization to limit
the impact (criticality) of the potential loss
4. Risk Transfer- moving the financial impact of the potential loss-over to an insurance
company.
5. Risk Self-assumption- planned assumption and acceptance of the potential risk by
making a deliberate managerial decision of doing nothing about the threat, or setting
aside resources for use in case of a specific loss incident.
SECURITY HAZARDS
Any act or condition which may result in the compromise of information, loss of life, loss
or destruction of property or disruption of the objective of the installation.
Types of Hazards
1. Natural Hazard- these are hazards which arise from natural phenomena. The following
are types of natural hazards or disasters:
Floods caused by typhoons

Earthquakes
Fire (not caused by human action)
Storms (typhoons, cyclones, tornado and hurricane)
Lighting storms
Extreme temperature and humidity
2. Human-Man made Hazards- These are hazards which are the result of a state of mind,
attitude, weaknesses or character traits of one or more persons. They can be acts of
commission or omission, both overt and covert, which can disrupt operation of a plant or
installation. The following are types of human or man made hazards:
Carelessness- accidents and dissatisfaction
Disloyalty-subversion and sabotage
Espionage, pilferage and theft
Vandalism, etc
Sabotage as a Security Hazard
Description of a Saboteur
196
1.
He is the most dangerous foe whom security will have to deal with while planning and
implementing security measures and techniques.
2.
He is an ordinary looking as the next guy but in his mind, he has the training in
deception, knowledgeable in incendiaries, explosives, chemistry, bacteriology, mechanics
and psychology.
3.
He can work alone, in-groups, or simultaneously in several places.
Possible Targets of Saboteur
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armed Forces Installation

Natural resources- mines, forests, farms and farm products
Industries- buildings, power sources, machinery, fuel, etc.
Warehouses depots, communications, public utilities, etc.
Countermeasures Against Sabotage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Use of an efficient, alert and trained guard force.

Use of Physical security aids like barriers, personnel and vehicular control, intrusion
devices, communication systems, and electric aids.
Proper screening of personnel.
Identification and movement control system.
Searches on incoming vehicles.
Safeguarding of classified information.
Designation of restricted areas.
Investigation of breaches of security.
Security education and indoctrination.
Good housekeeping methods.
Effective and compatible emergency planning.
Regular audit.
Continuing background checks.
Espionage as a Security Hazard

Description of an Espionage Agent
1.
He is very dangerous adversary and his skills in deception and his cunning should
never be under estimated.
2.
He is usually a person of extensive training and will be highly effective in gaining the
confidence of people and of extracting information of value to be relayed to his employer
or handler.
3.
Even how well-trained an espionage agent he might be, he is human like the
saboteur and he can be defeated in his own game if proper methods and techniques are
undertaken.
Countermeasures against Industrial Espionage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Careful and complete pre-employment measures designed to control threats of

industrial espionage.
Continuing personnel check on employees and particularly personnel on sensitive
positions even already employed.
Prevention of unauthorized entry to the plant or industrial installation.
Restricting of movement of personnel in the premises of the plant.
Controlled disposal of waste papers including carbons in classified work.
Only properly cleared personnel should handle classified document.
Subversive Activity as a Security Hazard

Threats of Subversive Activity
1. It can be local or national in nature and their mission is to undermine the authority
weaken the organization, and eventually take over. This can be in business or any
activity.
197
2. This can be in the form of rumor mongering, propaganda, undermining morale, and
injecting defeatist attitudes, and other emotional approaches.
3. It is an activity not easy to detect.
Countermeasures to Subversive Activity
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The spreading of rumors, written materials, slogans or any other devices to confuse
the work population and discredit the government should be immediately reported.
Labor and other company unions can be infiltrated so that strikes and slow downs
can be called to disrupt the normal operation of a plant or installation.
Security force should be alerted for person trying to recruit others in organizing
movements for peace, anti-colonials, anti-trade and anti-imperialism.
Employees or outside personnel seeking memberships in paper organizations
should report this activity to security.
Other methods of subversion like united fronts, mob action, terrorism and sabotage
will be done to gain the subversive ends.
Pilferage as a Business Hazard

1.
Pilferage is one of the most annoying and common human hazards which security
has to deal with. This activity if uncontrolled can become financial drain if not a menace to
smooth and orderly operation.
2.
Failure to detect shortage and inaccurate inventories will cause inventory losses,
which may be labeled as pilferage.
Types of Pilferers
1. Casual Pilferer- one who steals due to his inability to resist the unexpected opportunity
and has little fear of detection is no plan or premeditation and he is usually a loner on
the job. The temptation to pick up the article is basically due to poor security measure.
The implication of causal pilfering is the big cumulative cost if it remains unchecked.
2. Systematic Pilferer- one who steals with preconceived plans and takes away any or all
types of items or supplies for economic gain. Pilferers of this kind can be employees or
outsiders of the establishment.
Factors considered in Pilferage
1.
Location of items to be pilfered- the systematic pilferer surveys shopping and store
areas, or through contacts from the firms.
2.
Access to the items- techniques can be from fake documents, bribing of guards,
outsmarting security, creating disturbance and other methods to divert attention while
pilferage goes on.
3.
Removal of item- this can be done as wearing the stolen shoes or shorts,
concealment in body or vehicles, use of false documents, etc. Driver may conceal
pilfered items in his vehicle.
4.
Disposal of items- there is a need for fences brokers or clearing houses for these
hot items.
Countermeasures for Casual Pilferage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Spot: check on outgoing vehicles and persons.

An aggressive security education and indoctrination program with emphasis that
crime does not pay.
Superiors should set example of integrity and desirable moral climate for employees
in the establishment.
All employees must be enjoined to report or any loss to security.
Inventory and control methods should be done especially to pilferable items.
Control of tools equipment and sets.
Countermeasures for Systematic Pilferage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Guards and electronic surveillance on all exits.

Package and material control system.
Parking area outside perimeter fence of establishment.
Careful screening and background checks on applicants to weed out potential thieves.
Investigation of all losses quickly and efficiently to determine modus operandi or obtain
clues.
198
6. Alert all patrols to check areas and buildings for possible concealment of stolen
properties.
7. Install mechanical, electrical, electronic detection and alarm devices where needed and
applicable.
8. Establish an effective lock and key control system.
9. Use of appropriate perimeter fencing and lighting for parking facilities and areas for
vehicles and persons.
10. Store bulk quantities of pilferable items in enclosed security areas and distribute them to
using section in limited quantities.
11. Establish accurate inventory and accounting methods for procurement, use and disposal.
12. Establish close liaison with governmental law enforcement and intelligence agencies.
SECURITY SURVEY AND INSPECTION
What is Security System?
The information pertaining to one of the most important security services offered to a
head of office is the conduct of security surveys and security inspections. Every unit chief desires
a security system that will reduce to an absolute minimum the possibility of espionage, sabotage
and compromise of classified information on his office or unit. Since there are many security
countermeasures to be considered, heads of offices should utilized specially trained personnel, if
the efforts of espionage and sabotage agents and other criminal elements are to be negated.
Security is an extremely complex program an objective analysis of an office heads security
program by security survey and inspection personnel can be of great assistance in determining
the efficiency of any established security program.
What is a Security Survey?
It is an estimate of the security standards of a unit, and is conducted to enable the
responsible officer to recognize and evaluate security hazards and determine protective
measures necessary to the prevention of sabotage, espionage, subversive activities and other
criminal acts inimical towards the interest and/or mission of the unit and/or command.
What is Security Inspection?

It is a check of how well existing security measures and regulations are being carried out
within a command. A security inspection may also include an investigation of alleged or
suspected security violations. Physical security is concerned with forces, entrances and exists,
guards, traffic control, lighting, fire control, and with such other physical measures, which, if
properly established and maintained, will deny access to, unauthorized persons.
Security Survey Distinguish with Security Inspection
The terms Security Survey and Security Inspection to accentuate the particular
differences between the two types of services, are defined as fallows:
Security Survey is defined as a counterintelligence service to assist heads of office in
determining the security measures required to protect key installations from possible sabotage,
espionage, subversion, and unauthorized disclosures of, or access to, classified information or
material contained therein.
Role of Security Officer in Offices
With the exception of the office head, the security officer is more interested in the survey
that any other individual of the office. It is the security officer who is directly responsible to the
head of office for proper maintenance of security of the security program of the office.
A survey Specialist must be cognizant of established security procedures relative of the
office since much of the survey including the resulting recommendations will be affected by these
measures.
Authority in Conducting Security Survey
199
The Unit head may request a survey of his entire office or of specific function of a unit
within the office. When higher authorities directs a security survey to be conducted for one of its
subordinate office, an information copy of the correspondence may also be forwarded to the unit
to be surveyed. It must be remembered that a security survey is not conducted solely for the
purpose of establishing a security program of an office. The head of office is directly responsible
for establishing a security system for his office after which a survey may be conducted to
determine if the program is adequate in comparison with the importance of the office to the
overall national objective.
EXECUTIVE/VIP PROTECTION
Executive/VIP Security
Are those measures taken by Agents, Security Officers, Law Enforcement officers or an
Agency /officers to protect heads of state, foreign, national or local dignitaries, civilian or military
against any personal injury, assassination, sabotage, and espionage. These may include the
protection of any government or civilian officials and individual utilized as government witnesses.
Basic Security Principles in VIP Security
Every phase of security must be carefully in advance, to include the importance of the
individual to be protected, political attitude of the population, obstacles involved, means of
transportation, and duration of the security mission.
Physical protection should consist of a series of protection cordons. These protective
cordons may be composed of a combination of personnel or physical security barriers.
Central direction and unity of effort
The officer in charge should be given full responsibility for all phases of the security
mission.
Close coordination must be established with all local military and civilian authorities.
Civilian authorities will include police and other interested city, municipal or other local officials.
The agencies responsible for each of the security plan must be clearly defined.
Arrangements should be made for local police to control local inhabitants. All available
intelligence channels should be used to obtain information of potential danger areas, persons, or
groups.
Coordination must be accomplished by an advance party after the official itinerary is
received.
Protective measures must be through but inconspicuous and afford security without
impending the protectee/VIPs performance of his functions.
The degree of protection is dependent upon the degree of contact with the general public desired
by the protectee.
A basic element of VIP/Executive protection is the identification and the elimination of
possible sources of danger against a VIP/Executive before the danger becomes real.
Plans for a perimeter of protection must be surprise proof and flexible enough to allow a
quick response to any emergency.
Defense-in-Depth Theory
There is no impenetrable barrier. If an unfriendly individual, organization or government
can devote time, money, personnel, material or imagination to passing a barrier, he can succeed.
To achieve the ultimate results from a physical security system, it is necessary to add
barrier to barrier, delay time, until sufficient delay time has been accumulated to allow control of
any foreseeable penetration.
Therefore, rather than attempting to achieve exclusion through the use of a single barrier,
security must be built upon accumulated time or a system of Defense-in-Depth.
Contingency Planning
200
Security planning should be flexible. Weather conditions, mechanical failures and failure
of lighting systems are three-ever-present potential hazards. The unexpected arrival of large
numbers visitors, audience is another situation frequently encountered. Last-minute changes in
the security plan or schedule of events occur routinely. The security plan therefore must be
sufficiently fluid to cover these and other eventualities, all of which present hazards.
Mission Orientation
An orientation/briefing must be conducted by the officer in charge or the protection plan,
during which he explains fully the contents of the plan. Some topics to be emphasized are:
Conduct of Security Personnel
Police/Security personnel assigned to these duties are selected to the basis of the
appearance, alertness, and intelligence, as well as their ability to act quickly and correctly in
unforeseen circumstances.
Restriction on the circulation of the individuals should be strictly enforced. Before any person
maybe allowed to get near the protectee or his effects, the person is checked carefully for
identification and the authority for his presence is established.
Use of weapons
There is always the danger of accidental discharge and injury of innocent persons when
weapons are carried. All protective personnel must be qualified to fire the weapons with which
they are armed.
Crowd Control
Protective personnel should understand the principles of crowd control. They should not
show not show prejudice or sympathy, or become involved in any grievances expressed by the
crowd.
Security Preparation in Local/Foreign Travel

Advance Preparations
Advance preparation refers to the activities of arranging timetable/ itinerary and
coordinating with those concerned with visit local or foreign law enforcement security men.
Conduct security survey and inspection of routes, quarters, conference, luncheon and or
inaugural site. Arrange for security measures for motorcade routes, quarters, conference site, etc.
Confer with local or foreign security men about potential danger to the Executive, such as
persons, organizations or obtain copies of photographs and place these persons under
surveillance.
Motorcades
Select and consider the best motorcade route, preferably the most direct route to
destination. Select a route which affords a chance to have alternate routes if something
happened on the motorcade route.
Review or dry run the route and take notes on the requirements for controlling the crowd
and traffic and deployment of foot patrolmen and motorcycle police at various positions along the
route. Arrange for police or buildings custodian to inspect buildings along the motorcade routes.
Security in Inaugural/Conference/Luncheon sites
1.
2.
3.
4.
Control access to the building/sites

Closing off and policing areas around it,
Securing rooftops and adjoining buildings.
Ensure the presence of numerous police officers inside and around the
building/site.
201
Security in VIP Office/Quarters/Residence.

1.
Defense-in-Depths Barriers Concentric Patterns (any attack will have to

penetrate layer after layer of defenders, the heaviest layer of defense, being closest,
being closest to the Executive/VIP.)
2.
Outer ring- sidewalks, stationed in front of quarters/residence/office, covering all
entrances, front, center, side and rear
3.
Middle ring- inside quarters, office/residence, covering all stairways and elevators.
4.
Inner ring- immediately outside executive/VIPS door, or close to Executive/VIP if
outside
VIP Security Measures in all Areas
1. Establish screening points to allow only authorized persons access to the protected
area/person and to keep out those who have no valid reasons to enter same.
2. Duty stations or posts should be marked on a floor/ground plan or sketch/map.
3. If an unusually large crowd are expected along a parade route security men may call on
the armed forces to station troops along the line of march.
4. If the VIP travels by train, a pilot engine must run the trucks IN advance of the VIP train.
5. Every manhole and sewer along the route should be sealed.
6. Every single building and all its occupants along the route should be checked.
7. Bellboys, waiters, cooks should be cleared.
8. Food to be cooked must be examined and samples be sent to laboratory for analysis.
9. Inspect for time bombs, radio - active materials and fire hazards.
10. Inspect closets and under the tables.
11. Never allow the VIP to stop his car in a crowd if it can be avoided.
12. Drivers for the VIP can be competent, reliable, well trained in protective driving and must
be alert for dangers and to take instant action.
13. While walking, it is necessary to increase the number of guards because the VIP
becomes an easy target.
14. In case the VIP is going to speak at hasty made stage, its strength and capacity should
be inspected to limit the persons going up to stage.
15. During afternoon sessions, lightning facilities must be checked or installed. It is estimated
that the program may reach up to nighttime.
16. An alternate generator fore emergency use is made available if source of electric power
is from a central source. Designate qualified electrician to watch main source or switch.
17. If traveling by air, close the door of VIP plane when parked and place constant guards
every time.
18. If traveling by watercraft, select boats of type and size capable of facing danger at the
ocean. Thorough inspection should be made on the ship and check the adequacy of
lifesavers and emergency facilities.
19. All non- uniformed men must wear signs or countersigns for identification.
20. Checklist of all security hazards noted in the course of security survey or inspection
should be given to the OIC for reference/planning.
21. Security plans and specific duties of men assigned or details must be stated.
22. All written instructions must be classified SECRET.
Other Guidelines for VIP Security
Security Formations assist in allowing the VIP to have the best possible protection and
defensible position even for the limited amount of manpower while protectee is mobile/in transit,
or static.
Threat evaluation is to ascertain at varying times and function which will give the best
formation sequence or set. Other considerations are threat levels and type and advance planning
for staff levels.
The Need for Close - in /Escort security officers, such as first aid requirements (which
differs from location to location) and special weapons (a real headache-the less you need to rely
on them, the better), and other logistical needs must be considered. One must have the ability to
use a lot of common sense and attention to detail, to give the possible protection, without
overbearing or on top of the protectee/principal. Fully aware with this information, the Closein/Security Escort team will be well equipped, with an understanding of their respective position,
alternatives and functions.
These could be varied hourly, in response to current threat level,
and areas of coverage or occasion in any of the following:
Crowds, restaurants, home, office
202
Public transport, bus, taxi

Friends of protectee/principal, business
Movie theatre
Functions: private, public, business
Huge crowds: a tight-packed area of swirling bodies
Elevators: opening a door to the unknown, stopping at unknown floors.
Escalators: progressing into the unknown, Turn side on, so that you can see the front at
one side and the area behind you. As you rise with the escalator, you will become level
with the floor behind before you, giving you something to watch.
Stairs: give way, standing, doors on way
Doors: cant see through them, an unknown reality.
Street lights: workmen, doorways, shops you are walking past, hotels or clubs and
doorways should always be covered the protectee/Principal walks past
Threat Analysis and Reaction

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concentrate - concentration do not get loss or be left behind, it takes only a

second or two {to get killed}
Anticipation - anticipate your fellow officer/Escorts moves, you can keep the
protective formation together nice and well coordinated. Because of obstacles,
obstructions, and areas of threats, the movement of Close-in security/Escorts will be
spasmodic and spontaneous.
Relaxation/Observation- observation should be done in a relaxed manner. Be
very attentive but looking relaxed.
Common sense- common sense comes from using your brain, foresight,
experience, and good training.
Participation within the Team- the team must train together and understand
completely what their job is and their responsibilities. There will be big gaps in the
defenses if we do not have participation within the team.
RKM2008

LEA Reviewer

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

LEA Reviewer

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

CRIMINOLOGY REVIEW CENTER

Performance Effectiveness + Performance Efficiency = High Productivity

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Interpersonal Roles working directly with other people

Figurehead hosting and attending official ceremonies

Informational Roles exchange information with other people

Entrepreneur seeking problems to solve and opportunities to

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Characteristics of Bureaucratic Organization

Division of labor based on a specified sphere of competence

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Gulick and Urwick (1920-1937)

Human Relations Approach

Elton Mayo (the Hawthorne study)

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Importance to the Police Manager

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

objectives of the organization

Police Personnel Policies

Acquiring competent personnel - includes human resources

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Must not have been dishonorably discharged from military employment or

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Letter of application if none has been submitted

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Character and Background Investigation - the Screening Committee shall cause a

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Types of Police Training Programs

Basic Recruit Training

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

The In-Service Training Programs

Junior Leadership Training for PO1 to PO3

It serves as guide for promotion, salary

It increases productivity and efficiency of

Uses of Police Appraisal

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

PNP Appraisal System

To invest a member of the police force

Merit includes length of service in the present rank, and

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Availability of vacant position.

Appropriate Eligibility - Whenever

Regular Promotion - Regular promotion shall be based on the

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Promotion by Virtue of Exhibited Acts (Special Promotion)

Promotion by Virtue of Position

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

ANGELES UNIVERSITY FORUNDATION

Incentives and Awards

Police Medal of Valor

Posthumous Award in case a police officer dies.